US20100084992A1 - Intensity control and color mixing of light emitting devices - Google Patents
Intensity control and color mixing of light emitting devices Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20100084992A1 US20100084992A1 US12/565,492 US56549209A US2010084992A1 US 20100084992 A1 US20100084992 A1 US 20100084992A1 US 56549209 A US56549209 A US 56549209A US 2010084992 A1 US2010084992 A1 US 2010084992A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- signal
- light
- lighting device
- duty cycle
- intensity
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B47/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
- H05B47/10—Controlling the light source
- H05B47/175—Controlling the light source by remote control
- H05B47/18—Controlling the light source by remote control via data-bus transmission
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02B—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO BUILDINGS, e.g. HOUSING, HOUSE APPLIANCES OR RELATED END-USER APPLICATIONS
- Y02B20/00—Energy efficient lighting technologies, e.g. halogen lamps or gas discharge lamps
- Y02B20/40—Control techniques providing energy savings, e.g. smart controller or presence detection
Definitions
- the present application is generally related to lighting systems.
- the present application is directed to systems and methods for controlling and modulating intensity of the light emitted by a light emitting device.
- Lighting systems may include light emitting devices organized in various configurations depending on the illumination applications. Some lighting systems provide only limited control of the features, such as the light intensity. Some traditional lighting systems may control the light sources only by using switches or preset controls. Such systems generally do not have a capability to provide a more sophisticated lighting control. Some more advanced systems may offer some additional lighting controls, but such systems often require expensive upgrades or entirely new installations
- the present disclosure is directed to an inexpensive yet intelligent solution for controlling light intensity and color mixing of light emitted by standard lighting devices or lighting fixtures.
- a lighting device such as a standard lighting fixture installed in an office or a home, may be used in communication with one or more other lighting devices which may use controllers to send control signals coordinating operations between the light sources.
- the intensity of light emitted by a lighting device, or a light source may be controlled via a received signal that includes one or more digital patterns identifying the intensity or brightness.
- the present disclosure relates to a method for modulating light intensity or brightness emitted by a light emitting device using a digital pattern of a signal.
- a controller may receive a setting for an intensity of light for a remote lighting device.
- the controller may be any controller of a lighting system.
- the controller may further receive an instruction to control the remote lighting device.
- the controller may generate for the remote lighting device, a signal having an instruction, a time period and a duty cycle corresponding to the setting for the intensity of light.
- the time period may comprise a first time interval and a second time interval.
- a first portion of the signal within the first time interval may comprise a first digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction.
- a duty cycle of the first portion of the signal may be different than a duty cycle of the second portion of the signal.
- the first digital pattern may comprise at least two bits.
- the remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the signal received from the controller.
- the duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval and the second time interval comprises a high value.
- the remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking an action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern.
- the controller generates for the remote lighting device, the signal having the time period comprising a third time interval.
- the signal may comprise a third portion of the signal within the third time interval, a third digital pattern of the third portion of the signal within the third time interval corresponding to at least a second portion of the instruction.
- the remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the signal. The duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval, the second time interval and the third time interval comprises a high value.
- the remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking a second action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern and the second portion of the instruction identified by the third digital pattern.
- the controller receives a second setting for a second intensity of light for a remote lighting device.
- the second intensity of light may be different than the intensity of light.
- the controller may generate for the remote lighting device, a second signal having a second time period and a second duty cycle corresponding to the second setting for the intensity of light.
- the second time period may comprise a new first time interval and a new second time interval.
- the remote lighting device may determine the second duty cycle of the second time period of the second signal received from the controller.
- the second duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the second signal within the new first time interval and the new second time interval comprises a high value.
- the remote lighting device may establish the second intensity of the light emitted based on the second duty cycle.
- the controller transmits to the remote lighting device, the signal via a wire used for providing electrical power to the remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device emits light based on the established intensity of light.
- the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle of the time period based on a ratio of a sum of durations of time within time period for which the signal comprises a high value to a total duration of the time period.
- the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction that instructs the remote lighting device to set a brightness value of a red light source, green light source or a blue light source of the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to turn off the light by dimming the light down. In other embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to enter a learning mode to accept an address assigned to the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to send a configuration status of the remote lighting device.
- the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction that instructs the remote lighting device to set a maximum intensity of the light emitted for the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising a continuous stream of data bits divided into a plurality of time periods, where the time period is one time period of the plurality of time periods. In some embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the first portion of the signal consisting of the first time interval and the second portion of the signal consisting of the second time interval.
- the present disclosure relates to a system for modulating intensity of light emitted by a light emitting device using a digital pattern of a signal.
- the system may include a controller receiving a setting for an intensity of light for a remote lighting device and an instruction to control the remote lighting device.
- the controller may generate for the remote lighting device, a signal having an instruction, a time period and a duty cycle corresponding to the setting for the intensity of light.
- the time period may comprise a first time interval and a second time interval.
- a first portion of the signal within the first time interval may comprise a first digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction.
- a duty cycle of the first portion of the signal may be different than a duty cycle of the second portion of the signal.
- the first digital pattern may comprise at least two bits.
- the remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the signal received from the controller.
- the duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval and the second time interval comprises a high value.
- the remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking an action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of an environment of a lighting system and components of the lighting system;
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram that depicts another embodiment of a lighting system and components of the lighting system
- FIG. 1C is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of a communication system between light sources
- FIG. 1D is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of a light source control and communication
- FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B are block diagrams of embodiments of digital communication between light sources, intensity control and master/slave control;
- FIG. 3 is a flow chart illustrating steps of a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal.
- FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B are block diagrams of embodiments of additional light intensity control embodiments
- FIG. 4C is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for modulating intensity of light using a digital pattern of a signal
- FIG. 5A is a block diagram of a system or an apparatus, such as a non-contact switch for selecting and controlling one or more light sources;
- FIG. 5B is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for detecting presence of an object or a person via a non-contact switch.
- FIG. 6A is a block diagram of an embodiment for lighting devices transmitting power, intensity and instructions for assigning a status to a lighting device via a connection;
- FIG. 6B is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of method for assigning a status to a lighting device via a connection used by the lighting device for receiving intensity and/or power.
- Lighting system 100 comprises a number of lighting system components which may be used for a variety of lighting or illumination applications in numerous environments.
- FIG. 1A illustrates a block diagram of an environment within which lighting system 100 may be used.
- FIG. 1A illustrates a lighting system 100 comprising lighting system components called lighting devices, or light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C.
- the lighting system 100 also includes additional lighting system components: a communicator 125 , a controller 120 , a master/slave addressor 130 and a power supply 140 . All the lighting system components illustrated by FIG. 1A are connected to each other via connections 105 .
- Connections 105 are depicted running into or running through a network 104 .
- network 104 comprises a plurality of connections 105 through which signals, information or data packets, or electrical power are propagated.
- network 104 and connections 105 provide connections between any of the lighting system components.
- FIG. 1A depicts light sources 110 comprising various components.
- FIG. 1A presents a light source 110 A comprising: a controller 120 A, a communicator 125 A which further comprises an address 127 A, a master/slave addressor 130 A, and a power supply 140 A.
- FIG. 1A also illustrates a light source 110 B which includes only a communicator 125 B.
- Light source 110 C is shown by FIG. 1A comprising a controller 120 C and an address 127 C.
- Other lighting system components such as a communicator 125 , controller 120 , power supply 140 and master/slave addressor 130 are illustrated in FIG. 1A as individual and independent lighting system components not comprising any additional subcomponents.
- any of the communicator 125 , controller 120 , power supply 140 and master/slave addressor 130 may comprise any number of lighting system components or subcomponents.
- the term lighting system component may be used interchangeably for any component or subcomponent within a lighting system 100 or for any component related to a lighting system 100 .
- lighting device, device, light source, lighting fixture or a lighting unit may also be used interchangeably and may comprise any number of similar or other lighting system 100 components.
- Lighting system 100 may be any system including one or more lighting devices 100 , also referred to as light sources 110 .
- lighting system 100 is a system comprising one or more light sources or light fixtures controlled by one or more lighting system components.
- a lighting system 100 includes a number of light sources 110 connected to each other.
- a lighting system 100 includes a number of light sources 110 connected to a power supply 140 or a source of electricity, such as an electrical outlet.
- lighting system 100 is a system comprising a plurality of light sources 110 or other lighting system components connected to each other and communicating with each other.
- lighting system 100 comprises a plurality of lighting system components electrically connected to each other in parallel. In some embodiments, lighting system 100 comprises a plurality of lighting system components electrically connected to each other in series. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system 100 comprises components, such as light sources 110 or power supplies 140 connected to each other in parallel or in series or in a combination of parallel and series electrical connections. Sometimes, lighting system 100 includes any number of systems, products, components or devices assisting any functionality, operation or control of light sources 110 . In a number of embodiments, lighting system 100 includes one or more components, systems, products or devices assisting or controlling communication between a light source 110 and another light source 110 or another component, device, system or product.
- lighting system 100 is any system comprising a plurality of light sources 110 , such as light fixtures for example, illuminating or lighting an area or a space. In many embodiments, lighting system 100 is any system comprising a plurality of light sources 110 , providing illumination or lighting an area or a space as controlled by one or more lighting system components.
- lighting system 100 comprises one or more lighting devices, or light sources 110 .
- lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 comprising a power supply 140 .
- lighting system 100 comprises a master/slave addressor 130 , a controller 120 , a power supply 140 and a communicator 125 as separate and independent components of the lighting system 100 .
- lighting system components are electrically connected to one or more light sources 110 via connections, cables, wires, lines or any electrically conductive mediums.
- lighting system components are electrically connected to one or more light sources 110 via network 104 .
- lighting system 100 comprises any number of lighting system components connected to each other or other lighting system components either directly via connections 105 , via combinations of connections 105 and network 104 or via one or more networks 104 .
- the lighting system 100 is installed, deployed or otherwise provided in any type or form of indoor, outdoor, residential or commercial environment. In one embodiment, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in any type of indoor environment. In some embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a residential building or a room. In a number of embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a commercial building or an office area. In many embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a store or a mall. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a hallway, or a parking garage. In numerous embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a restaurant or a museum.
- the lighting system 100 is installed in a laboratory or a research or development laboratory, area or an institution. In some embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed in an outside environment, such as a stadium, or a concert stage. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a town square, residential area, or section of a town or city.
- lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which are different from other light sources 110 of the lighting system 100 .
- lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which are same or similar to other light sources 110 of the lighting system 100 .
- lighting system 100 includes only one or two light sources 110 while in other embodiments, lighting system 100 includes a very large number of light sources 110 , such as tens or hundreds.
- a plurality of lighting systems 100 are electrically connected to each other and form one larger lighting system 100 or a lighting system farm.
- lighting system 100 includes a plurality of separate lighting systems 100 or lighting system farms.
- Connections 105 are represented in FIG. 1A by lines connecting components of lighting system 100 to other lighting system 100 components via network 104 .
- Connections 105 may comprise any type of medium or means for transferring, transporting or propagating electrical power, electronic analog or digital signals, or any other type of communication signal between any two components or devices of the lighting system 100 .
- connection 105 is a wire or a plurality of wires of any size or gauge capable of conducting electricity or an electronic signal.
- connection 105 is a cable including one or more electrical conductors electrically insulated from each other and other conductors.
- connection 105 comprises a plurality of separate and mutually insulated conductive mediums, each one transmitting a separate signal or information.
- connection 105 is a cable including a plurality of wires insulated with any non-conductive material, the wires being used for electrical power distribution in residential or commercial areas.
- connection 105 includes a cable or a group of wires of any size and gauge comprising any electrical current conducting material.
- connection 105 comprises an optical fiber transmitting an optical signal.
- connection 105 is a coaxial cable.
- connection 105 is a wire harness comprising any number of sheathed or unsheathed wires, each wire transmitting a separate signal without interference from an outside wire.
- connection 105 is a wire harness comprising a plurality of mediums for transmitting electrical signals and optical signals. In some embodiments, connection 105 is a wire harness comprising three separate mediums for transmitting electrical signals or conducting electricity. In a number of embodiments, connection 105 comprises a plurality of current conducting mediums wherein each of the mediums is sheathed or electrically insulated from other conducting mediums of the connection 105 .
- Connection 105 is a wireless connection between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 comprises a medium for wireless communication between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- the connection 105 is a wireless communication link between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- the connection 105 is a medium through which wireless communication of two or more lighting system 100 components is propagated.
- the connection 105 may comprise any number of wireless communication links and wired communication links.
- connection 105 comprises a number of connection 105 components each of which may further comprise any number of wireless communication links for communication between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 may refer to any transfer of information between any two or more lighting system 100 components without the use of electrical conductors or wires.
- connection 105 comprises any one, or any combination of: a metal wire, a metal line, a cable having one or more wires or lines, a light guide, an optical fiber and a wireless link or wireless connection system.
- connection 105 comprises a plurality of connection 105 components comprising metal lines or wires, wireless links, optical fibers or cables.
- Network 104 may be any medium or means for transferring electrical power, electronic data, electromagnetic waves, electrical signals, or communication signals between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- network 104 is a mesh of connections 105 connecting any lighting system component with any other component of the lighting system 100 .
- network 104 comprises a number of connections 105 connecting light sources 110 , with each other.
- network 104 comprises a number of connections 105 connecting any lighting system 100 component to any other lighting system 100 component.
- Network 104 in some embodiments, is plurality of connections 105 connecting specific lighting system 100 components to other specific lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system components are connected to other lighting system components via one or more connections 105 .
- the network 104 may also be a wireless network and comprise any number of wireless communication links between any number of lighting system 100 components.
- the network 104 comprises wireless links and non-wireless links, such as connections via wires.
- Network 104 in some embodiments, is a plurality of connections 105 connecting any of the lighting system 100 components to any other lighting system 100 components, such as a lighting device 110 A to lighting devices 110 B and 110 C and vice versa.
- a device 110 also referred to as a lighting device 110 or a light source 110 , is any device performing or executing a function or an instruction, or any device operating, outputting or performing as instructed or commanded by an instruction or information received by the device via a connection 105 .
- device 110 is any device or an apparatus performing a functionality as directed by a signal.
- the device 110 may be any electrical, electromechanical or mechanical component, such as a motor for example.
- the device 110 may be an engine, a turbine, or may be any apparatus or a system comprising a motor or an engine.
- device 110 is a device, apparatus or a material capable of producing, emitting or emanating light or electromagnetic radiation.
- a device 110 is any device performing any functionality as instructed via a connection 105 or any device transmitting instruction to other devices 110 , even if the device 110 or the devices 110 receiving or transmitting instructions are not light emitting devices.
- Devices 110 may be any electronic or electrical components, devices, products or apparatuses performing a function or an operation in response to an electrical or electronic signal.
- device 110 is a lighting device 110 or a lighting fixture, a light source, or any device producing or emitting light.
- device 110 or a light source 110 is a fluorescent light.
- light source 110 is a lamp or a light bulb.
- light source is a white light emitting diode.
- light source 110 is a semiconductor light emitting device, such as a light emitting diode of any spectral or wavelength range.
- the light source 110 is a broadband lamp or a broadband light source.
- the light source 110 is a black light.
- light source 110 is a hollow cathode lamp. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a fluorescent tube light source. In some embodiments, the light source 110 is a neon or argon lamp. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a plasma lamp. In certain embodiments, light source 110 is a xenon flash lamp. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a mercury lamp. In some embodiments, light source 110 is a metal halide lamp. In certain embodiments, light source 110 is a sulfur lamp. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a laser, or a laser diode.
- light source 110 is an OLED, PHOLED, QDLED, or any other variation of a light source 110 utilizing an organic material.
- light source 110 is a monochromatic light source.
- light source 110 is a polychromatic light source.
- light source 110 is a light source emitting light partially in the spectral range of ultraviolet light.
- light source 110 is a device, product or a material emitting light partially in the spectral range of visible light.
- light source 110 is a device, product or a material partially emanating or emitting light in the spectral range of the infra red light.
- light source 110 is a device, product or a material emanating or emitting light in the visible spectral range.
- light source 110 includes a filter to control the spectral range of the light emitted from the light source 110 .
- light source 110 includes a light guide, an optical fiber or a waveguide through which light is emitted from the light source 110 .
- light source 110 includes one or more mirrors for reflecting or redirecting of light.
- lighting device 110 reflects light emitted from another light source.
- light source 110 includes a light reactive material affecting the light emitted, such as a polarizer, filter or a prism.
- light source 110 is a coherent light source.
- light source 110 , or a lighting device 110 is an incoherent light source.
- the device 110 may be any light emitting device, comprising one or more light sources and capable of providing light to an area or a space.
- lighting device 110 is a semiconductor light emitting diode producing an incoherent light of any given spectral or power range.
- lighting device 110 is an ultra-violet light emitting source used for illuminating a light reactive material. A light reactive material sometimes, in response to the illuminated light absorbs the light, and in response to the absorbed light, produces a light of its own.
- lighting device 110 is an LED or a light source used for color rendering of the fruits, vegetables, meats or any light reactive materials.
- lighting device 110 emits light which alters the color of the object illuminated by the light source 110 as perceived by the human eye.
- lighting system 100 is used for illuminating an object whose appearance of color pigment is shifted as perceived by a human eye in response to the illumination of the object using a specific spectral range of light. For example, an object of a yellow pigment may appear orange to a human eye when illuminated by purple light. In another example, a blue pigment may appear black to a human eye when illuminated by orange light. In some embodiments, an object of a red pigment, when illuminated by a deep red light may be perceived by human eye as a even more red.
- light source 110 emits a light having a specific spectral range tailored for illuminating a specific object and creating a perception to a human observer of an object having a different color pigment as the result of the illumination.
- an array of light sources 110 are used to vary the wavelength and intensity of the light emitted.
- light source 110 is a monochromatic light source, emitting only a single wavelength of light.
- light source 110 is a tunable light source, emitting a light of varying spectral range.
- light source 110 is a broadband light utilizing a filter for narrowing down the light spectral range.
- Light source 110 in some embodiments, is any device, product or material emitting, emanating or illuminating light of any spectral or power range, any constant output or varying intensity output, and any type of coherent or incoherent light.
- light source 110 creates color of the light emitted from the light source 110 using a plurality of light sources emitting specific wavelengths of light which individually or mixed produce the color of the light emitted.
- light source 110 includes one or more light sources emitting a monochromatic light.
- light source 110 includes one or more light sources emitting a relatively monochromatic light, wherein relatively means about ninety percent monochromatic.
- light source 110 includes one or more light sources emitting a light having a narrow spectral range which when mixed with other light produces white light or light of a color different from the original color.
- monochromatic light is a light having only a single wavelength of light.
- Relatively monochromatic light is a light similar to a light emitted by a monochromatic laser or a laser diode and it may have a spectral wavelength range of one or a few nanometers. Narrow spectral range, in some embodiments, means a range of about five to fifty nanometers of wavelength range.
- light source 110 emits one or more of any of the monochromatic, relatively monochromatic or a narrow spectral range light individually or in any combination. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 emits blue light, such as the light having wavelength length between 460 nanometers and 490 nanometers. Light emanated or emitted from the light source, in some embodiments, has shorter wavelengths or a higher energy than the visible light.
- light emitted or emanated from a light source 110 has a spectral range at least partially in the ultraviolet range and at least partially in a visible range. In a plurality of embodiments, the light emitted or emanated from a light source 110 has a spectral range at least partially in the visible range and at least partially in the infrared range. In a number of embodiments, light emitted from a light source 110 is pulsed or varying in intensity, or continuous and/or without any interruption in emission. In some embodiments, light emitted from light source 110 is periodically or non-periodically pulsed.
- a light source 110 comprises a plurality of light sources, each of which emits a light having a partially different wavelength from light emitted by other light sources of the light source 110 .
- light source 110 comprises a plurality of light sources each emitting a light of different color or a different wavelength or wavelength range.
- light source 110 comprises a plurality of light sources, wherein each of the light sources emits a light having a different intensity or power range.
- the device 110 may also comprise a wireless device, such as a wireless signal receiver or a wireless signal transmitter.
- light source 110 comprises an antenna for receiving or for transmitting wireless communication.
- light source 110 comprises a wireless connector, a wireless receiver or a wireless signal emitter.
- light source 110 comprises a device or a unit controlling and implementing wireless communication between two or more light sources 110 .
- the light source 110 may comprise a wireless link, such as an infrared channel or satellite band.
- the light source 110 comprises a wireless RF network port, such as a network port supporting IEEE 802.11 wireless communication protocols or Bluetooth technology.
- any lighting system 100 component may comprise any number of wireless communication devices, such as wireless network ports, wireless transmitters or receivers or wireless transceiver used for wireless communication between the lighting system 100 components.
- the light source 110 comprises a controller 120 . In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a communicator 125 . In a number of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a master/slave addressor 130 . In some embodiments, light source 110 comprises a power supply 140 . In certain embodiments, light source 110 comprises any of, or any combination of: controller 120 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 and power supply 140 . In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises an enclosure which encloses any of or any combination of: controller 120 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 and power supply 140 . In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a connection 105 which can be used to connect the light source 110 with any other light sources 110 or other lighting system components.
- Light system components may transmit to the light sources 110 signals comprising any number of instructions.
- Instructions such as the instruction 650 , may include any type and form of instruction or command for operating, configuring, controlling or managing on or more light sources 110 .
- an instruction comprises a command to set a master or slave status to a lighting device.
- instruction includes an instruction to turn a lighting device on or off.
- instruction instructs a lighting device to change intensity of light, wavelength of light, pulse of light.
- instruction comprises a command to change or set up a configuration of a device, such as a pulsing illumination mode or a constant illumination mode.
- the instruction may also include a command to include a lighting device 110 into a zone or a group of a plurality of lighting devices.
- instruction comprises a command to assign an address to the lighting device.
- instruction comprises a command to operate the light for a duration of time identified by the instruction.
- a lighting device may receive an instruction to maintain an operation at a current intensity for a specific duration of time.
- the instruction identifies a command to turn off a lighting device.
- the instruction may also identify when to turn off the lighting device.
- the instruction may include any type and form of command, configuration, request, setting or data needed by the lighting device to implement any function of the lighting system described herein.
- controller 120 is any unit, system, device or component capable of controlling, modulating light emitted or emanated from any light source 110 .
- controller 120 includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware for controlling, managing or otherwise directing the operation and/or performance of one or more light sources 110 .
- Controller 120 may include any type and form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware embodied in forming instructions or enabling control of one or more light sources 110 .
- controller 120 comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein.
- Controller 120 may include any type and form of executable instructions, including an application, a program, a library, a process, a service, a task or a thread. In one embodiment, controller 120 provides, includes or controls power output for one or more of light sources 110 .
- light sources 110 include any type and form of executable instructions, including an application, a program, a library, a process, a service, a task or a thread.
- controller 120 provides, includes or controls power output for one or more of light sources 110 .
- terms light emanated from a light source, light produced from a light source or light emitted from a light source may be used interchangeably and may comprise the meaning of any of these terms.
- controller 120 is any unit used for controlling one or more light sources 110 .
- controller 120 is any device, system, structure, circuit, piece or hardware or software used for controlling a light source 110 or any other lighting system component.
- controller 120 comprises a combination of any device, system structure, circuit, piece of hardware or software, computer program, structure or algorithm used for controlling a light source 110 or any other lighting system component.
- controller 120 includes logic, functions or operations to establish, determine, adapt, coordinate, manage or control any characteristics of light emitted from one or more light sources 110 .
- controller 120 includes logic, functions or operations to establish, determine, adapt, coordinate, manage or control any characteristics of any output of any lighting system component.
- controller 120 controls a light source 110 which produces a light of a predetermined wavelength. In another embodiment, the controller 120 directs the light source to emit a light having a wavelength in a predetermined range. In some embodiments, the controller 120 directs the light source to emanate a light at a predetermined frequency or within a predetermined frequency range. In other embodiments, controller 120 adjusts one or more characteristics of the light to be emitted or emanated from the light source 110 . In a plurality of embodiments, controller 120 establishes or adjusts the color and/or color temperature of the light to emanate from the light source. For example, the color may be established or adjusted based on a color rendering index or value thereof. In another example, the color temperate may be established or adjusted based on a temperature value, such as for example, Kelvin scale. In some embodiments, controller 120 comprises functionality for detecting, or detects a duty cycle of a signal.
- controller 120 responsive to information from any one of a light source 110 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 or a power supply 140 , controller 120 establishes or adjusts intensity of the light emitted from a light source 110 . In a number of embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 or a power supply 140 , controller 120 establishes or adjusts spectral range of the light emitted from a light source 110 .
- controller 120 responsive to information from any one of a light source 110 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 or a power supply 140 , controller 120 establishes or adjusts wavelength of the light emitted from a light source 110 . In numerous embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 or a power supply 140 , controller 120 establishes or adjusts frequency of pulses of the light emitted from a light source 110 .
- controller 120 responsive to information from any one of a light source 110 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 or a power supply 140 , controller 120 establishes or adjusts brightness or luminance of the light emitted from a light source 110 . In some embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110 , communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 or a power supply 140 , controller 120 establishes or adjusts chromaticity of the light emitted from a light source 110 . In many embodiments, any lighting system 100 component may comprise any number of other lighting system 100 components, such as, for example light source 110 A illustrated in FIG. 1A .
- lighting system 100 components comprising other lighting system 100 components are still controlled, modified, affected or adjusted by other lighting system 100 components not comprised by them.
- light source 110 A in FIG. 1A having a master/slave addressor 130 A in some embodiments, is affected, adjusted, modified or controlled by a master/slave addressor 130 .
- light source 110 A having a controller 120 A is affected, adjusted, controlled or modified by a controller 120 not comprised by light source 110 A.
- controller 120 comprises functionality for detecting an instruction within a duty cycle of a signal. In a number of embodiments, controller 120 comprises functionality for detecting a time interval associated with a duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments, controller 120 receives, decodes or processes a signal comprising a duty cycle of a time interval or within a time interval. In some embodiments, controller 120 receives, decodes or processes an instruction comprised within the duty cycle. In some embodiments, controller 120 receives, decodes or processes a duty cycle within a time interval wherein the duty cycle comprises a plurality of separated portions within the time interval. The controller 120 may detect or process the duty cycle within the time interval regardless if the duty cycle is a single active signal portion within the time interval or a plurality of separated active signal portions within the time interval.
- controller 120 receives an information from another lighting system 100 component and adjusts the output or the light emitted from the light source 110 in response to the communication or information received.
- information received by a controller 120 or any other lighting system 100 component comprises any one, or any combination of: a command, a signal, an instruction, a digital or analog code, a pulse, a data bit, a data byte, data or any form of electronic or electrical signal.
- controller 120 A of light source 110 A receives an information from light source 110 B or light source 110 C and changes, amends or adjusts the control of the light source 110 A in response to the received information.
- controller 120 A of light source 110 A receives an information from any one of communicator 125 , controller 120 , power supply 140 or master/slave addressor 130 and changes, amends or adjusts the control of light source 110 A in response to the received information.
- controller 120 A of light source 110 A receives an information from any one of communicator 125 A, address 127 A, master/slave addressor 130 A and adjusts, changes or amends the control of the light source 110 A in response to the received information.
- the controller 120 includes a central processing unit (CPU), a memory unit, a power supply and a current driving circuitry for powering and controlling one or more light sources 110 .
- controller 120 comprises a software application controlling a logic unit for managing the circuitry which powers up or controls one or more light sources 110 or an array of light sources within the light source 110 .
- controller 120 is a module comprising a CPU or a microprocessor, a memory and a digital logic circuit subsystem associated with control and management of the light sources 110 .
- controller 120 controls intensity of the light emitted from a light source 110 using electronic circuitry, software, or a combination of electronic circuitry and software of the controller 120 .
- controller 120 controls wavelength of the light emitted from a light source 110 using electronic circuitry, software, or a combination of electronic circuitry and software of the controller 120 .
- controller 120 controls a duty cycle of the intensity varying light emitted from the light source 110 using hardware, software or a combination of the hardware and software of the controller 120 .
- controller 120 controls or modulates the light emitted from light source 110 using a microprocessor or a processing unit, such as a central processing unit.
- controller 120 modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source 110 using a combination of hardware and software to control or modulate current through the light source 110 .
- controller 120 modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source 110 using hardware or software or any combination of hardware or software to control or modulate voltage of light source 110 . In some embodiments, controller 120 modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source 110 using hardware or software or any combination of hardware and software. In a plurality of embodiments, controller 120 modulates or controls frequency of pulses of light emitted by light source 110 using hardware or software or any combination of hardware and software.
- Controller 120 may include any type and form of device, circuitry or a function for generating a signal to be transmitted to a remote lighting device. Such a component of the controller 120 may be referred to as a signal generator 155 .
- the signal generator may further include a function, component or a device for generating digital patterns.
- Signal generator 155 generating data stream of bits forming digital patterns may also be referred to as a digital pattern generator.
- Signal generator 155 or the digital pattern generator may generate digital patterns within time intervals or time periods in order to maintain a predetermined intensity of the light to be emitted by the receiving lighting device.
- the signal generated by the signal generator 155 may include digital patterns or instructions any number of remote lighting devices. Digital patterns of the signal may include data bits having high and low values.
- the signal generator 155 of the controller 120 may include any type and form of processors, functions or components that generate the signals, including the digital patterns of the signal, such that the total duration of the signal for which the digital patterns have a high value within a predetermined time interval is predetermined. Controller 120 may generate the signal such that the digital patterns and instructions are included and embedded into the signal. The signal may further be generated to have a ratio of a duration of the signal for which the digital patterns have a high value within a time interval over the total duration of the time interval. The signal may be generated to ensure that this ratio, which may also be referred to as the duty cycle within the time interval, stays at a level indicating the intended intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device.
- the signal generator of the controller 120 may include any functionality to generate digital patterns, instructions, or any other component of the signal.
- the signal generator may embed the digital patterns and the instructions into the signal.
- the signal generator 155 may be comprised by any component of the lighting device 110 , such as a communicator 125 for example.
- Controller 120 may include any type and form of device, circuitry or a function for filtering or processing the signal received from another lighting system component. Such a component of the controller 120 may be referred as a signal processor 157 .
- the signal processor 157 may include any type and form of a filter for filtering the signal.
- the filters may include frequency filter, optical filter, power filter, intensity filter, phase filter or any other type and form of filter for filtering the signal.
- the signal processor 157 of the controller 120 may include circuitry for identifying the duty cycle of the signal within a time interval.
- the signal processor may determine the duty cycle by determining a sum of all portions of the digital pattern of the signal having a high value within a time interval.
- the signal processor determines the duty cycle by determining a ratio of a sum of all durations the digital pattern of the signal within a time interval for which the digital pattern has a high value and the entire duration of the time interval.
- the signal processor 157 may use the ratio to establish the percentage of the maximum intensity with which to operate the lighting device.
- the signal processor determines an average value of the signal for the time duration of the signal.
- the signal processor of the controller 120 determines a duty cycle by summing all the portions of any number of digital patterns of the signal having a high value within a time interval and establishing a ratio of the sum to a total duration of the time interval.
- the signal processor 157 of the controller 120 may include any functionality to generate digital patterns, instructions, or any other component of the signal.
- the signal processor 157 may embed the digital patterns and the instructions into the signal.
- the signal processor 157 may be comprised by any component of the lighting device 110 , such as a communicator 125 for example.
- the controller 120 in some embodiments, is a commercial off the shelf system or comprises a commercial off the shelf product, component or a system. In many embodiments, controller 120 is a customized or a proprietary system for controlling light sources 110 or any other lighting system components. In some embodiments, controller 120 comprises controller components such as control circuits, analog or digital logic circuitry, processors or micro-processors, memory units, software or firmware which individually, or in combination, control the output of a light source 110 . In a number of embodiments, controller 120 includes any of the products or modules manufactured or provided by Integrated Illumination Systems, Inc. referred to as I2 Systems, of Morris, Conn. In some embodiments, controller 120 includes user interface modules and light source control modules to control and drive one or more light sources 110 .
- FIG. 1A also displays a stand-alone communicator 125 connected to other lighting system 100 components via network 104 .
- communicator 125 and communicator 125 A comprise or share any embodiments of any communicator 125 .
- communicator 125 comprises all the functionality and performance characteristics of communicator 125 A and vice versa.
- Communicator 125 A or any other communicator 125 may be any device, unit or a component capable of communicating with any other lighting system 100 component.
- communicator 125 A receives an information from any component inside of light source 110 A, such as controller 120 A, address 127 A, master/slave 130 A or a power supply 140 A and in response to the received information transmits an information to any component inside of light source 110 A or any lighting system 100 component.
- communicator 125 includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware for receiving or sending information or communication, processing received information and sending information.
- communicator 125 includes any one of, or any combination of: analog or digital logic circuitry, processing units or microprocessors, memory, hardware or software for receive and processing information, performing and implementing logical functions or algorithms or transmitting information to other lighting system 100 components.
- communicator 125 includes any one of, or any combination of: analog or digital logic circuitry, processing units or microprocessors, memory, hardware or software for receive and processing information, performing and implementing logical functions or algorithms or transmitting information to other components within light source 110 A.
- Communicator 125 may include any type and form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware embodied in forming instructions or enabling control of one or more light sources 110 .
- communicator 125 A or any other communicator 125 comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein.
- Communicator 125 in some embodiments, includes any type or form of executable instructions, including an application, program, library, process, service, task or thread.
- communicator 125 detects and processes an instruction within a duty cycle of a signal. In a number of embodiments, communicator 125 detects a time interval associated with a duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator 125 receives, decodes or processes a signal comprising a duty cycle of a time interval or within a time interval. In some embodiments, communicator 125 receives, decodes or processes an instruction comprised within the duty cycle. In some embodiments, communicator 125 receives, decodes or processes a duty cycle within a time interval wherein the duty cycle comprises a plurality of separated portions within the time interval. The communicator 125 may detect or process the duty cycle within the time interval regardless if the duty cycle is a single active signal portion within the time interval or a plurality of separated active signal portions within the time interval.
- communicator 125 A receives all communication or information external to the light source 110 A and distributes the received communication to any of the components within the light source 110 A. In a plurality of embodiments, communicator 125 A receives all communication or information from outside of light source 110 and processes, decodes, interprets or reformats the received information. In certain embodiments, communicator 125 A transmits the processed, decoded or interpreted received information to one or more components within the light source 110 A. In some embodiments, communicator 125 A receives all communication or information from one or more components inside of light source 110 A and processes, decodes, interprets or reformats the received information.
- communicator 125 A transmits the processed, decoded or interpreted received information to one or more lighting system 100 components, such as another light source 110 or another communicator 125 outside of light source 110 A. It will be understood by those with ordinary skill in the art that communicator 125 A may comprise all the functionality of any other communicator 125 , and vice versa.
- Address 127 A is an address, piece of data, or a piece of information uniquely identifying a lighting system 100 component having the address 127 A from other lighting system 100 components.
- address 127 A is a number.
- address 127 A is an electronic data, a number, an electronic code, a binary code or a binary number.
- address 127 A is a piece of electronic information stored in a memory location.
- address 127 A is a setting of a switch or a key.
- address 127 A is a setting of a logical circuitry set by a user.
- address 127 A is a digital signal or a digital code.
- address 127 A is an internet protocol address.
- address 127 is a unique identifier used for network communication of a lighting system component comprising the address 127 .
- address 127 comprises a host name, an internet protocol address or a unique identifier.
- address 127 is used by a lighting system component comprising the address 127 to distinguish a message addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of messages.
- address 127 is used by a lighting system component comprising the address 127 to distinguish an information addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of information.
- address 127 is used by a lighting system component comprising the address 127 to distinguish a communication addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of communications.
- address 127 A is used as a unique network identifier of a lighting system 100 component comprising the address 127 A for network communications of the lighting system 100 component.
- address 127 A is used as a unique network identifier of a lighting system 100 component comprising the address 127 A for communication between the lighting system 100 component and a lighting system 100 component comprising an address 127 different than an address 127 A. It will be understood by those with ordinary skill in the art that address 127 A may comprise all the functionality of any other address 127 , and vice versa.
- Master/slave addressor 130 may be any unit, circuit, device, software or a system capable of setting, resetting or establishing a master or a slave status of any lighting system component.
- master/slave addressor 130 is any device, unit or a system setting, resetting or establishing a status of a master or a slave of one of lighting system components from a plurality of lighting system components.
- master/slave addressor 130 is a component independent from any light source 110 .
- master/slave addressor 130 is a component within a light source 110 and specifically used by the same light source 110 .
- master/slave addressor 130 is associated with a specific lighting system component and used by the same specific lighting system component.
- master/slave addressor 130 is associated with a group of lighting system components within a plurality of groups of lighting system components, and is used by the group of lighting system components for setting or resetting the statuses of the lighting systems components within the group.
- any master/slave addressor 130 performs any functionality and comprises any embodiments of a master/slave addressor 130 A, and vice versa.
- master/slave addressor 130 is used interchangeably with master/slave addressor 130 A.
- FIG. 1A illustrates master/slave addressor 130 as a lighting system 100 component while illustrating master/slave addressor 130 A as a light source 110 A component.
- Master/slave addressor 130 A in a number of embodiments, is any device, unit, setting, monitoring or recognizing a master or a slave status of light source 110 A among a plurality of lighting system 100 components.
- Master/slave addressor 130 in a plurality of embodiments, is any is any device, unit, circuit, software or a system setting, resetting, monitoring or recognizing a master or a slave status of any light source 110 of a lighting system 100 among a plurality of light sources 110 of the lighting system 100 components.
- one lighting system component of a plurality of lighting system components has a status of a master, while all the remaining lighting system components have status of a slave.
- all lighting system components of a lighting system 100 have a status of a slave.
- all light sources 110 of a lighting system 100 have a status of a slave.
- all lighting system components of a lighting system 100 have a status of a master.
- all light sources 110 of a lighting system 100 have a status of a master.
- master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a master.
- master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a master and all other lighting system components have a status of a slave. In numerous embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a slave. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a slave and one or more of other lighting system components have a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, plurality of light sources 110 of a lighting system 100 have a status of a master or a slave. In some embodiments, all light sources 110 of a lighting system 100 have a status of a master or a slave.
- none of light sources 110 of a lighting system 100 have a status of a master or a slave.
- one of a plurality of light sources 110 has a status of a master and all the remaining lighting system 100 components have a status of a slave.
- a lighting system component having a status of a master controls one or more tasks, actions, functionalities or performances of one or more light sources 100 having a slave status.
- a lighting system component having a status of a master controls one or more tasks, actions, functionalities or performances of any lighting system components having a slave status.
- a lighting system 100 component having a status of a master sends commands or instructions to one or more light sources 100 having a slave status.
- a lighting system 100 component having a status of a master adjusts performance or functionality of one or more components of the lighting system 100 components having a status of a slave.
- a lighting system 100 component having a status of a master assigns another component which used to have a status of a slave a status of a master.
- a lighting system 100 component having a status of a master assigns a status of a slave to itself or any other lighting system 100 component.
- a status of a master is assigned to one of a plurality of lighting system 100 components by a lighting system 100 component having a status of a slave.
- power supply 140 is illustrated as an independent lighting system component.
- Power supply 140 may be any component, device, apparatus or a source supplying one of, or any combination of: electrical current, voltage and power, to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- power supply 140 performs any functionality and comprises any embodiments of a power supply 140 A, and vice versa.
- power supply 140 may be used interchangeably with power supply 140 A.
- Power supply 140 may be a part of any lighting system components.
- power supply 140 is comprised by a lighting system component and it supplies any of or any combination of power, current or voltage to the lighting system 100 component.
- power supply 140 is a subsystem of a lighting system component and it supplies power, current or voltage to a plurality of lighting system components.
- power, current or voltage is transferred or supplied from a power supply 140 to one or more lighting system 100 components via one or more connections 105 .
- power supply 140 is an electrical outlet supplying electrical current, voltage or power to a lighting system 100 component, such as a light source 110 .
- power supply 140 comprises a battery.
- power supply 140 comprises a transformer.
- power supply 140 is a device, system or a unit supplying an alternating current or a current changing through time to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- power supply 140 supplies a constant current to one or more lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply 140 supplies an alternating power or a power changing through time to one or more lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a constant power to one or more lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments, power supply 140 supplies an alternating voltage or a voltage varying through time to one or more lighting system 100 components. In certain embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a constant voltage to one or more lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a plurality of different power, voltage or source signals to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- Power supply 140 may comprise any number of the lighting system 100 components or may be connected to or service any number of lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, power supply 140 allows or enables the power to be transferred between a plurality of lighting system components. In certain embodiments, power supply 140 transmits, propagates or sends commands and communication to other components of the lighting system 100 . In numerous embodiments, power supply 140 receives or accepts commands and communication from other components of the lighting system 100 . In some embodiments, power supply 140 includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware. In many embodiments, power supply 140 uses software, hardware or the combination of software and hardware to control, manage or supply power, electrical current or voltage to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- power supply 140 utilizes any one of or any combination of hardware, circuitry, or software to supply, manage or control the flow of current, voltage or power to any one of lighting system 100 components.
- Power supply 140 may comprise any type or form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware.
- power supply 140 comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein.
- power supply 140 supplies two alternating current signals to one or more lighting system 100 components, first one of the two having a phase different than a second one of the two. In a number of embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a constant power signal to one or more lighting system components. In numerous embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a varying power signal to one or more lighting system components. In certain embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a constant current signal to one or more lighting system components. In a plurality of embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a constant voltage signal to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a varying current signal, to one or more lighting system components. In certain embodiments, power supply 140 supplies a varying voltage signal, to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments, power supply 140 supplies any combination of one or more alternate or constant current signals, alternate or constant voltage signals and alternate or constant power signals to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- light source 110 A may includes any of, or any combination of: a controller 120 , a communicator 125 , master/slave addressor 130 and a power supply 140 .
- communicator 125 A of light source 110 A comprises an address 127 A.
- communicator 125 A does not comprise an address 127 A.
- Light source 110 A sometimes, comprises a controller 120 A which controls functionality, performance or features of light source 110 A or any other component within the light source 110 A.
- light source 110 A comprises a controller 120 A which controls one or more lighting system components.
- controller 120 A is any controller 120 .
- communicator 125 A is any communicator 125 .
- master/slave addressor 130 A is any master/slave addressor 130 .
- power supply 140 A is any power supply 140 .
- Communicator 125 A is illustrated by FIG. 1A as a component of light source 110 A. Communicator 125 A may communicate or enable communication with any other components of the lighting system 100 .
- communicator 125 A is a unit or a device communicating with one or more lighting system 100 components.
- communicator 125 A communicates to a plurality of components within light source 110 A.
- communicator 125 A communicates to other systems or components within any other lighting system component, also referred to as lighting system 100 component.
- Communicator 125 A in some embodiments, is used for communication between any components within the light source 110 A or within any other lighting system component.
- Communicator 125 A in a number of embodiments, includes an address 127 used to uniquely identify a light source 110 A in a network 110 .
- Communicator 125 A uses address 127 for communication between two or more lighting system components.
- communicator 125 A uses address 127 to distinguish which information out of a plurality of information reaching the light source 110 is intended for the light source 110 A.
- communicator 125 A comprises address 127 which is used for receiving or transmitting information, communication, commands or instructions between the communicator 125 A and any lighting system component.
- communicator 125 A comprises address 127 which is used for receiving or transmitting information, communication, commands or instructions between light source 110 A and any other lighting system component.
- FIG. 1A also illustrates another component of a light source 110 A, called a master/slave addressor 130 A.
- a master/slave addressor 130 A comprises any functionality of any master/slave addressor 130 , and vice versa.
- master/slave addressor 130 A controls the status of the light source 110 A in relation to other lighting system components.
- master/slave addressor 130 A receives an instruction from a lighting system component and sets a status of a light source 110 A to master.
- master/slave addressor 130 A receives an instruction from a lighting system component and sets a status of a light source 110 A to a slave.
- master/slave addressor 130 A sends an instruction to set a status of another lighting system component to a status of a master or a slave.
- master/slave addressor 130 A receives an information from one of a controller 120 A, communicator 125 A, power supply 140 A or a light source 110 A and sets a status of another lighting system component to a master or a slave.
- master/slave addressor 130 A comprises any functionality or embodiments of a controller 120 , and vice versa.
- master/slave addressor 130 A comprises any functionality or embodiments of a communicator 125 , and vice versa.
- master/slave addressor 130 A comprises any functionality or embodiments of a power supply 140 , and vice versa.
- FIG. 1A also presents light sources 110 B and 110 C connected to light source 110 A via network 104 .
- Light source 110 B includes a communicator 125 B, while light source 110 C includes controller 120 C and an address 127 C.
- Light source 110 may comprise any number of components of the lighting system 100 . Some light sources 110 sometimes comprise all of components of the lighting system 100 , while other light sources 110 do not comprise any of the lighting system 100 components.
- light source 110 comprises a plurality of other light sources 110 .
- a light source 110 comprises an array of light sources 110 .
- any of the lighting system 100 components comprise any of the functionality or embodiments of any other lighting system 100 components.
- any of the lighting system 100 components comprise any number of any other lighting system 100 components.
- FIG. 1B uses a block diagram to illustrate other embodiments of environment of a lighting system 100 .
- FIG. 1B depicts a lighting system 100 having a light source 110 A and light source 110 B connected to each other and also connected to a power supply 140 via connections 105 .
- Each light source 110 includes one or more controllers 120 for controlling features or functionalities of the light source 110 .
- Light sources 110 also include communicators 125 for communicating to other components of the lighting system 100 or other light sources 110 .
- the communicators 125 in each of the two light sources 110 include addresses 127 . Addresses 127 comprised by lighting system components are be used, in many configurations, to uniquely identify communications directed to the specific lighting system 100 components.
- a light source 110 also includes a master/slave addressor 130 for controlling the status of the light source in terms of control within a lighting system 110 .
- the power supply 140 is connected to one or more light sources 110 and it may be used to provide power or electricity to each of the light sources 110 or any other component within lighting system 100 .
- Connections 115 connect one or more of components of the lighting system 100 and allow for the transfer of power or communication between the components of the lighting system 100 .
- FIG. 1B presents a configuration involving light sources 110 A and 110 B connected to each other and a power supply 140 .
- controllers 120 A and 120 B control, adjust, modify or affect light emitted or functionality of light sources 110 A and 110 B, respectively.
- light sources 110 A and 110 B receive all of their power, voltage or current from power supply 140 .
- light source 110 A has an address 127 A which is different from address 127 B of light source 110 B.
- light source 110 A has an address 127 A which is different from address 127 B of light source 110 B.
- light sources 110 A and 110 B communicate with each other using their addresses 127 .
- master/slave addressors 130 A and 130 B control, adjust, monitor, set or reset the master or slave status of light sources 110 A and 110 B, respectively.
- light source 110 A having a master status adjusts the status of a light source 110 B to a status of a master or a slave.
- light source 110 A having a master status controls, adjusts or modifies the functionality of a light source 110 B having a status of a slave.
- light source 110 B having a master status adjusts the status of a light source 110 A to a status of a master or a slave.
- light source 110 A having a master status controls, adjusts or modifies the functionality of a light source 110 B having a status of a slave.
- light source 110 A having a master status controls, modifies, affects or governs functionality, performance or light emitted from light source 110 B.
- light source 110 B has a status of master and a light source 110 A has a status of a slave, and light source 110 B controls, modifies, affects or governs functionality, performance or light emitted from light source 110 A.
- power supply 140 may sometimes comprise an address 127 C which is different than address 127 A and address 127 B.
- address 127 C of power supply 140 is used by the power supply 140 to communicate with light source 110 A and 110 B.
- address 127 C is used for communication between light sources 110 A and 110 B and power supply 140 .
- Addresses 127 C may be used to distinguish information, data or commands directed to the power supply 140 from the information, data or commands directed to light sources 110 A and 110 B.
- light sources 110 A and 110 B and power supply 140 are connected in any electrical connection configuration.
- lighting system 100 components are connected in series, in parallel or in a combination of series and parallel configurations.
- information transmitted between lighting system components comprises an address 127 of a specific lighting system 100 component the transmitted information is intended for.
- light sources 110 A and 110 B and power supply 140 are connected in series and information transmitted comprising an instruction, a command or data is accessible to all three lighting system 100 components while the address 127 within the information transmitted defines which of the lighting system 100 components is the information addressed to.
- light source 110 A transmits an information via connection 105 which connects light source 110 A with light source 110 B and power supply 140 .
- the information transmitted by the light source 110 A sometimes comprises instructions, commands, data and an address 127 B.
- the communicator 125 B of the light source 110 B may receive the address 127 B from the transmitted information and confirm that it matches with address 127 B of the communicator 125 B.
- the communicator 125 B in response to the confirmed match, then may receive the entire transmitted information.
- master/slave addressor 130 performs all functionality of a communicator 125 , or vice versa.
- light source 110 performs all functionality of a master/slave addressor 130 or a communicator 125 , and vice versa.
- any lighting system 100 components performs any functionality of any other lighting system 100 component, and vice versa.
- any subcomponent of a lighting system 100 component performs any functionality of any other lighting system 100 component, and vice versa.
- any subcomponent of a lighting system 100 component performs any functionality of any other subcomponent of a lighting system 100 component, and vice versa.
- FIG. 1C presents light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C connected to each other via connections 105 .
- Connection 105 is illustrated as a shaded region within which connection 105 components are comprised.
- connection 105 is a wire or a cable harness comprising an enclosure enclosing three separate wires or three electrical conducting lines. Each of the three separate wires or conducting lines may sometimes be referred to as connection 105 components.
- FIG. 1C illustrates connection 105 components: connection 105 A, connection 105 B and connection 105 C, as independent conducting lines propagating through the connection 105 .
- Connection 105 may also be a wireless communication link.
- connection 105 is a wireless communication band comprising a number of wireless communication links Illustrated as separated from each other, connection 105 components are shown as electrically insulated from each other or mutually independent. In some embodiments, however, connection 105 components are not electrically insulated from each other and are not mutually independent.
- FIG. 1C depicts connection 105 A marked with a bold line, a connection 105 B with a dashed line and a connection 105 C illustrated with a thin non-dashed line.
- connections 105 A, 105 B and 105 C and the term connection 105 components may sometimes be used interchangeably.
- connections 105 may be used as means for transmitting communication between a plurality of lighting system components, such as light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C.
- connections 105 connect all of the lighting system components within a lighting system 100 .
- one or more connection 105 components such as connections 105 A, 105 B and 105 C connect two or more lighting system 100 components.
- all connection 105 components connect two or more lighting system 100 components.
- all connection 105 components connect all of the lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 comprises any number of connection 105 components connecting any number of lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 components transmit electrical current, voltage or power between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 comprises one or more connection 105 components transmitting information or communication between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 comprises one or more connection 105 components which serve as mediums or means for delivering, supplying or transmitting electrical current, power or voltage to one or more lighting system components.
- connection 105 comprises one or more connection 105 components which serve as mediums or means for delivering, supplying or transmitting information transmitted between the lighting system 100 components.
- Connection 105 components such as connections 105 A, 105 B or 105 C are, in many embodiments, means for delivering electrical power, voltage or current together with electronic analog or digital communication signals.
- one or more connection 105 components are means through which electrical power is delivered to a lighting system 100 component along with analog or digital information or communication.
- two or more lighting system components are connected to each other via one or more connections 105 or one or more components of connections 105 .
- connection 105 components are means, paths or mediums through which electrical power, voltage or current is transmitted to a group of lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 components are means, paths or mediums through which electrical power, voltage, current or information is transmitted to a lighting system 100 .
- connection 105 components are means, paths or mediums through which analog or digital information is transmitted between the two or more lighting system components.
- the connection 105 components may also comprise means, paths or mediums through which wireless information is transmitted between the two or more lighting system components.
- light source 110 A comprises a power supply 140 and light source 110 A provides electrical power to light source 110 B via one or more connection 105 components.
- light source 110 A supplies power to light source 110 B via connections 105 A and 105 B, while providing information, such as digital communication for example, via connection 105 C.
- light source 110 A supplies power to light source 110 B via connections 105 A and 105 B while receiving information or communication from light source 110 B.
- light source 110 A communicates with light source 110 C and light source 110 B via connection 105 C.
- light source 110 A provides electrical power to light sources 110 B and 110 C via connections 105 A and 105 B, while communicating with light sources 110 B and 110 C via connection 105 C.
- light source 110 A provides electrical power to light sources 110 B and 110 C via connections 105 A and 105 B, while light sources 110 B and 110 C communicate to each other via connection 105 C.
- any one or more of light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C provide electrical power to any one or more of light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C via any one or more of connections 105 A, 105 B, or 105 C while light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C communicate to each other via any one of connections 105 A, 105 B or 105 C.
- light source 110 A comprises a power supply 140 and provides light sources 110 B and 110 C with electrical power via connections 105 A and 105 B.
- light source 110 A comprises a power supply 140 and provides electrical power and communication to light sources 110 B and 110 C via any combination of connections 105 A, 105 B and 105 C.
- light source 110 A comprises a power supply 140 and provides light sources 110 B and 110 C with electrical power via connections 105 B and 105 C, while light source 110 A communicates with light sources 110 B and 110 C via connections 105 B and 105 A.
- light source 110 B comprising a power supply 140 , provides light sources 110 A and 110 C with electrical power via connections 105 B and 105 C, while light source 110 A communicates with light sources 110 B and 110 C via connections 105 B and 105 A.
- any one or more of light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C provides electrical power to any one or more of light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C via any one or more of connections 105 A, 105 B, or 105 C while light sources 110 A, 110 B and 110 C communicate to each other via any one or more of connections 105 A, 105 B or 105 C.
- FIG. 1D presents an embodiment of connection 105 comprising connection 105 components used for transmission of electrical power and digital data.
- FIG. 1D illustrates a light source 110 A having a controller 120 A, a communicator 125 A with an address 127 A and a master slave 130 A.
- Light source 110 A is connected to by connection 105 which comprises connection 105 A, connection 105 B and connection 105 C.
- Connection 105 A is also labeled as VAC or V+.
- Connection 105 B is also labeled Ground, which can sometimes be referred to as electrical ground or a ground potential wire.
- Connection 105 C in many cases, may be labeled as a neutral, a control, or a control line.
- Connection 105 A may sometimes be used for transmitting or propagating alternate voltage or voltage varying through time. Sometimes, connection 105 is also used for transmitting or propagating alternate current or power or current or power varying through time. Connection 105 A, in some embodiments, is used for transmission or propagation of a constant voltage which is positive relative to ground. In such cases, the connection 105 A may be labeled V+. In a number of embodiments, connection 105 A is also used for transmission or propagation of a negative voltage potential relative to ground. In a plurality of embodiments, connection 105 A is a medium through which constant power, constant current or constant voltage are propagated or transmitted. Connection 105 B is also labeled Ground, and is sometimes used for transmission or propagation of electrical ground or a ground potential.
- connection 105 B is used for same purposes as connection 105 A. In a plurality of embodiments, connection 105 B is used for grounding and has a zero voltage potential relative to ground. In many embodiments, connection 105 B is a medium through which alternate voltage or constant voltage, alternate or constant current or alternate or constant power signals are propagated or transmitted. Connection 105 C is sometimes used as a neutral wire which may have any potential relative to ground, or zero potential relative to ground. Connection 105 C is sometimes used as a control wire or a control line which may have any potential relative to ground, or not have any potential relative to ground. In some embodiments, connection 105 C is a control line used as a medium through which lighting system 100 components send information, controls, signals, commands or instructions among each other. In some embodiments, connection 105 C performs all the functionality of connection 105 A. In a plurality of embodiments, connection 105 C performs all the functionality of connection 105 B.
- Connection 105 C is sometimes used for transmission or propagation of electronic signals.
- connection 105 C is a medium or a means for transmitting or propagating a digital electronic signal.
- connection 105 C is a control line connecting two or more light sources 110 or any other lighting system components.
- connection 105 C is a wireless communication link between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 C is a control line or a control wire connecting two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 C is a control line used as a medium through which information, instructions, signals or commands are propagated between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- connection 105 C is a medium or means for transmitting or propagating an analog electronic signal.
- connection 105 C is a medium through which digital or analog information or data is transmitted or propagated.
- Digital data sometimes comprises a high voltage level and a low voltage level which defines communication transmitted as binary values of 1 or 0, respectively.
- a signal comprises a high value, or a 1, which is defined by a predetermined threshold having a predetermined voltage value. The voltage of the signal may cross above the voltage value of the predetermined threshold resulting in the signal having a high value, or a value of 1.
- a signal comprises a low value, or a 0, which is defined by a predetermined threshold having a predetermined voltage value. The voltage of the signal may cross below the voltage value of the predetermined threshold resulting in the signal having a low value, or a value of 0.
- a signal has only one threshold value defining a low and a high value of the signal, the signals below the threshold value being low, or 0, and signals above the threshold value being high, or 1.
- digital data transmitted via connection 105 C comprises digital representation of bits.
- digital data transmitted through connection 105 C comprises digital representation of pluralities of bits or bytes.
- digital data transmitted via connection 105 C comprises square waves, wherein the low value of the square wave equals the low voltage value and the high value of the square wave equals a high voltage value.
- digital data transmitted via connection 105 C comprises square waves wherein the low value of the square wave equals zero volts and the high value of the square wave equals any positive voltage value, such as three volts or five volts, for example.
- Connection 105 may comprise any number connection 105 components, such as connection 105 A, 105 B through 105 N where N is any number. Any of connection 105 components of the connection 105 may be a wire, a conductor line, a wireless link, a frequency range for a wireless signal, a fiber optic or any other medium capable of transmitting a signal. Any one of the connection 105 components may comprise a control signal or a return for a control signal. In some embodiments, a connection 105 component is a control line. Sometimes, a connection 105 component is a return line. Sometimes, a connection 105 is a differential line wherein one line of the connection 105 comprises a voltage above a certain threshold and another line of the connection 105 comprises a voltage below a certain threshold. In some embodiments, connection 105 comprises any number of connection 105 components which may be dedicated to transmitting any one or any number of signals from any components of lighting system 100 .
- Digital data such as data bits 215 may be generated using any device capable of generating signals.
- a controller 120 or a communicator 125 generates signals which are transmitted to other lighting system 100 components.
- a controller 120 receives or processes signals from other devices 110 and generates or sends signals to other devices 110 .
- a communicator 125 receives or processes from other devices 110 and generates or sends signals to other devices 110 .
- digital data may be generated using a phase control dimmer for example.
- a device generating a pulsed waveform may be combined with a circuitry clipping top portions of the waveform and creating digital bits using portions of the clipped waveform.
- a device producing a square-wave waveform may be used in conjunction with an electronic circuit which controls or adjusts the waveform to produce bits of digital signal, such as data bits 215 for example.
- Digital data may be produced or generated using any electronic signal generating device providing means for generating a digital signal having high values corresponding to digital value of 1 (one) and low values corresponding to a digital value of a 0 (zero).
- digital signal having high and low values may resemble a square wave having sharp edges.
- digital signal may comprise portions of waveforms having rounded edges.
- connection 105 C is a medium through which pulse width modulated information is propagated. In a number of embodiments, connection 105 C is a medium through which pulse code modulated data is propagated or transmitted. In many embodiments, connection 105 C is a medium through which pulse density modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In a number of embodiments, connection 105 C is a medium through which pulse amplitude modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In some embodiments, connection 105 C is a medium through which pulse position modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In many embodiments, connection 105 C is a medium through which sigma delta modulated data is transmitted or propagated. Connection 105 C may be used as a medium through which any type of an electronic or electrical signal is propagated.
- the propagated signal may be a digital signal of any modulation, such as frequency or phase modulation, amplitude modulation, pulse width modulation or any other type of modulation available.
- any one of connections 105 A, 105 B or 105 C can be used interchangeably with any other connection 105 or any other connection 105 component, such as connections 105 A, 105 B or 105 C.
- FIG. 2A depicts devices 110 A and 110 B, also referred to as light sources 110 A and 110 B, connected to each other via connection 105 .
- Connection 105 may be used by light sources 110 A and 110 B as a medium for transmission of communication between the light sources 110 A and 110 B.
- FIG. 2A also illustrates a signal transmitted and represented as data 210 .
- Data 210 may be transmitted via a connection 105 and may comprise a plurality of data bits 215 . In some instances, active portions of the signal, such as data bits 215 having high values may define a duty cycle of the signal.
- Data 210 illustrated in FIG. 2A comprises five data bits 215 having high values grouped together.
- Time Interval 205 is a time interval within which portions of data 210 are transmitted via communication 105 .
- FIG. 2A presents an embodiment showing two time intervals 205 , each time interval 205 , also known as period 205 , having a group of data 210 comprising an equal amount of bits 215 having a high value. Amount of bits transmitted within each time interval 205 may vary between different embodiments or different applications.
- Data 210 may be any information, communication, instruction or data transmitted via connection 105 .
- data 210 comprises a digital signal.
- data 210 comprises an analog signal.
- data 210 comprises a mix of an analog or a digital signal.
- data 210 comprises a square wave signal.
- data 210 comprises a pulse.
- data 210 comprises a pulse width modulated signal or data.
- data 210 comprises a pulse amplitude modulated data or signal.
- the data 210 is a wirelessly communicated digital data.
- data 210 comprises data which is encoded using a binary system and comprises only high values and low values.
- high value corresponds to a square-shaped signal whose peak is flat over a period of time and has a value of voltage which is higher than a square-shaped signal of a low value.
- low value corresponds to a square-shaped wave whose lowest point is flat over a period of time and has a value of voltage which is lower than a square-shaped signal of a high value.
- Duty cycle of a signal may be any ratio or fraction of a time interval 205 in an active state.
- the active state may be any state of bits of data 210 or any portions of the signal which may have high values or low values.
- active state comprises bits of data 210 having high values, or values equivalent to digital value of 1.
- active state comprises bits of data 210 having low values, or values equivalent to digital value of 0.
- Duty cycle may be a ratio of a portion of a time interval 205 for which the signal comprises high values, such as a digital value of 1, to a duration of that same the whole time interval 205 .
- a duty cycle for a time interval 205 of 1 millisecond may be a ratio of a fraction of the period 205 for which data bits 210 have a value of 1, e.g. for which the signal is high, to the whole duration period of the time interval 205 , e.g. 1 millisecond.
- duty cycle is a ratio of time interval 205 for which the signal has low values, or values of 0, to the entire duration of the whole same time interval 205 .
- a duty cycle for a time interval 205 of 1 millisecond may be a ratio of a fraction of the period 205 for which data bits 210 have a value of 0, e.g.
- data 210 comprises bits or portions of signal having high values within a time interval 205 , and the bits or portions of signal having high values within the time interval 205 define a duty cycle of the signal or a duty cycle of the time interval 205 .
- data 210 comprises bits or portions of signal having low values within a time interval 205 , and the bits or portions of signal having low values within the time interval 205 define a duty cycle of the signal or a duty cycle of the time interval 205 .
- duty cycle of a signal within a time interval 205 is defined by a total amount of bits or portions of the signal having high values and transmitted with the time interval 205 , regardless if the portions are separated or bunched together. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal within a time interval 205 is defined by a total amount of bits or portions of the signal having low values and transmitted with the time interval 205 , regardless if the portions are separated or bunched together.
- the duty cycle may include a ratio of a duration of a period 205 for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire period 205 .
- the duty cycle of a period 205 may further include an average value of the signal within the period 205 .
- time interval 205 is a predetermined period of time within which a communication or an information comprising a specified amount of data bits is transmitted over a connection 105 .
- time interval 205 also referred to as period 205 , is a period of time within which a communication or an information comprising an unspecified amount of data bits is transmitted over a connection 105 .
- data 210 is a predetermined amount of data transmitted between light source 110 A and light source 110 B within a time range defined by the period 205 .
- data 210 is an amount of data having a predetermined amount of bits having a high or a low value transmitted through connection 105 within a time range defined by a period 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B remains constant for a plurality of periods, or time intervals 205 .
- data 210 having portions having a high value may remain constant through a plurality of time intervals 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B in a first period 205 is different than data 210 transmitted between light sources 110 A and 110 B in a second period 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between light sources 110 A and 110 B via connection 105 has a constant amount of bits through plurality of periods 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B via connection 105 has a constant amount of bits having a high value through plurality of periods 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B via connection 105 has a constant amount of bits having a low value through plurality of periods 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B via connection 105 comprises an amount of bits transmitted within a first period 205 which is different than the amount of bits transmitted within a second period 205 .
- Data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B may also comprise an amount of bits having a high value transmitted within a first time interval 205 different than the amount of bits having a high value transmitted within a second time interval 205 .
- data 210 transmitted between devices 110 A and 110 B may also comprise an amount of bits having a low value transmitted within a first time interval 205 different than the amount of bits having a low value transmitted within a second time interval 205 .
- time interval 205 is a predetermined period or a duration of time.
- period 205 is constant period or a duration of time.
- period 205 is a changing or undetermined period of time.
- period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by data 210 .
- period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by one or more data bits 215 .
- period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by light source 110 A.
- period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by light source 110 B.
- period 205 is period of time or a duration of time determined by any lighting system 100 component. In a plurality of embodiments, period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by a clock or a circuit. In some embodiments, period 205 is a period of time within which a predetermined amount of information such as one or more bits 215 is transmitted.
- lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal determines period 205 based on the statistics of previous periods 205 . In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal anticipates a next period 205 based on the duration of a previous period 205 . In many embodiments, lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal anticipates a period 205 based on an algorithm which uses durations of previous periods 205 to determine the next period 205 . In a number of embodiments, lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal anticipates a period 205 based on a weighted statistics of recently arrived periods 205 or cycles of information.
- one or more lighting system 100 components maintains statistics such as average data bits per period 205 , tolerance for variation of a period 205 , or duration of periods 205 . In some embodiments, statistics relating periods 205 or data bits 215 maintained by one or more lighting system 100 components are used to anticipate or predict the next period 205 .
- time interval 205 is a period of time determined by an event or a signal.
- a first period 205 is immediately followed by a second period 205 and a time duration of the first period 205 is different from a time duration of the second period 205 .
- a first period 205 is immediately followed by a second period 205 and a time duration of the first period 205 is the same as the time duration of the second period 205 .
- a number of data bits 215 transmitted via connection 105 within a period 205 is predetermined.
- a number of data bits 215 transmitted within a first period 205 is same as a number of data bits 215 transmitted within a second period 205 , the second period immediately following the first.
- a number of data bits 215 transmitted within a first period 205 is different from a number of data bits 215 transmitted within a second period 205 , the second period immediately following the first.
- time duration of period 205 in a first connection 105 component, such as connection 105 B is different from a time duration of a period 205 in a second connection 105 component, such as connection 105 C.
- time duration of a period 205 relating an information transmitted by a first connection 105 component is the same as a time duration of a period 205 relating an information transmitted by a second connection 105 component.
- one or more connection 105 components do not have a period 205 .
- FIG. 2B presents devices 110 A and 110 B connected to each other via connection 105 .
- Connection 105 is used by the devices 110 A and 110 B as a medium of communication between the light sources 110 A and 110 B.
- FIG. 2B also illustrates data 210 transmitted via connection 105 .
- the embodiments illustrated in FIG. 2B shows data bits 215 spread out through the time interval, or the period 205 .
- Time intervals 205 and an amount of 215 data bits having a high value in each time interval 205 remain the same in the embodiments depicted FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B , illustrating a same or a similar duty cycle for both embodiments.
- Some data bits 215 are also marked as instruction bits 220 , and may be used for a variety of communication related purposes, such as instructions or commands.
- First period 205 comprises data bits 215 spaced out differently than data bits 215 in second period 205 , the second period 205 immediately following the first period 205 .
- first period 205 comprises data bits 215 having a high or a low value spaced out differently than data bits 215 in second period 205 having a high or a low value, the second period 205 immediately following the first period 205 .
- the two periods may have a same duty cycle.
- the two periods may also have a same duty cycle.
- data bits 215 may be transmitted within a specific time range within period 205 .
- some data bits 215 having a high or a low value are transmitted outside of a specific time range within period 205 and other data bits 215 are transmitted within the specific time range within period 205 .
- data bits 215 having a high or a low value are transmitted outside of a specific time range within period 205 .
- a specific time range within period 205 is predetermined by any lighting system 100 component.
- a specific time range is always within a same time period for any period 205 .
- a specific time range within a first 205 period is within a different time period than a second specific time range of a second 205 period, the second period 205 immediately following the first period 205 .
- FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B together, combinations of two embodiments of communication between light sources 110 A and 110 B are discussed.
- data bits 215 having a high value are sequentially combined together and data 210 therefore resembles a periodic square wave having high value during a first portion of period 205 and a low value during the remainder of period 205 .
- a first bit 215 which may or may not be instruction bit 220 , of data 210 within period 205 triggers or causes the period 205 to start.
- a first bit 215 which may or may not be instruction bit 220 , of data 210 within period 205 is aligned with period 205 .
- one or more lighting system 100 components uses the first bit 215 of data 210 within period 205 to define the beginning of a new period 205 . In a number of embodiments, one or more lighting system 100 components uses the last bit 215 of data 210 within period 205 to define beginning or end of period 205 . In many embodiments, one or more lighting system components uses one or more bits 215 of period 205 to define a specific part of period 205 . In some embodiments, communication or information between one or more lighting system components is transmitted within the specific part of period 205 defined by one or more bits 215 of period 205 . In embodiments in which data 210 or data bits 215 or 220 are transmitted wirelessly, periods 205 , 305 or 315 may be periods of time within which an amount of data is wirelessly transmitted.
- one or more lighting system 100 components use one or more bits 215 or 220 of data 210 within a period 205 to synchronize communication, transmission of communication or information transmitted via connection 105 .
- one or more lighting system 100 components use one or more bits 215 or 220 of data 210 within a period 205 to specify a timing within period 205 within which communication or information between two or more lighting system 100 components is transmitted.
- one or more lighting system 100 components communicate information within a part of a period 205 which is defined by one or more bits 215 or 220 of data 210 within the period 205 .
- one or more bits 215 or 220 within period 205 are used to identify a specific time period within any of a plurality of 205 periods, wherein the specific time period is a period within which communication between two or more lighting system 100 components takes place. In some embodiments, one or more bits 215 or 220 within period 205 are used to identify a specific time period within any of a plurality of concatenated 205 periods. The specific time period is sometimes designated for communication between two or more lighting system 100 components.
- FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate an embodiment wherein information relating intensity of light sources 110 A and 110 B is transmitted over a connection 105 .
- light source 110 A is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source 110 B regarding intensity of light emitted by light source 110 A.
- light source 110 may be sending any information including information relating: humidity of a room, temperature of a light source 110 , temperature of a room, presence of a person in a room, intensity of a light, color of a light or more.
- light source 110 A is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source 110 B regarding intensity or color of light emitted by light source 110 B.
- light source 110 B is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source 110 A regarding temperature or any other characteristic relating specifically to light source 110 A. In many embodiments, light source 110 B is sending information, status, instruction or command to light source 110 A regarding intensity of light emitted by light source 110 B.
- FIG. 2A depicts an embodiment wherein light source 110 B is sending five 215 bits having a high value or a value of 1, to light source 110 .
- the five 215 bits communicated within period 205 having a high value specifies an amount of intensity light source 110 A should emit.
- the amount of bits 215 within a period 205 having a high value, or a value of 1 is proportional to the intensity of light to be emitted.
- an instruction comprising an amount of bits 215 having a high value of a value of 1, within a period 205 specifies an intensity a light source 110 receiving the instruction should emit.
- an amount of bits transmitted by light source 110 B to light source 110 A signifies an instruction for light source 110 A to emit a specific intensity of light as specified by the amount of bits 215 or 220 transmitted.
- bits transmitted by light source 110 B to light source 110 A signify an instruction for light source 110 A to emit a specific intensity of light as specified by the bits transmitted.
- a total amount of bits 215 having a high value within a period 205 , transmitted by light source 110 B to light source 110 A is an instruction for light source 110 A to emit.
- a total amount of bits 215 having a low value within a period 205 , transmitted by light source 110 B to light source 110 A is an instruction for light source 110 A to emit.
- amount of data bits 215 having a value of 1 within a period 205 transmitted by light source 110 B indicates or signifies intensity of light source 110 A.
- amount of data bits 215 having a value of 0 within a period 205 transmitted by light source 110 B indicates or signifies the intensity of light source 110 A.
- light source 110 B transmits five bits 215 within each period 205 , wherein the five bits specifies intensity with which light source 110 A should emit light.
- FIG. 2A also illustrates five bits 215 of data 210 within period 205 positioned at the beginning of each period 205 . In many embodiments, all bits 215 positioned at the beginning of period 205 specify intensity of light but do not carry any additional information. In a number of embodiments, five bits 215 positioned at the beginning of period 205 specify the beginning of a period 205 .
- five bits 215 are spread out within period 205 , wherein first two bits 215 are at the beginning of each period 205 and remaining bits 215 , also referred to as instruction bits 220 , are spread out within a latter portion of period 205 .
- the instruction bits 220 signify information which is not related to intensity of light.
- the instruction bits 220 signify information which are related to intensity of light as well as another information transmitted to the lighting system component.
- the instruction bits 220 signify an instruction to one or more lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments, wherein the instruction bits 220 are spread out within a latter portion of period 205 , the instruction bits 220 are information transmitted to one more lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, instruction bits 220 are bits 215 spread out through any part or portion of a period 205 . In many embodiments, instruction bits 220 are bits 215 performing a specific task. In a variety of embodiments, instruction bits 220 are bits 215 are data 210 emitted by a lighting system 100 component which sends an information within a specific time frame within period 205 . In many embodiments, instruction bits 220 are data 210 emitted within any one or more sections or portions of period 205 .
- data bits 215 spread out within a latter portion of period 205 are referred to as the instruction bits 220 .
- data bits 215 spread out within a first portion of period 205 are referred to as the instruction bits 220 .
- Instruction bits 220 in some embodiments form an address of a lighting system 100 component.
- instruction bits 220 form a command or an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to change status from master to slave.
- instruction bits 220 are a part of an instruction or a command addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to change status from slave to master.
- instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component relating control of the specific lighting system 100 component. In a number of embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to change a spectral range of light emitted.
- instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to change, adjust or amend intensity of light emitted. In some embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to maintain or confirm intensity of light emitted. In many embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to adjust address 127 of the lighting system 100 component. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to turn the lighting system 100 component on. In some embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to start emitting light. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to turn the lighting system 100 component off.
- instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to stop emitting light. In numerous embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to turn the lighting system 100 component on. In some embodiments, instruction bits 220 form an information, instruction or command addressed to a specific lighting system 100 component to perform a task, an action or an adjustment of any kind.
- instruction bits 220 are positioned in a very first portion of period 205 . In many embodiments, instruction bits 220 are positioned in central or middle portion of period 205 . In a number of embodiments, instruction bits 220 are positioned in last or final portion of period 205 . In numerous embodiments, instruction bits 220 are transmitted within any portion of period 205 or within a plurality of portions of period 205 . In a number of embodiments, the portion of period 205 within which instruction bits 220 are transmitted remains the same for all periods 205 . In many embodiments, the portion of period 205 within which instruction bits 22 are transmitted varies between periods 205 .
- FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B also illustrate how a lighting system 100 component, in some embodiments, maintains a same light intensity regardless of whether data 210 is in a group or dispersed through period 205 .
- light source 110 B transmits an amount of data bits 215 having a high value within a period 205 to light source 110 A to indicate a light intensity light source 110 A should emit light with.
- light source 110 B transmits the same amount of data bits 215 having a high value within the period 205 as in FIG. 2A , while transmitting instruction bits 220 further specifying additional information to light source 110 A.
- light source 110 B is sometimes a master sending instructions to a slave light source 110 A.
- Light source 110 B maintains the same intensity of light source 110 A while sending additional information to light source 110 A.
- the additional information may be any information, such as instructions, commands, settings, calibrations, tasks, actions, statuses or any other information light sources 110 A and 110 B are capable of communicating.
- instruction bits 220 form or define a digital instruction, such as a digital number, a digital sequence of values or a digital value pattern.
- information comprises data bits 215 which are not instruction bits 220 , wherein data bits 215 are positioned within a specific portion of period 205 and signify intensity of light to be emitted by light source 110 receiving the information.
- data bits 215 which are not instruction bits 220 , transmitted within a period 205 and comprising both bits 215 and bits 220 , form or define information relating intensity of light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the information.
- information relating intensity of light to be emitted by the light source 110 is a command or an instruction indicating the intensity of light the light source 110 will emit.
- information relating intensity of light to be emitted by the light source 110 is a command or an instruction indicating to turn light source 110 on or off.
- instruction bits 220 form or define an information or instruction which is different from an instruction relating intensity of light for a lighting system 100 device.
- information transmitted by data bits 215 is digital communication information.
- information transmitted by instruction bits 220 is digital communication information.
- data bits 215 comprise digital communication.
- data bits 215 comprise one or more digital values of 0's and 1's.
- bits 215 are digital communication wherein digital value of 1 is marked by a square wave having a height signifying a digital value of 1 and a square wave having a lack of height signifying a digital value of 0.
- height of the square wave is defined by a voltage signal, such as a voltage step or a voltage impulse.
- data bits 215 are digital communication wherein digital value of 0 is marked by a square-like wave having a height and a digital value of 0 is marked by a lack of a square-like wave.
- a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies a data bit 210 , a bit 215 or a bit 220 .
- low to high transition of a digital communication a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies a data bit 210 , a bit 215 or bit 220 .
- a missing, or a lack of, high to low transition of a digital communication indicates or signifies a data bit 210 , a bit 215 or a bit 220 .
- a missing, or a lack of, low to high transition of a digital communication indicates or signifies a data bit 210 , a bit 215 or bit 220 .
- Duty cycle of period 205 is defined as amount of data bits 215 having a value of 1 within a period 205 .
- Duty cycle of period 205 in other embodiments, is defined as amount of data bits 215 having a value of 0 within a period 205 .
- Duty cycle of period 205 in many embodiments, is defined as amount of data bits 215 having any value.
- duty cycle of period 205 signifies or defines intensity light source 110 should emit light with.
- light source 110 B with a master status transmits information to light source 110 A with a slave status, wherein duty cycle of period 205 of the transmitted information signal, signifies or defines intensity instructions for light source 110 A.
- Light source 110 A in some embodiments, in response to the duty cycle of period 205 of the transmitted information signal adjusts, changes or amends intensity of the light emitted.
- Light source 110 A in a number of embodiments, in response to the duty cycle of period 205 of the transmitted information signal maintains or remains unchanged intensity of the light emitted.
- duty cycle of a signal or an information is related to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the signal or the information. In a plurality of embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is proportional to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the signal or the information. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is inversely proportional to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the signal or the information.
- a duty cycle may be comprised within a time interval of a signal transmitted between two or more lighting system components.
- the duty cycle within a time interval may be ratio or a fraction of a duration of time within which signal has a certain value to the entire duration of the time interval 205 .
- the duty cycle is a duration of time within a time interval 205 for which the signal has high values, such as a digital value 1 in digital signals for example, over the entire duration of the time interval 205 .
- duty cycle is a fraction of time within a time interval 205 for which the signal has a high value over the entire duration of the time interval 205 .
- the duty cycle within a time interval may be ratio or a fraction of a time within a time interval 205 for which signal is low values, such as a digital value 0 in digital signals for example, over the entire duration of the time interval 205 .
- duty cycle is a fraction of time within a time interval 205 for which the signal has a low value over the entire duration of the time interval 205 .
- the duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions.
- each of the portions of the plurality of portions of the duty cycle of the signal may further comprise a duration of the duty cycle.
- a duty cycle of a time interval may be a ratio of total amount of time for which the signal within the time interval 205 was high to the total time interval 205 duration.
- a duty cycle may comprise a duration of time within which a plurality of separated data bits 215 having high values are dispersed within a time interval 205 and separated from each other by portions of time interval 205 which does not comprise high values. Therefore, a duty cycle may be the duty cycle of the entire time interval 205 , regardless of the number of portions of time within the time interval 205 for which signal was high or low and regardless of whether the signal having certain values is separated by portions of the signal having certain other values.
- a length of a period 205 is adjusted to modulate intensity of a light source 110 receiving the information.
- a length of a preceding or a succeeding period 205 is adjusted to modulate intensity of a light source 110 receiving the information.
- an instruction in a preceding period 205 causes a duty cycle of the preceding period 205 to temporarily increase the light intensity.
- a period 205 succeeding the preceding period 205 is adjusted to compensate for the duty cycle in the preceding period 205 and maintain intensity or brightness of light to be emitted unchanged.
- an instruction in a preceding period 205 causes the duty cycle of the preceding period 205 to temporarily decrease the light intensity.
- a period 205 succeeding the preceding period 205 is adjusted to compensate for the duty cycle in the preceding period 205 and adjust the duty cycle in the succeeding period 205 to maintain intensity or brightness of light to be emitted unchanged or as intended.
- lighting system 100 component transmitting or sending information or communication to another lighting system 100 component maintains a queue of data to be sent.
- period 205 or amount of data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 is adjusted or changed to compensate for the information queued.
- lighting system 100 comprises one or more lighting system 100 components, such as light source 110 , receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding information transmitted via data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 . In many embodiments, lighting system 100 comprises one or more lighting system 100 components not receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding information transmitted via data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 . In some embodiments, lighting system 100 comprises one or more lighting system 100 components receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding duty cycle of a period 205 . In many embodiments, lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which in response to understanding duty cycle of period 205 adjust intensity of the one or more light sources 110 . In some embodiments, lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which in response to understanding duty cycle of period 205 maintain intensity of the one or more light sources 110 .
- FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B illustrate embodiments of a lighting system 100 wherein duty cycle within any of a plurality of concatenated periods 205 remains equal with or without instruction bits 220 .
- light source 110 B controls intensity of light source 110 A by transmitting within any period 205 a duty cycle having a specific time duration.
- Time duration of a duty cycle may be defined or specified by a number of bits, number of bits having a value 1 or a value 0.
- time duration of a duty cycle is defined or specified by a number of bits transmitted within a period 205 .
- time duration of a duty cycle is defined or specified by a number of bits having a value of 1 transmitted within a period 205 .
- communication or information transmitted using a duty cycle may be referred to as pulse width modulation.
- FIG. 3 a flow chart of a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal is illustrated.
- FIG. 3 also relates to a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal while a device maintains operation which is responsive to the duty cycle.
- a first device receives a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval.
- the duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions and each of which may further comprise a duration of the duty cycle.
- the first device operates responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device detects an instruction identified by at least one portion of the duty cycle.
- the first device performs a function based on the instruction while the first device maintains operating responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device receives a second signal comprising a second duty cycle within a second time interval.
- the second duty cycle of the second signal may comprise a plurality of portions and each of the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle of the second signal may further comprise a duration of the second duty cycle.
- the first device operates responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal.
- the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a second instruction.
- the first device performs, responsive to the detection, a function based on the second instruction while maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle of the second signal.
- a first device receives a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval.
- the first device receives a signal from a second device 110 .
- the first device receives a plurality of signals from a plurality of devices 110 .
- the first device receives a signal from a controller, a switch or a source external to the lighting system 100 .
- the first device receives a signal via a wireless link.
- the first device receives a signal comprising a plurality of duty cycles within a time interval.
- the first device receives a signal comprising a plurality of duty cycles within a time interval, the plurality of duty cycles comprising portions of the signal having high values whose sum defines the total duty cycle of the time interval.
- the first device operates responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device operates in any manner and at any time, in response to the duty cycle.
- the first device also referred to as a device 110 , may perform any operation which is responsive to, or modified by the duty cycle of the signal.
- the first device spins a motor and a rotational speed or an acceleration of the motor spin is controlled by the duty cycle.
- the first device operates an engine which performs or runs in response to the duty cycle of the signal.
- the first device operates an emission of light having an intensity, wherein the intensity is responsive to, modified by, or related to the duty cycle.
- the first device emits a light having a specific feature, such as a pulse of light, periodicity of pulse, wavelength of light, phase of light, spectral range of light emitted or even power of light, and any of which may be modulated or be responsive to the duty cycle of the signal.
- the first device may receive a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval 205 of the signal and perform a function or an operation modulated, controlled or instructed by the duty cycle within the time interval 205 of the signal.
- the first device operates a second device in response to the duty cycle.
- the first device operates a plurality of devices in response to the duty cycle. The plurality of devices may perform as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal received by the first device.
- the first device operates based on a threshold or a plurality of thresholds of the duty cycle.
- the duty cycle may be within or past a threshold point which defines an action or an operation which the first device has to perform.
- the first device may receive a signal having a duty cycle within a threshold range for which the first device does not perform any function, such as the device is shut off or on standby.
- the first device receives a signal having a duty cycle within a threshold range for which the first device emits a light at a specific intensity or brightness.
- the duty cycle of a signal received is within a threshold range which defines a spin speed of a motor, an intensity range of a light source, a wavelength range of a light source, a power output, a current output, a voltage output, or any other operation by any other device.
- the first device detects an instruction identified by at least one portion of the duty cycle.
- the first device may detect an instruction using any number of components, units or functions capable of detecting, decoding and processing instructions.
- the communicator 125 or the controller 120 detects an instruction comprising instruction bits 220 , data bits 215 or any data 210 .
- the first device detects an instruction using a function, structure or an unit of the first device for intercepting and decoding the instruction.
- the instruction in such embodiments, may be a codeword, a number of data bits or a pattern of data bits.
- the first device detects an instruction using a detector which detects or decodes the signal.
- the detector may observe, monitor or detect instructions by monitoring a portion of a signal within a predetermined time interval within the time interval 205 .
- the detector may observe, monitor or detect instructions by monitoring a data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 of the signal within a predetermined time interval within the time interval 205 .
- the first device detects an instruction by receiving, decoding or monitoring any data bits 215 , 220 or 210 which are within a predetermined portion of a time interval 205 of the signal.
- the first device detects an instruction by recognizing, reading or detecting a portion of a signal within a predetermined portion of a time interval 205 , or period 205 .
- the first device detects instructions by observing a specific portion or a specific plurality of portions of the time interval 205 of the signal.
- the instruction is detected by the first device which observes a latter portion of the time interval to search for instruction bits.
- the first device may detect a codeword, a digital pattern or an instruction comprising any number of data bits 215 , which may be positioned within any portion of specific time interval within the time interval 205 .
- a portion of the duty cycle of the signal comprises a portion of the instruction.
- the first device detects that at least a portion of the duty cycle of the signal comprises a portion of the instruction.
- the first device performs a function based on the instruction while the first device maintains operating responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of the first device responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of a second device responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of a plurality of devices responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device performs a function based on the instruction without maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle.
- the first device instructs a second device to perform a function and operates, or maintains operating, of the second device in response to the duty cycle.
- the first device was emitting light having an intensity, brightness or pulse frequency as instructed by the previous duty cycle and upon receiving the signal and the duty cycle of the signal, the first device maintains the intensity, the brightness or the pulse frequency of the light emitted as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal.
- the first device was operating any one, or any combination of: a light source, a motor, an engine, a power supply or a unit supplying electrical power as instructed by the previous duty cycle as instructed by previous duty cycles, and upon receiving the duty cycle of the signal, the first device maintains operating of the light source, the motor, the engine, the power supply or the unit supplying electrical power of the light emitted as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal.
- the function may be any action executed upon receiving an instruction, such as for example, turning on or off of a first device.
- the function is setting an intensity of the light emitted by the first device.
- the function performed is setting a status, such as a master or a slave status to the first device.
- the function performed is processing a communication, data or a command comprised by the instruction.
- the function is any function or any operation performed by the first device or any device 110 , or any lighting system component described herein.
- the first device performs the function based on the instruction and maintains operating of the first device responsive to the duty cycle. Operating may refer to performing operation of any device 110 or any function or operation of any lighting system 100 component described herein.
- the first device receives a second signal comprising a second duty cycle within a second time interval.
- the first device receives a second signal which is a signal immediately following the signal.
- the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a plurality of portions. Each of the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle of the second signal may further comprise a duration of the second duty cycle.
- a second signal may comprise any functionality or any characteristics of the first signal.
- the second signal is identical or substantially similar to the first signal.
- the second signal comprises a second duty cycle which is different than a first duty cycle. In many embodiments, the second duty cycle is the same as the first duty cycle.
- the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle may comprise any number of data bits 215 comprising any number of digital portions of the signal having high or low values.
- the second duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions which are similar or identical to the plurality of portions of the first duty cycle.
- the plurality of portions may comprise a portion of a time interval 205 within which a signal has a high value for the cases in which high value is the active value of the signal, or low value for the cases in which the low value is the active value of the signal.
- the second time interval may be same as the time interval or any other previous time interval 205 in the chain of time intervals 205 .
- the second time interval is a different time interval than the time interval, or the preceding time interval 205 .
- the second time interval is a longer period of time than the time interval.
- the second time interval is a shorter period of time than the time interval.
- the first device operates responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal.
- the first device operating responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal may be similar to the first device operating responsive to the duty cycle of the signal.
- the first device operates or performs an operation of the first device or any other device 110 in response to the duty cycle of the signal received.
- the second duty cycle of the second signal is different than the duty cycle of the signal.
- the first device may change or modify the operating of, or operation performed by, the first device, the second device or any device which operates in response to the second duty cycle of the second signal.
- the first device instructs a second device or a plurality of devices to perform in response to the second duty cycle of the second signal.
- the operating may comprise emitting a light having a specific brightness, intensity, spectral range or pulse duration.
- the operating comprises supplying electricity or power to a component or a plurality of components of the first device or any number of devices 110 , the electricity or power responsive to the duty cycle or the second duty cycle.
- the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a second instruction.
- the first device may detect the second instruction in a same way as detecting the instruction.
- the second instruction is detected differently than the first instruction.
- the second instruction comprises a number of data bits 215 positioned within a specific time interval within time interval 205 .
- a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a portion of the second instruction.
- the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a portion of the second instruction.
- the first device performs, responsive to the detection, a function based on the second instruction while maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle of the second signal.
- the first device performs a function based on the second instruction without maintaining operating responsive to the second duty cycle.
- the function may be any action executed upon receiving an instruction.
- the function is any function or any operation performed by the first device or any other device 110 described herein.
- the first device performs the function based on the second instruction and maintains operating of the first device responsive to the second duty cycle.
- the first device performs the function based on the second instruction and maintains operating of a second device responsive to the second duty cycle.
- the first device performs the function by any device 110 based on the second instruction for any device 110 and maintains operating of any device 110 in response to the second duty cycle.
- the first device instructs a second device to perform a function and operates or maintains operating of the second device in response to the second duty cycle. Operating may refer to performing operation of any device 110 described herein.
- FIGS. 2A and 2B further refer to embodiments within which light sources 110 may transmit among each other instructions to assign statuses of masters and slaves.
- a first lighting system 100 component such as a lighting device 110 may have a status of a master.
- the master first lighting device 110 may transmit a first information using data bits 215 or 220 to a second lighting system 100 component, such as a second lighting device 110 .
- the second lighting device component having a slave status.
- the second lighting system 100 component receives the first information and in response to the first information adjusts the status of the second lighting system 100 component to a master status.
- the second lighting system 100 component having a master status transmits a second information using data bits 215 or 220 to the first lighting system 100 component.
- the first lighting system 100 component receives the second information and in response to the second information adjusts the status of the first lighting system 100 component to a status of a slave.
- light source 110 B having a master status, transmits a first information using data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 to light source 110 A which has a slave status.
- Light source 110 A receives the first information and in response to the first information adjusts the status of the light source 110 A to a master status.
- Light source 110 A having a master status, transmits a second information using data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 to the light source 110 B.
- Light source 110 B receives the second information and in response to the second information adjusts the status of the first light source 110 B to a slave status.
- light source 110 A having a master status, transmits a third information via data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 to a plurality of lighting system components, one of which is light source 110 B.
- the third information transmitted by light source 110 A comprises address 127 B.
- the plurality of lighting system components receive the third information and light source 110 B receives the third information.
- Light source 110 B matches address 127 B within the third information to address 127 B of the light source 110 B.
- light source 110 B in response to the third information, adjusts the status of light source 110 B to a status of a master.
- light source 110 B in response to the address 127 B matching the address 127 B of the light source 110 B, adjusts the status of light source 110 B to a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 B, in response to the received third information and in response to the address 127 B matching the address 127 B of the light source 110 B, adjusts the status of light source 110 B to a status of a master.
- a plurality of light sources 110 each having a status of a master or a slave, communicate using a same connection 105 component, such as a wire or an electrical current conducting line.
- any of the light sources 110 may become a master or a slave.
- the plurality of light sources 110 communicating over a same connection 105 component include only a single master, while all other light sources 110 have a status of a slave.
- one of the light sources 110 having a status of a slave pulls the voltage potential within the connection 105 component low for a period of time, such as a microsecond, a millisecond or a second.
- the light source 110 having a status of a master interprets the low voltage signal in the connection 105 component as a signal to change status from master to slave.
- the light source 110 having a status of a master accepts the status of a slave, and the light source 110 which pulled the voltage potential low accepts the status of a master.
- the signal across the connection 105 component signals a change in the status of one or more light sources 110 communicating over the same connection 105 component.
- the signal that changes the status of one or more lighting system components may be a high voltage potential signal, a low voltage signal, an impulse, a digital pattern, a ground signal, or any other analog or digital signal transmitted over connection 105 .
- each one of the group of light sources 110 when a group of light sources 110 are all off, upon being turned on, each one of the group of light sources 110 turns on with a status of a master.
- a light source that has just turned on upon receiving a signal that a light source 110 having a master status, also called a master, already exists, a light source that has just turned on changes its own status to a status of a slave.
- a group of light sources 110 upon turning on and automatically changing its own status to a master, the light source 110 listens for a period of time if there is another master on the network. If the light source 110 does not receive any messages that there is another master on the network, the light source 110 remains the master.
- a lighting system 100 component receiving instruction from a sender assembles received bits 215 from a plurality of periods 205 .
- the lighting system 100 component receiving information from a sender parses the bits and bytes of the received information and forms instruction, data or commands.
- lighting system 100 component receiving instruction from a sender interprets the forms instructions, data or commands and implements the same formed instructions, data or commands.
- lighting system 100 components use bidirectional digital pulse width modulated communication to transmit and receive information. Furthermore, in some embodiments, lighting system 100 components use digital pulse width modulated communication to control performance and functionality of one or more lighting system 100 components.
- Light brightness also referred to as intensity
- intensity in many embodiments is controlled, communicated or instructed using a pulse width modulated communication. In many embodiments, light brightness or intensity is controlled, communicated or instructed using a duty cycle of a period 205 .
- Pulse width modulated signals may therefore be referred to as transport mechanism of the digital communication between lighting system 100 components.
- a digital pattern may be any order or any formation of data 210 , data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 .
- a digital pattern may include an order or a formation of a specific number of data bits within a period 205 .
- Data bits, such as data bits 215 may include bits having a high value, or a digital value of 1, and a number of data bits having a low value, or a digital value of 0.
- Data bits may form a duty cycle within the period 205 .
- the duty cycle formed by the data bits of the digital pattern may identify the intensity or brightness of the light emitted.
- Duty cycle may be determined by summing up all time durations of the digital patterns for which data bits had high values within the time interval. For example, if the signal comprising a data stream made up of digital patterns has data bits having high values 70 percent of the time within a time interval, the duty cycle for the time interval may be 0.7. The duty cycle may be determined by summing portions of the signal within the time interval for which the signal was high and dividing the signal by the total duration of the time interval. In some embodiments, duty cycle is determined based on a sum of time durations of the signal having low values.
- Data bits 215 may be transmitted via a connection 105 within one or more time intervals 205 .
- a number of data bits having a value of 1 (and/or a value of zero) within the time interval may determine the intensity of light or brightness of light emitted by the light device 110 . The intensity may be determined for the duration of that time interval.
- a digital pattern may include an order or a formation of data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 within a predetermined number of concatenated periods 205 .
- a stream of data bits 215 may be transmitted to a light device 110 within a chain of a predetermined number of periods 205 , such as for example 128 periods 205 .
- Each period 205 may include a separate digital pattern.
- a lighting device 110 receiving the data stream may calculate a duty cycle for all of 128 periods 205 using all the digital data patterns within each period.
- the duty cycle of the 128 periods may indicate the brightness or intensity at which light device 110 will emit. In one instance, duty cycle of 128 periods may be 0.8, indicating that the light device 110 will emit at 80% of it's maximum brightness.
- a digital pattern may comprise a ratio of high to low values which encode or identify an intensity or brightness of light.
- the intensity or brightness of light emitted may defined by a total number of bits having a value of 1 within a period of time per a period of time.
- Digital patterns may include one or more predetermined patterns of data bits 215 that are oriented to have any high value signal to low value signal ratio.
- the ratio of high signal to a total duration of period may encode or identify the brightness or intensity. For example, if a period 205 has six bits of data having a value of 1 and two bits of data having a value of zero, the intensity or brightness may indicate 6/8 of maximum intensity or brightness for that period 205 .
- a digital pattern may identify a specific ratio of bits having high values to bits having low values within a period 205 .
- a specific ratio may include a duration of time for which a portion of a period 205 includes high values, such as digital bits with a value of 1 divided by the entire time duration of period 205 .
- the specific ratio may include a duration of time for which a portion of the period 205 includes low values having a digital value of zero divided by the entire time duration of period 205 .
- the specific ratio may identify a duty cycle.
- the duty cycle may be proportional or inversely proportional to the brightness or intensity of the light emitted.
- the specific ratio of the signal may include a ratio of a duration of time for which signal is high in relation to the duration of time for which the signal is low.
- An algorithm may be used to identify the intensity or brightness based on the ratio of the duration of time for which the signal is high in relation to the time duration for which the signal is low.
- a digital pattern may identify or form an average value of the signal within one or more periods 205 . In some embodiments, a digital pattern forms an average value of the bits within a period 205 . The average value of the bits within a period 205 may determine or identify the intensity or brightness of the light emitted.
- any of the duty cycle, average signal, and the specific ratios may be formed by digital signals, as well as analog signals, pulses, PWM signals, encoded data bit signals, encoded digital number signals, or any other type and form of signals having at least a high value and a low value.
- a digital pattern may be random or predetermined and may include any number of digital bits of any pattern of format.
- Digital bits may be formed by a switch or a transistor.
- the switch or the transistor may transmit high and low signals.
- the high and low signals may be received by the light devices 110 , and may be processed by filters to determine the specific ratios, average values or the duty cycles.
- a digital pattern may include a predetermined total number of data bits of which 10 data bits have a high value within a period 205 .
- the brightness or intensity of the light emitted by the light device may be determined by dividing 10 bits with the total predetermined number of data bits within the period that can be transmitted within the period 205 .
- digital pattern may include a predetermined order of bits.
- digital pattern includes a random order of the bits.
- Digital pattern may be altered to accommodate instructions or information transmitted to the light device 110 using instruction bits 220 .
- the digital pattern may add a number of bits that accommodates the already transmitted instruction bits 220 within the period 205 .
- transmission bits 220 carry an instruction to the light device 220
- the digital pattern within the same period 205 may include a number of bits determined by subtracting the number of instruction bits having a high value from the originally intended digital pattern bits. Then, a digital pattern that has a number of data bits that is determined by subtracting the number of already sent instruction bits having a high value from the total intended number of data bits having a high value.
- the number of bits having a high value from the instruction within the period 205 would be included in the overall digital pattern, thereby maintaining the duty cycle unchanged even if an instruction is transmitted within same period 205 .
- a digital pattern may maintain the intensity or brightness of the light device 110 , while an instruction could be transmitted within the period 205 without affecting the total number of data bits having a high value.
- a number of bits having the low value would be maintained within the period to accommodate the transmitted instruction.
- a digital pattern comprises a number of data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 which is equal over all periods 205 .
- the lighting device 110 may continuously receive intensity information and instructions via digital patterns of the periods 205 .
- the digital patterns may instruct the lighting device 110 to emit light at the intensity or brightness indicated by the digital pattern of each period.
- periods may include predetermined durations of time a continuous data stream of digital patterns may be received to maintain desired intensity.
- Each digital pattern may include a predetermined number of data bits or a varying or random number of data bits within each time period.
- periods 205 may have a varying number of data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 .
- periods 205 may be indicated by a specific signal, such as one or more bits, pause or an impulse, periods 205 may vary in time duration as well as the number of bits transmitted. In some embodiments, digital pattern affects or defines duty cycle of a period 205 .
- a digital pattern of a period 205 may include any number of data bits, such as between 1 and 1024 data bits. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes more than 1024 data bits within a period 205 . In further embodiments, a digital pattern includes between 4 and 512 data bits, such as 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 256 and 512 data bits. In one example, eight data bits 215 may be transmitted within a period 205 . An 8-bit digital patterning for generating the digital pattern may include any number of sequences or distinct digital patterns of any variation of 8 bits.
- a digital pattern includes a single bit having a high value, or a value of 1, and seven remaining bits within the period 205 having a low value or a value of zero.
- duty cycle of the period 205 may be 1 ⁇ 8.
- a digital pattern includes two out of eight bits having a high value or a bit having a value of 1, and six remaining bits having a value of zero or a low value.
- duty cycle may be 1 ⁇ 4.
- a digital pattern may include 4 bits of high value and 4 bits of low value. In these embodiments, duty cycle may be 1 ⁇ 2. These bits may be ordered in a predetermined fashion to maintain a desired duty cycle.
- digital patterns are randomized while maintaining the desired duty cycle.
- a duty cycle of 1 ⁇ 2 may be generated by an 8-bit digital pattern of 01010101, 00001111, 11001100, 01100110 or any other digital pattern having 4 high bits and 4 low bits within a period 205 .
- any digital patterns may be generated, including five, six, seven or eight bits having high values.
- period 205 may include any number of bits, such as a total of 16 bits, a digital pattern may have any number of variations to accommodate any number of bits.
- a duty cycle of 15/16 may be implemented by a pattern of 0111111111111111, 1110111111111, 1111111101111111, 1111111111111101, or any other configuration of the similar kind.
- Such concepts may apply to embodiments of digital patterns of any number of bits 215 within a period 205 , such as a 4 bit digital pattern, 6 bit digital pattern, 8 bit digital pattern, 10 bit digital pattern, 12 bit digital pattern, 16 bit digital pattern, 24 bit digital pattern, 32 bit digital pattern, 64 bit digital pattern or a digital pattern comprising any number of data bits within one or more periods 205 .
- a digital pattern may also include a numbering format or a code.
- a digital pattern includes a data bits identifying a number.
- a digital pattern may include code 0001 identifying the number 1, 0010 identifying a number 2, 0100 identifying a number 4 or a 1000 identifying a number 8.
- a digital pattern may include code 0101 identifying a number 5 or a 1010 identifying a number 10.
- the light source 110 may receive the codes and interpret the numbers accordingly.
- the light source may determine a value of 10 to mean an intensity of 10/16 of the maximum intensity of the light for the lighting device.
- the light source may determine the value of 10 to mean a level 10 of a total of 16 levels of intensity for the light emitted.
- a digital pattern may include any type and form of code that may be mapped, encoded, decoded or interpreted by the light source 110 to identify a brightness or intensity of the light emitted.
- FIGS. 4A-B illustrate digital data transmitted between light sources 110 A and 110 B divided into periods 305 , each of which includes 8 bits of data.
- Period 305 include a period of time within which 8 bits of data 215 are transmitted, sent or received by lighting device 110 .
- period 305 may be modified so that any number of data bits are transmitted within the period 305 , such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 24, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 or any other number of data bits.
- period 305 is a period 205 .
- period 305 is a duration of time within which 8 bits are transmitted.
- a period 205 includes a plurality of periods 305 .
- a period 305 may include a number of bits of data one or more lighting system 100 components use or receive in a single instruction or a single instruction set.
- Periods 205 or 305 may have any duration of time between 1 microsecond and 100 seconds.
- Periods 205 or 305 may include one or more durations of time, such as 0.1 microsecond, 1 microsecond, 10 microseconds, 50 microseconds, 100 microseconds, 1 millisecond, 10 milliseconds, 50 milliseconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 10 seconds or a 100 seconds.
- 8-bit period 305 is a period of time defined by, determined by, or corresponding to a duration of time within which lighting system 100 components communicated via connection 105 transmit 8 bits of data 210 .
- period 305 is a period of time defined by, determined by, or corresponding to a duration of time within which lighting system 100 components communicated via connection 105 receive any predetermined number of data bits, such as 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 256, or 512.
- Periods 305 may include same or different durations of time. In some embodiments, some periods 305 are longer or shorter than other periods 305 . In further embodiments, all periods 305 are of a same predetermined length of time.
- Each period 305 may include a same predetermined number of data bits. In some embodiments, some periods 305 include a number of data bits that is different than the number of data bits of another period 305 .
- a period 205 may include a predetermined number of periods 305 . For example, a period 205 may include a duration of time within which a predetermined number of periods 205 is enclosed. Each period 205 may include a digital pattern having any number of bits. In some embodiments, some periods 305 of a period 205 may have different average value of the data bits within the period 205 from the average values of data bits of other periods 305 of the same period 205 .
- some periods 305 of a period 205 may include a different number of data bits having a high value from a number of data bits having a high value within other periods 305 of the same periods 205 .
- a total duration of time for which the signal has a high value within a period 305 may vary from other periods 305 of the same period 205 .
- a ratio of a duration of time within which the signal has a high value per a total duration of a period 305 may be also referred to as the duty cycle of the period 305 .
- Duty cycles of some periods 305 of a period 205 may differ from the duty cycles of other periods 305 of the same period 205 .
- a period 205 may include 128 periods 205 each of which further includes an 8 bit digital pattern.
- the period 205 along with all the bits from each of the periods 305 within the period 205 may form or identify a specific ratio of a number of bits having a high value to a number of bits having a low value within the period 205 .
- the period 205 may have a duty cycle determined by a total duration of time within the period 205 for which the signal is high (or for which the bits have a value of 1) divided by the total duration of time of the period 205 .
- the duty cycle of the period 205 may be used to scale the maximum intensity or brightness of the light emitted by the light source 110 to the desired intensity.
- a new period 205 immediately following the period 205 may identify another duty cycle for a changed or modified intensity or brightness.
- the light source may modify the light intensity emitted based on the new duty cycle for the new period 205 .
- digital patterns of other periods 305 within the period 205 may be modified by the pattern generator of the communicator 125 of the sender to maintain the desired intensity for the light source 110 at a predetermined level.
- light devices 110 may receive real-time updated intensity or brightness while receiving instructions or commands for other functions or purposes of the light device 110 .
- FIGS. 4A-B an embodiment of a digital pattern determining intensity or brightness via a period 315 for a 16-bit transmission is illustrated.
- FIGS. 4A-B illustrate a light source 110 A connected to light source 110 B via connection 105 .
- Connection 105 transmits information or communication transmitted between light sources 110 A and 110 B.
- FIG. 4B illustrates embodiments where digital data transmitted between light sources 110 A and 110 B divided into 8-bit periods 305 and 16-bit periods 315 .
- 8-bit period 305 may be modified to accommodate a 16-bit period 315 for a finer control of the brightness and intensity range.
- the brightness intensity may be divided into 16 shades, or any other number of shades.
- a 16-bit period 315 is a period 205 whose time length is tailored to allow transmission of 16 bits of data 215 within the period 205 .
- the plurality of periods 305 or periods 315 within a period 205 may include any digital pattern.
- a period 305 of a period 205 may have 4 bits having a high value and 4 bits having a low value, while another period 305 from the same period 205 may include 8 bits having a high value and no bits having a low value.
- Duty cycles of periods 305 , average values of signal within the period 305 or specific ratios of the high to low bits within periods 305 may vary while the overall duty cycle, average value or specific ratio of the period 205 as a whole may be maintained at a particular predetermined level.
- a period 205 comprising 50 periods 305 may include one or more periods comprising instructions and commands for the light device 110 .
- the periods 305 within which the instructions were transmitted may have duty cycles altered from other duty cycles.
- Duty cycles of periods 305 may be defined as durations of time for which the signal had a high value divided by the total duration of time of period 305
- a pattern generator of the communicator 125 sending the data bits to the light device 110 may compensate for the transmitted instructions by increasing or decreasing the number of data bits having a high value in order to maintain the intensity or brightness of the entire period 205 at a predetermined level.
- the pattern generator may keep a track of the number of data bits having a high value within a period 205 .
- pattern generator of the communicator 125 of the sender may determine how many data bits having a high value need to be added in the periods 305 following the periods 305 that included the instructions. By keeping track of the overall number of data bits 215 within a period 205 , intensity and brightness may remained controlled by the number of data bits having a high value even when the instructions are transmitted within the period 205 .
- lighting system 100 components such as light source 110 B and light source 110 A, communicate using data bits 215 , instruction bits 220 or a combination of data bits 215 and instruction bits 220 .
- the light devices 110 may receive real time adjustments for the brightness or intensity for each light source 110 via the stream of data bits per each receiving period 205 .
- lighting system components using 8-bit periods 305 are capable of transmitting or receiving information twice as fast.
- lighting system components, such as light sources 110 A and 110 B 16 bit send or transmit a 16-bit digital pattern within an 8 bit period.
- light source 110 B communicates with light source 110 A transmitting or receiving information within 8-bit periods 305 .
- light source 110 B transmits a 16-bit digital pattern comprising data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 within an 8-bit period 305 to light source 110 A.
- Light source 110 A receives 16-bit digital pattern within the 8-bit period 305 and in response to the received 16-bit digital pattern adjusts, changes or maintains the intensity of the light emitted by the light source 110 A.
- Duration of periods 205 , 305 or 315 may be adjusted to affect intensity.
- periods 205 , 305 or 315 are increased or decreased to modulate average intensity of a light source 110 receiving the information.
- preceding periods 305 or 315 are increased or decreased and succeeding periods 305 or 315 are adjusted accordingly to maintain a desired intensity over a 205 period.
- Digital patterns comprising any number of bits may have duty cycles of periods 205 , 305 or 315 , defined by a number of bits having values of 1 or 0.
- two different digital patterns comprising a same total number of bits within a period, such as period 205 , 305 or 315 , may have a same or a different duty cycle.
- the duty cycle of a period may be determined by a ratio of the number of bits having a high value to the number of bits having a low value of that same period.
- Duty cycle of a period may also be determined by summing up all durations of time for which the signal (data bits) had a high value and divide this sum of the durations of time with a total duration of time of the period.
- Duty cycle may also be determined by taking an average value of all portions of the signal (bits having a high value and bits having a low value). Duty cycle may be used to identify or determine the brightness or the intensity of the light emitted.
- the light device 110 may include a filter within a controller 120 or a communicator 125 that determines the duty cycle and controls the brightness or intensity of the light emitted.
- the filter may determine the duty cycle of each period 205 by counting the instructions from within the period 205 .
- the filter of the controller 120 or the communicator 125 of the receiving light source 110 may determine the duty cycle of the period 205 while not including the instructions within the period 205 .
- Lighting system 100 comprises a plurality of light sources 110 each emitting a light of a different spectral range or a different color.
- the plurality of light sources may be within a single lighting fixture, or they may comprise separate lighting devices.
- the lighting system 100 may include a light source 110 A emitting a red light, a light source 110 B emitting a green light and a light source 110 C emitting a blue light.
- the lighting system 100 may use digital patterns within periods 305 , 315 and 205 to govern or control the overall color of light emitted by all of the light sources 110 A-C.
- digital patterns may govern the intensity of each of the light devices 110 A-C in order to establish a specific hue of light, such as a white color for example.
- the lighting system may transmit digital patterns and vary the number of data bits within each period of time to produce any particular color by mixing light at intensities determined via digital patterning from each one of the sources 110 A-C.
- the light sources 110 A-C may receive digital patterns within varying durations of time, or varying periods 205 for each of the light source 110 A-C in order to produce the white light.
- the light sources 110 A-C may receive real-time updates of the intensity at periods of 205 and receive instructions within periods 305 which are within periods 205 .
- a lighting system 100 controls the total color output of the light emitted by all three light sources 110 by using a feedback to adjust intensity of some light sources via digital patterning in order to adjust the total hue of the output light.
- a plurality of light sources 110 A-N may each emit light of a different spectral range or a different color.
- a lighting system 100 component controlling the light sources 110 A-N may emit separate data streams comprising digital patterns within periods 305 and 205 to each of the light sources 110 in order to control the color rendering or the total color output produced by the light sources 110 A-N.
- method 400 relates to a method of color mixing of a plurality of light sources emitting different light color.
- a controller receives or generates an instruction for a remote lighting device and a setting for an intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device.
- the controller generates a signal that comprises the instruction, a time period and a duty cycle of the signal within a time interval of the time period.
- the duty cycle of the signal may be based on a sum of portions of a digital pattern of the signal which have a high value within the time interval.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wire used for supplying electrical power to the remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device establishes intensity of light or performs color mixing of a plurality of lights emitting different colors of light, based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time interval.
- the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined intensity of the light or mixes colors of light based on intensities of each of the plurality of light sources emitting a different color of light.
- the remote lighting device takes or implements an action based on the instruction from the signal.
- a controller acquires an instruction and a setting for a remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device may include a single light source or a plurality of light sources.
- the instruction may include an instruction for a single light source or for each of the plurality of light sources.
- the controller generates the instruction or the setting.
- the controller receives the instruction or the setting from another lighting system component.
- the controller generates an instruction or a setting based on a configuration set by a user.
- the controller receives an instruction or a setting from a user input or an instruction file.
- a controller generates instructions based on a program, script, prior instruction file or a user input identifying actions to be taken by the remote lighting device.
- the acquired instruction may include any type and form of a command for an action implemented by a lighting device.
- the instruction includes a command to send an error message.
- the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement message or an alert when an address of an instruction matches the address of the lighting device.
- the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement if ambient light detector of the lighting device is active.
- the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement if a presence of an object is detected in the vicinity of a light switch enclosure.
- the instruction includes a command to set a brightness value of the remote lighting device or a light source within the remote lighting device, such as a green light source, blue light source or a red light source of the remote lighting device.
- the instruction includes a command to use an external source for PWM signal to control the intensity of the light.
- the instruction includes a command to use a value sent to the remote lighting device as a maximum intensity or maximum brightness value of the remote lighting device.
- the instruction includes a command to turn the light emitted by the remote lighting device off by dimming.
- the instruction includes a setting for the remote lighting device as a master or a slave. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a setting for the remote lighting device as a member of a group or a zone.
- the setting for the remote lighting device may include a setting for an intensity or brightness of the light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the setting identifies an intensity or brightness of light relative to the maximum intensity set for the remote lighting device. The setting may identify the dimness or brightness of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device for a predetermined duration of time.
- the controller generates a signal comprising the instruction, a time period and a duty cycle of the signal within a time interval.
- the controller may generate a signal comprising one or more digital patterns.
- Digital patterns may be generated to compensate for any instructions to be embedded with the signal.
- Digital patterns may further be generated to ensure that a duty cycle within a time interval remains at a predetermined level.
- digital patterns comprise one or more portions of the signal having high and low values within a time interval.
- a digital pattern that includes a plurality of high and low data bits is located within a predetermined time interval of a plurality of time intervals of a time period of a signal. Each time interval may or may not include an instruction.
- Each time interval may include one or more digital patterns generated to ensure that the duty cycle of the signal remains at a level indicating a predetermined light intensity for the time interval, regardless of the presence of the instruction within the time interval.
- the duty cycle of the signal may be based upon a sum of portions of one or more digital patterns having a high value within a predetermined time interval.
- the controller generates the signal that has a digital pattern that includes digital bits having high values and low values within a time interval of the time period.
- digital patterns may include any variation or order of high and low data bits within a time interval. The digital pattern may be generated such that a sum of time durations of the digital bits having high values within a time interval divided by the duration of the time interval corresponds to the setting for the intensity of the light.
- a generated digital pattern includes a sum of time durations of the signal having high values 65 percent of the time within the time interval.
- the sum of the time durations having high values divided by the total duration of the time interval may equal 0.65. This result may correspond to the setting for the intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device identifying an intensity of about 65% of the maximum light intensity.
- digital patterns of the signal may be generated to identify any intensity of light.
- the intensity may be in percentages of the maximum light intensity, in Watts, Watts per meter square, lumens, nits or any other unit of light intensity or brightness.
- a signal generator of the controller generates the signal comprising the digital patterns and a plurality of time intervals within a time period.
- the signal may be generated to further include the instruction into one or more of the time intervals of the time period of the signal.
- the controller generates a signal to be comprised by a first time interval of the time period while generating one or more digital patterns of the first time interval.
- the digital patterns may be generated to account for the number of the portions of the instruction having high values so that the total duty cycle within the first time interval remains at a predetermined level regardless of the instruction being present.
- the controller generates the signal to include the instruction in the first time interval of the time period.
- digital patterns are included into other time intervals of the time period to compensate or account for the instruction and maintain the duty cycle within the period at a predetermined level.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wire of the remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a power supplying line or an active wire of a standard power distribution system powering the lighting device.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a common wire of a traditional power distribution system.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a ground wire, or a conductive sheathing of a cable.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wireless signal, such as a WIFI signal or a radio signal.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via a network, such as a computing network or a communication network of the plurality of lighting devices.
- the remote lighting device receives the signal via an infrared channel. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via an optical channel, such as a fiber optic or an optical wireless receiving system.
- the remote lighting device may receive the signal via a controller or a communicator. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device uses a signal processor or a signal processing unit to receive and process the signal. In other embodiments, controller filters the signal using filters, such as frequency filters, power filters or optical filters. The filtered signal may be processed for the duty cycle and for the instructions for the remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device establishes intensity of light based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time interval.
- the remote lighting device may establish the intensity based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time period.
- the remote lighting device determines the ratio of the sum of the portions of the digital patterns within the time interval having high values and a duration of the time interval.
- the duty cycle is determined based on a ratio of the sum of the portions of the digital patterns within a plurality of time intervals of the time period and the entire duration of the time period.
- a signal processor of a controller of the remote lighting device processes the signal to determine the duty cycle.
- the signal may be processed using any type of function, script or an algorithm operating of the signal processor to determine the duty cycle.
- the controller of the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle.
- the communicator of the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle within the time period.
- the controller of the remote lighting device screens for any instructions within the received signal and determines the duty cycle of the signal.
- the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of the Watts of the light emitted.
- the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of Watts per unit of area.
- the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle within each single time period.
- the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle over a plurality of time periods. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle over a plurality of time intervals within a single time period. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle within each individual time interval of each individual time period. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of the relative light intensity of the remote lighting device, such as the maximum light intensity. For example, the remote lighting device may determine the intensity of light based on the duty cycle identifying 0.85 or 85% of the maximum light intensity of the remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined intensity of light. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined ratio. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device multiplies the ratio with the maximum intensity to determine the intensity of light at which the remote lighting device will emit. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device continuously receives the signal and determines the intensity for each time period of the signal. In such embodiments, the remote lighting device updates or adjusts the intensity of the light emitted in real-time. For example, in an instance where a time period comprises time a duration of a millisecond, the intensity of the light emitted may be determined for the millisecond.
- the intensity of light at which the remote lighting device would operate the following millisecond may be determined based on the duty cycle of the signal within the following time period.
- the remote lighting device maintains the intensity of light until a signal comprising a different duty cycle within a time period or time interval is detected.
- the remote lighting device takes an action based on the instruction.
- the remote lighting device sends an error message out in response to the instruction.
- the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement message or an alert when an address of an instruction matches the address of the lighting device in response to the instruction.
- the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement if ambient light detector of the lighting device is active.
- the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement if a presence of an object is the object is detected in the vicinity of a light switch enclosure.
- the remote lighting device sets a brightness value of the remote lighting device or a light source within the remote lighting device.
- the remote lighting device sets a brightness or intensity value for a green light source, a blue light source or a red light source within the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device begins to use an external source for PWM signal to control the intensity of the light. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device begins to use a value sent to the remote lighting device as a maximum intensity or maximum brightness value of the remote lighting device. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device turns the light emitted by the remote lighting device off by dimming. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a status for the remote lighting device as a master or a slave in response to the instruction.
- the remote lighting device sets the remote lighting device as a member of a group or a zone in response to the instruction.
- the remote lighting device may implement any instruction received or set any configuration or setting in response to the instruction received from the signal. Any portion of the controller of the remote lighting device may receive and process the instruction.
- a communicator of the remote lighting device processes the instruction.
- the remote lighting device may implement any action or a function instructed by any instruction of a command received.
- a lighting device such as a standard fluorescent lighting fixture or a source comprising a plurality of light emitting diodes is installed in an office, a building or at a home.
- the lighting device may include a single color light source or a plurality of light sources, each of which may emit light of a different color.
- the lighting device may be used in communication with one or more other lighting devices which may use controllers to send control signals coordinating operations between the light sources.
- the intensity of light emitted by a lighting device, or a light source may be controlled via a received signal that includes one or more digital patterns identifying the intensity or brightness.
- the signal may be delivered to the lighting device via standard wiring components commonly used for providing power to the lighting fixtures.
- Such standard wiring components may include electrical wires or power lines used for providing electrical power for the light sources. More specifically, the signal may be delivered via traditional wires, such as active lines, common lines or ground lines of the standard power distribution electrical wiring system.
- the signal may include analog or digital components and may include any type, form or format of signal.
- the signal may comprise digital patterns that may be made up of pulse width modulated signals, square wave signals, datagram, data packets, or any other type or form of digital information.
- the signal may further comprise a stream of data bits divided into time intervals, each comprising one or more portions of the signal.
- the portions of the signal may include digital patterns identifying intensity or brightness of the light to be emitted by the remote lighting device receiving the signal. In some embodiments, digital patterns identify a duty cycle within a time interval.
- Such duty cycle within the time interval may be based on a sum of all time durations of the signal for which the signal is high within the time interval.
- the sum of the time durations may be divided by the total duration of the time interval to determine the ratio of the intensity.
- the ratio may be the ratio of the maximum intensity of light that can be emitted by the remote lighting device.
- the lighting device may filter and process the digital patterns and identify the intensity of the light from the digital patterns by determining the duty cycle or the ratio based on the duty cycle.
- the remote lighting device may emit the light as identified by the duty cycle or the ratio based on the duty cycle.
- FIG. 5A depicts a lighting system 100 comprising a non-contact device 400 or a light non-contact switch 400 that includes a light source LED 405 , LED controller 410 , power supply 140 , light detector 420 and detector controller 425 .
- the non-contact device 400 is in connection with one or more LED devices, such as lighting devices or sources 110 or any other components of the lighting system 100 .
- LED 405 and light detector 420 further comprise gain circuit 470 .
- LED 405 of the non-contact switch 400 is a light source that may emit an electromagnetic signal, such as a light, a wireless or an optical signal.
- Non-contact switch 400 may further include a light detector 420 that may be connected to detector controller 425 via connection 105 .
- the non-contact device 400 may detect an object 450 located outside of the light non-contact switch 400 by detecting any interference, effect or reflection of the signal emitted by LED 405 caused by the object 450 .
- Object 405 may also generate or emit an electromagnetic or other type or form signal to be detected by the non-contact device 400 .
- Light detector 420 of the non-contact device 400 may be controlled or modulated by the detector controller 425 in any number of configurations to detect the signal reflected or emitted by the object 450 .
- Non-contact device 400 may transmit any detected signals to any number of lighting devices 110 or any other components of the lighting system 100 .
- non-contact switch 400 may be any device, apparatus or a unit comprising any type and form of hardware, software, or any combination of hardware and software for non-contact selection or detection by any object.
- non-contact switch 400 is a light switch box or a light switch device or package.
- Non-contact switch 400 may be any unit, apparatus, system or a component detecting an object 450 , a signal, a person or any living being within a distance from the non-contact switch.
- non-contact switch 400 detects an object 450 , a person or a living being without the object 450 , the person or the living being touching the non-contact switch 400 physically.
- non-contact switch 400 detects an object 450 , a person or a living being with the object 450 , the person or the living being physically touching or nearly touching the non-contact switch 400 .
- Non-contact switch 400 may comprise a box enclosing a LED 405 , a light detector 420 or any other lighting system 100 component, or more specifically a light non-contact switch 400 component, such as those displayed in FIG. 5 .
- a non-contact switch 400 comprises, or is a component of a light fixture installed in a room.
- the non-contact device 400 may include any type of processor or processors configured to implement specialized functions for controlling, modulating or configuring any component of the non-contact device 400 , such as the light detector 420 or LED 405 .
- Non-contact device 400 may include any type and form of firmware or software instructions operating on the processor or the processors configured for controlling any of the non-contact device 400 components.
- non-contact switch 400 may further include any number of hardware components detecting of any type and form of object, person or a user located at any distance from the non-contact device 400 .
- Non-contact device 400 may be used by a user to control one or more lighting devices, adjust brightness of the light emitted or to select specific lighting devices.
- non-contact device 400 is used to select a particular light source 110 or a group of light sources 110 during the configuration the lighting system 100 .
- the user selects one or more light sources 110 to select or identify specific light sources to be configured a certain way, to be assigned a particular address or to be processed, programmed or controlled in a way determined by the system or the user.
- Transparent cover 460 may be any portion of non-contact switch 400 comprising a material that is transparent to a portion of the light emitted by LED 405 .
- Non-contact switch 400 may comprise an enclosure that may further include any number of additional components, such as the transparent cover 460 .
- transparent cover 460 comprises a material transparent in the visible or infrared range, such as for example, a glass, a clear plastic or a plexiglass cover.
- Transparent cover 460 may further comprise any other material that is transparent or semi-transparent to any light or signal emitted by the LED 405 .
- the transparent cover may comprise a filter that filters out wavelengths of light outside of a predetermined range.
- the transparent cover may reflect a portion of a light, such as for example 0.01, 0.1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 percent of the light, or any other percentage of light between 10 and 90 percent that reach the transparent cover 460 .
- the transparent cover 460 may further include any component or a part of the non-contact switch 400 that reflects or is capable of reflecting signal emitted from the LED 405 .
- Transparent cover 460 may be opaque to any wavelength of light aside from the light emitted by the LED 405 .
- Transparent cover 460 may comprise an optical filter, filtering, absorbing or reflecting some wavelengths of light and allowing others to pass through.
- Transparent cover 460 may be positioned on the enclosure of the non-contact switch 400 to reflect a specific portion of light from the LED 405 towards the light detector 420 .
- Transparent cover 460 may comprise a reflective coating to ensure a specific reflectivity, or a reflectivity of a specific percentage or portion of the signal from LED 405 .
- transparent cover 460 comprises a reflective surface, such as a mirror for example.
- Transparent cover may be positioned anywhere within the non-contact switch 400 or outside of the switch 400 .
- transparent cover 460 is a component of the enclosure of the non-contact switch 400 .
- Transparent cover 460 may allow only a portion of light to propagate through the transparent cover while reflecting a fraction of the light.
- transparent cover reflects between 10 and 20, 20 and 30, 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90 and 90 and 99.99 percent of the signal.
- the transparent cover may also propagate, transmit or allow transmission of any portion of the signal such as for example, 99.99 and 95, 95 and 90, 90 and 80, 80 and 70, 70 and 60, 60 and 50, 50 and 40, 40 and 30, 30 and 20, 20 and 10, or 10 and 0.01 percent of the signal.
- the transparent cover reflects between about 0 and 1 percent of light, such as for example 0.2, 0.4, 0.6 or 0.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 1 and 2 percent of light, such as for example 1.2, 1.4, 1.6 or 1.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 2 and 3 percent of light, such as for example 2.2, 2.4, 2.6 or 2.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover.
- the transparent cover reflects between about 3 and 4 percent of light, such as for example 3.2, 3.4, 3.6 or 3.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 4 and 5 percent of light, such as for example 4.2, 4.4, 4.6 or 4.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 5 and 6 percent of light, such as for example 5.2, 5.4, 5.6 or 5.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover.
- the transparent cover reflects between about 6 and 7 percent of light, such as for example 6.2, 6.4, 6.6 or 6.8 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In further embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 7-10 percent of light emitted by the LED 405 . In further embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 10 and 20 percent of light, or between 20 and 30, 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90 or 90 and 99.99 percent for example.
- Transparent cover 460 may comprise any component, or any group of components of the non-contact switch 400 that reflect, refract, permeate or propagate any portion of the signal emitted by LED 405 .
- LED 405 of the non-contact device 400 may be any type and form of an apparatus, component or a device emitting or producing an electromagnetic signal. LED 405 may be positioned or deployed anywhere within or around any lighting system 110 component. In some embodiments, LED 405 is light source 110 . In other embodiments, LED 405 is a semiconductor light emitting diode. In further embodiments, LED 405 is a component producing a wireless signal. In still further embodiments, LED 405 is a unit producing a radio or an RF (radio frequency) signal. LED 405 may emit or generate an electromagnetic wave of any wavelength, power or spectral range. In still further embodiments, LED 405 is an infra red light emitting diode or source.
- LED 405 may be a light emitting source that emits light of constant intensity or varying intensity. In some embodiments, LED 405 is a light emitting diode emitting a time dependent intensity or power varying signal. In further embodiments, LED 405 is a flickering light emitting device. LED 405 may emit an amplitude modulated, frequency modulated, phase modulated, pulse width modulated or any signal or output of single or multi-level modulation scheme or type. LED 405 may further comprise any number of light sources or light emitting devices. In some embodiments, LED 405 comprises an array of light emitting diodes, laser diodes, lamps, bulbs or any other type or form of electromagnetic wave emitting devices. LED 405 may include a number of similar or different light emitting devices, sources, diodes or any other components which may or may not be associated with a light source 110 .
- LED 405 may emit signals at different power ranges, different spectral ranges, different intensities and signals with no modulations or signals modulated with various types of modulation schemes.
- LED 405 may further include a second light emitting source emitting a light signal intended to help control or modulate the gain circuitry, such as gain circuit 470 , of the light detector 420 .
- the noise signal light source may emit light at a specific average intensity and a specific spectral range to maintain the gain feedback circuitry, such as the gain circuit 470 , of the light detector 420 within a specific sensitivity range.
- Such sensitivity range of the light detector 420 may enable the light detector 420 to detect an object 450 at a specific distance or distance range from the non-contact device 400 .
- the total light of the LED 405 may include the first light source emitting the modulated and controlled signal and the second light source emitting the noise or the background signal for modulating the gain of the light detector 420 .
- LED 405 includes two or more LED 405 components, each of which may include any functionality or embodiment of any other LED 405 .
- LED 405 may include any number of sources that emit pulsed signals at a specific frequency or at a number of specific frequencies or frequency ranges.
- light emitted by one or more sources of the LED 405 may have a spectral ranges in the visible, near infra red, infra red or far infra red range.
- the light emitted may also be modulated in bursts or pulses occurring for a specific duration of time at a specific frequency or a range of frequencies.
- light emitted may be random and constant light.
- signal comprises light in x-ray range, visible range, near infrared range, mid infrared range, a far infrared range or radio wavelength range.
- the signal may comprise light having any spectral range, such as between 1 and 5 nanometers, 5 and 10 nanometers, 10 and 15 nanometers, 15 and 20 nanometers, 20 and 25 nanometers, 25 and 30 nanometers, 30 and 40 nanometers, 40 and 60 nanometers, 60 and 80 nanometers, 80 and 100 nanometers, 100 and 400 nanometers or 400 and 2000 or more nanometers.
- signal comprises pulses or bursts of signal which may occur at a carrier frequency.
- the carrier frequency may be any frequency, such as for example, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 or 60 kilohertz.
- the carrier frequency may include any frequency between 100 hertz and 1 kilohertz, 1 kilohertz and 5 kilohertz, 5 kilohertz and 20 kilohertz, 20 kilohertz and 50 kilohertz, 50 kilohertz and 70 kilohertz, 70 kilohertz and 150 kilohertz, 150 kilohertz and 300 kilohertz, 300 kilohertz and 1 megahertz, 1 megahertz and 10 megahertz, 10 megahertz and 100 megahertz, or 100 megahertz and 1000 megahertz.
- the signal may comprise modulation such as frequency, phase, amplitude or pulse width modulation.
- the carrier frequency of the signal is in the range of 30-35 kilohertz. In further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 35-40 kilohertz. In still further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 40-45 kilohertz. In yet further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 45-100 kilohertz.
- the signal may be emitted within any conical angle from the LED, such as between 1 and 3 degrees, 3 and 5 degrees, 5 and 10 degrees, 10 and 20 degrees, 20 and 30 degrees, 30 and 40 degrees, 40 and 50 degrees, 50 and 60 degrees, 60 and 70 degrees, 70 and 80 degrees, 80 and 90 degrees, 90 and 100 degrees, 100 and 110 degrees, 110 and 120 degrees, 120 and 130 degrees, 130 and 140 degrees, 140 and 150 degrees, 150 and 180 degrees, 180 and 220 degrees, 220 and 250 degrees, 250 and 270 degrees and 270 and 360 degrees.
- LED 405 emits pulses of light wherein the pulses occur within any frequency range. In some embodiments, LED 405 emits pulses of light wherein the pulses have a specific duty cycle.
- LED 405 emits an electromagnetic signal that is modulated and controlled by LED controller 410 .
- LED 405 is positioned inside the non-contact switch 400 . In other embodiments, LED 405 is positioned outside of the non-contact switch 400 .
- LED 405 is positioned or installed on or within a lighting device 110 . In further embodiments, LED 405 is positioned near a lighting system 100 component, such as a lighting device 110 . In still further embodiments, LED 405 is positioned on a wall of a room that is illuminated by a lighting device 110 .
- Gain circuit 470 may be any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software that controls, modulates or maintains performance or operation of LED 405 or light detector 420 .
- Gain circuit 470 may include logic circuits, or software operating on one or more processors to control or manage how signals from the LED 405 are detected by light source 410 .
- Gain circuit 470 may utilize a fraction of light reflected by the transparent cover 460 towards the light detector 420 to maintain the light detector 420 within a specific detection range.
- gain circuit 470 manages or controls detection of light detector 410 of any signal, including the signal from the LED 405 or from any other light source, such as for example an emitter of object 450 .
- gain circuit may be comprised by any component of the non-contact switch 400 , such as an LED 405 , light detector 420 , LED controller 410 or detector controller 425 .
- Gain circuit 470 may be connected in a feedback loop with the light detector 420 or the LED 405 .
- the gain circuit 470 may maintain the light detector 420 at a specific detection threshold or detection range.
- the gain circuit may be configured to provide real-time adjustments to the light detector 420 so that the signal detected by the light detector 420 may be maintained within a specific operating range of the light detector 420 .
- the gain circuit 470 maintains a feedback loop with the light detector 420 to maintain the detecting range of the light detector 420 at a specific detection range, such as slightly below a threshold level of the detection of the light detector 420 .
- the gain circuit 470 may compensate and adjust to still maintain the gain of the light detector 420 within the specific range.
- gain circuit 470 may decrease the gain of the light detector 420 to compensate for the increased ambient light.
- the reflected portion of the LED 405 signal may increase the amount of the detected signal slightly above the threshold. The light detector 420 may then detect the presence of the object 450 as the threshold has been exceeded by the portion of the signal reflected by the object 450 .
- the gain circuit 470 may compensate for any changes in ambient light by setting and maintain the light detector 420 within the detection range just below the detectable threshold. However, as the present object 450 reflects a substantial amount of light towards the light detector 420 , the gain circuit 470 may not compensate for such a great increase in light intensity fast enough and the object 450 may be detected by the light detector 420 . As such, gain circuit 470 may control the sensitivity of the signal detected by light detector 420 such that compensates for changes in ambient light or background noise but does not lose sensitivity to the presence of the object 450 .
- the gain circuit 470 may control the light detector 420 such that the light detector 420 it is not oversensitive to detect the presence of the object 450 when the object 450 is not present within a predetermined distance from the non-contact device 400 .
- the gain circuit of any of the LED 405 , LED controller 410 , detector controller 425 or light detector 420 may perform any functionality or include any embodiments of any of the gain circuits of the LED 405 , LED controller 410 , light detector 420 and detector controller 425 .
- gain circuit 470 includes an average intensity filter, a frequency filter and a comparator.
- the average intensity filter of the gain circuit 470 may monitor the average intensity of the signal detected by the light detector 420 .
- the average intensity filter may further filter out intensity of signal that is below or above a predetermined threshold intensity.
- average intensity filter may only allow the signals that are within a predetermined range of the average intensities to pass through the filter. For example, if average intensity of light received by the light detector 420 is below a predetermined intensity threshold, the average intensity may filter out the signal. As such, the average intensity filter may filter out signals outside of the predetermined range.
- the frequency filter of the gain circuit 470 may filter out any signal that is outside of a predetermined frequency range.
- the frequency signal filters out signals that have carrier frequency outside of the allowed frequency range.
- the carrier frequency range of allowed signals may be any signals that have pulses or carrier frequency between 30 and 50 kilohertz. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency range of allowed signals may be around 40 kilohertz, such as 41 or 42 kilohertz for example.
- Comparator of the gain circuit 470 may compare the signals that passed through the average intensity filter and the frequency filter against a threshold. The comparator may compare the signal filtered by the average intensity filter and the frequency filter against a predetermined threshold or a predetermined threshold range. If the comparator detects that the signal exceeds the threshold the object 450 is detected.
- Gain circuit 470 may use any one of, or any combination of, the average intensity filter, frequency filter and a comparator together with any automatic gain controller circuit to control the detection of the light detector 420 .
- LED controller 410 may be any device, unit, component or a function for controlling, managing or driving LED 405 .
- LED controller 410 may include any hardware, software or any combination of hardware and software for controlling, driving or enabling emitting of light by one or more LED 405 .
- LED controller 410 may be a device, product or a system controlling, maintaining or enabling functionality or operation of LED 405 .
- LED controller 410 comprises a processing unit configured or comprising specific instructions for controlling, adjusting, maintaining or enabling functionality or operation of LED 405 , such as signal or light emitting.
- LED controller 410 comprises analog or digital circuitry for controlling, maintaining, adjusting or enabling functionality of LED 405 .
- LED controller 410 comprises switches, latches or transistor circuitry which switch LED 405 on or off.
- LED controller 410 comprises monitoring circuitry monitoring and observing performance or functionality of LED 405 .
- LED controller 410 comprises modulating circuitry, gain circuitry or circuitry for maintaining the detector within a specific gain range or detection range. Sometimes, LED controller 410 modulates, adjusts or changes state, status or performance of LED 405 in response to the monitored or observed performance or functionality of LED 405 .
- LED controller 410 may include gain circuitry, such as gain circuit 470 , adjustment of gain of the signal emitted by the LED and detected by the light detector 420 in order to maintain the light detector 420 within a specific detection range.
- the adjustment may be real-time adjustment.
- Gain circuit 470 may be comprised by any component of the non-contact switch 400 .
- a gain circuitry of the LED controller 410 may maintain the output at a specific threshold or within a specific range.
- the gain circuit 470 of the LED controller 410 may control the properties of the electromagnetic signal emitted by the LED 405 such that the light detector 420 is maintained slightly below a detection range threshold.
- the light detector 420 may be controlled such that the reflected signal reaching the detector is below the detectable threshold unless an object 450 is placed within a predetermined distance from the non-contact switch 400 .
- LED controller 410 may modulate current, voltage or power to LED 405 to maintain the light detector 420 within a specific threshold or operating range as desired by the configuration of distance within which the object 450 may be detected.
- gain circuitry may be adjusted so that object 450 is detected at a greater distance. In other embodiments, gain circuitry is adjusted so that the object 450 is detected at a distance very close to the non-contact switch 400 .
- LED controller 410 comprises functionality which scales up or scales down the gain of the LED 405 using a dial, a button or a setting.
- software operating on a processor of the LED controller 410 monitors and modulates the gain of the light emitted by one or more light sources of the LED 405 to maintain light detector 420 within a specific operating detection range.
- the gain circuitry of the LED controller 410 may be adjusted in response to background noise to compensate for increased or decreased background noise.
- LED controller 410 may modulate, control or adjust LED 405 operation such that LED 405 emits or generates light of a specific wavelength, power or intensity range as controlled by the LED controller 410 .
- LED controller 410 modulates, adjusts or controls LED 405 such that LED 405 emits one or more signals of a specific intensity controlled by LED controller 410 .
- LED controller 410 modulates, adjusts or controls LED 405 such that LED 405 emits light in pulses occurring at a specific frequency.
- LED controller 410 modulates LED 405 to emit light within the infra red wavelength range. In many embodiments, LED 405 emits light within infra-red wavelength range.
- LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than 100 nanometers. In many embodiments, LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than 50 nanometers. In some embodiments, LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than 10 nanometers. In a number of embodiments, LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of about 5 nanometers or less than 5 nanometers. In some embodiments, LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of about one or two nanometers of full width at half maximum of the signal. In a number of embodiments, LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than one nanometer.
- LED 405 may include a plurality of light sources, one of which acts as a light source emitting a background noise signal.
- a non-contact switch 400 comprises a plurality of LEDs 405 .
- a first one of the LEDs 405 may emit a pulsed signal designated to be the signal that the light detector 420 detects and interprets. This signal may be the signal to be reflected off of the object 450 and detected by the light detector 420 .
- the second one of the LEDs 405 may emit a constant low intensity signal, such as a synthetic background noise signal. Synthetic noise may be noise generated by LED 405 to suppress any background noise created by the environment.
- the synthetic noise signal may be in the general intensity or power range or in an intensity or power range that is larger than the intensity or power range of the background signal of the environment coming from outside of the non-contact switch 400 .
- the synthetic background noise or background noise signal produced by the second LED 405 may be any signal within a wavelength and power range detectable by the light detector 420 .
- any additional less intense background noise signals from the environment may be not as damaging to the communications of the LED 405 .
- a first LED 405 emits a high intensity signal via which the light switch enclosure 400 detects the presence of the object 450 .
- the second LED 405 of the same or a different light switch enclosure may emit a lower intensity signal than the signal emitted by the first LED 405 .
- the second LED 405 signal may have an intensity that is higher than a common or expected background noise from the environment.
- Both, the first and the second LEDs 405 may emit signals that are electromagnetic signals within a frequency, power or intensity range that is detected by the light detector 420 .
- the light detector 420 may detect both signals.
- the second LED 405 emitting a stronger signal in this wavelength range than the background noise, may in suppress the background noise.
- LED 405 comprises a Rohm or Sharp surface mount infrared emitting component, such as for example a Rohm palm device component emitting infrared light at pulses of around 40 kilohertz.
- Light detector 420 may be any device, component or a unit detecting or sensing any electromagnetic signal or wave.
- Light detector 420 may include or comprise any type and form of hardware, software or combination of software and hardware for sensing or detecting light or optical signal.
- light detector 420 senses light or an electromagnetic wave and produces a voltage or a current proportional to the intensity or the power of the light or the electromagnetic wave sensed.
- the light detector 420 may detect emission or radiation of any type and form, of any frequency and of any power or wavelength range.
- Light detector 420 includes a semiconductor detector, such as a silicon detector or a Gallium Arsenide detector.
- light detector 420 includes a diode, such as a photodiode.
- light detector 420 detects or senses heat or infra red radiation or signals. In other embodiments, light detector 420 includes a sensor for detecting light within a room that is illuminated by a lighting device 110 . In another embodiment, light detector 420 includes a sensor detecting ambient light. In other embodiments, light detector 420 includes a color sensor for sensing a color of light or a wavelength of light. In yet further embodiments, light detector 420 is a color temperature sensor for detecting color temperature of a light source. In still further embodiments, light detector 420 senses or detects chromaticity of light. In a number of embodiments, light detector 420 detects an electromagnetic signal within the frequency or wavelength range of the signal emitted by the LED 405 .
- light detector 420 may be tuned to collect any radiation having spectral or modulation characteristics of the signal emitted by LED 405 in order to detect if an object 450 is present.
- the object 450 may be detected by the detector 420 due to the object 450 reflecting the signal from the LED 405 to the light detector 420 .
- light detector 420 may detect the presence of an object 450 when object 450 is within a specific distance from the light detector 420 .
- light source 420 is a sound or acoustic wave sensor detecting sound or acoustic signals.
- light detector 420 detects RF or radio frequency signals.
- light source 420 detects any type, form or configuration of a signal that may be affected by presence of an object 450 within a perimeter of the light detector 420 .
- light detector 420 detects or senses near infra red signals, such as the signals emitted by a remote control.
- light detector 420 detects or senses wireless transmission signals, such as the signals of a wireless internet connection generally received by wireless network cards of computers and laptops.
- light detector 420 comprises any functionality of any other lighting system 100 component.
- Light detector 420 may be detecting modulation of the light oscillating at a carrier frequency.
- the carrier frequency may be any carrier frequency, such as a carrier frequency of about 40 kilohertz.
- light detector 420 comprises a Panasonic receiver, such PNA4602 receiver.
- Detector controller 425 may be any device controlling or managing operation or functionality of the light detector 420 . Detector controller 425 may be any device, unit or component processing or modifying the output signal of the light detector 420 . In some embodiments, detector controller 425 is a device, product or a system controlling, configuring or managing the light detector 420 . In other embodiments, detector controller 425 comprises hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for controlling, adjusting or maintaining functionality of one or more light detectors 420 . In some embodiments, detector controller 425 comprises analog or digital circuitry for controlling, maintaining, adjusting or enabling functionality of the light detector 420 . In further embodiments, detector controller 425 comprises switches, latches or transistor circuitry which controls or modulates light detector 420 .
- Detector controller 425 may comprise monitoring circuitry which uses a software running on a processor of the detector controller 425 to receive, process or modify the output signal of the light detector 420 .
- output signal of a light detector 420 may be sent to the detector controller 425 , which may use any functionality to determine if the received signal signifies the presence of an object 450 within a predetermined perimeter from the light detector 420 .
- light detector controller 425 may use the light detector 420 output signal to determine performance, operation or action of the lighting device 110 . For example, if a light detector 420 detects a signal affected by an object 450 , detector controller 425 may process the signal and determine that an object 450 is present.
- the detector controller 425 may in response to the determination that the object 450 is present sent a signal to the lighting device 110 or any other component of the lighting system 100 .
- the lighting device 110 may, in response to the signal from the detector controller 425 , start emitting light, stop emitting light or change the intensity, color or any other configuration of the light emitted.
- Detector controller 425 may receive and monitor current or voltage output signals from any number of light detectors 420 . In some embodiments, detector controller 425 receives current or voltage output signal from one or more light detectors 420 and converts the current or the voltage signal into a digital signal. Sometimes, detector controller 425 processes current or voltage output signal from one or more light detectors 420 . In various embodiments, detector controller 425 adjusts one or more functionalities or performance characteristics of one or more light detectors 420 in response to the received current or voltage output signal received. In a plurality of embodiments, detector controller 425 may form and transmit commands or instructions, such as instructions 650 , to any lighting device 110 . Detector controller 425 may send communication or receive communication from other lighting system 100 components, as desired or as necessary. In some embodiments, detector controller 425 includes any functionality of any other lighting system 100 component, such as the lighting device 110 .
- Object 450 may be any type and form of an object, such as a book, a chair, a door, a pen, a signal, a human being or any other living being.
- Object 450 may be an object capable of changing, modifying or affecting the signal detected by the light detector 420 .
- Object 450 may be a person or a part of a person, such as a person's hand.
- Object 450 may be a signal emitter emitting an electromagnetic signal, such as a remote controller, light emitter or a radio emitter.
- object 450 is a person that reflects a signal into the light detector 420 of the non-contact switch 400 by walking into a room that has a light non-contact switch 400 installed on a wall.
- LED 405 emits an electromagnetic signal which is reflected off of the person and detected by the light detector 420 .
- the light detector 420 may detect the presence of the person in the room and send the signal to the detector controller 425 which in turn may send an instruction to lighting devices 110 in the room to turn on and emit light.
- Object 450 may be a device or an apparatus emitting a signal.
- object 450 is an emitter such as a remote controller that emits an infra red signal detected by the non-contact switch 400 .
- the signal may be detected by the light detector 420 and the light from the lighting devices 110 may be turned on.
- object 450 may be any object, person or a device intercepting, reflecting or affecting the signal detected or sensed by the light detector 420 .
- Object 450 may be any object reflecting a portion of light emitted by LED 405 toward light detector 420 .
- object 450 emits an electromagnetic signal, heat, acoustic or sound signal, a wireless signal, radio signal or any type and form of signal that the light detector 420 detects.
- object 450 creates an interference or obstruction to an intensity, phase, frequency or amplitude of a signal detected by light detector 420 .
- Object 450 may create an obstruction or a lapse in the signal amplitude, phase, frequency or intensity, which may be detected by a light detector 420 .
- object 450 reflects a signal such that the light detector 420 detects the reflected signal in an increasing fashion as the object 450 approaches the light detector 420 .
- the components of the non-contact switch 400 may each include one or more gain circuits to adjust the amount of light from the LED 405 to be detected by the light detector 410 .
- a gain circuit of a LED 405 may adjust and control the output light of the LED 405 to maintain the light detector 420 within a specific operating range.
- the specific operating range may be a range of operation of the LED 405 or light detector 420 or both such that the light detector 410 detects the light from the LED 405 with a specific sensitivity.
- the gain circuit may cause the LED 405 to emit just enough light to enable the light detector 420 to barely detect portions of the light from the LED 405 reaching the light detector 410 .
- the portions of light may be the fraction of light reflected from a transparent or a semi-transparent portion of an enclosure of the non-contact switch 400 , such as a transparent cover.
- the transparent cover may include glass or a plexiglass portion that reflects the light towards detector 420 .
- the gain circuit may maintain the amount of light detected by the light detector 420 just below the threshold of the presence of the object 450 .
- the presence of the object 450 may then provide an additional amount of reflection reaching the light detector 420 , thus exceeding the threshold of detection. Once the threshold is exceeded the light detector 420 may send the signal that object 450 has been detected.
- a gain circuit of light detector 420 may adjust and control the detection settings of the light detector 420 to maintain the light detector 420 within a specific operating range.
- the gain circuit may cause the light detector 420 to detect light with a specific sensitivity or configuration to enable the light detector 420 to detect portions of the light from the LED 405 just below the detection threshold of the light detector 420 .
- the light detector 420 may detect absence of any object 450 from the perimeter of the non-contact switch 450 . In the instance that the object 450 approaches the non-contact switch 400 , the object 450 will detect an additional amount of the signal from the LED 405 back into the light detector 420 .
- the gain circuit maintaining the amount of light detected by the light detector 420 may experience a rising signal which will be too strong to be compensated for by the gain circuit quickly enough and the light detector 410 will detect the presence of the object 450 .
- gain circuits may be deployed in the led controller 410 or detector controller 425 in any orientation.
- the gain circuits may control the sensitivity of the light detector 420 or the gain circuits may control the intensity, power, pulse frequency, carrier frequency or even wavelength of the light emitted from LED 405 to enable and control the detection of the object 450 when present.
- Non-contact switch 400 may be used by any number of users to control, manage or configure a lighting system 100 as well as to communicate with one or more of lighting system 100 components. Sometimes, light non-contact switch 400 is configured to perform a set of tasks enabling user communication with a lighting system 100 . In some embodiments, non-contact switch 400 is configured or tuned to perform sensing of a user's presence. In many embodiments, non-contact switch 400 is configured or tuned to enable a user to control light intensity, light color, pulsing or other performance characteristics of light sources 110 . In many embodiments, non-contact switch 400 is configured or tuned to enable a user to select a group of light sources 110 and control them separately from other light sources 100 .
- non-contact switch 400 components are tuned and configured to operate based on frequency of pulses of signal at a specific predetermined frequency. In some embodiments, light non-contact switch 400 components are tuned and configured to emit and/or detect pulses of signal at a specific predetermined intensity. In still further embodiments, light non-contact switch 400 components are tuned and configured to emit and/or detect pulses of signal within a specific predetermined spectral range.
- non-contact switch 400 components may be tuned and configured to emit and/or detect the signal at a specific predetermined combination of frequency, intensity, wavelength or modulation.
- any feature of the signal such as the intensity, frequency, wavelength or format, may be interrupted and the interruption may be detected by the light detector 420 .
- LED controller 410 modulates LED 405 to emit or generate pulses or bursts of electromagnetic, acoustic or other wireless signal at a specific frequency and a specific intensity.
- Light detector 420 may be modulated by detector controller 425 to detect the signals emitted by the LED 405 at the frequency and intensity range emitted by the LED 405 .
- the detector controller 425 may modulate the light detector 420 by user configuration, frequency or resistance adjustment, programming of the detector controller 425 , setting up configuration inputs or any other user action or activity. Detector controller 425 may process the signals from the light detector 420 in accordance with configuration settings and alert other lighting system 100 components when the object 450 is in the vicinity. In some embodiments, signals emitted by LED 405 may be adjusted to include pulse frequency, signal intensity, signal wavelength and modulation format which are all within detectable range of the light detector 410 . The light detector 410 may continuously, periodically or randomly check for the signal presence. The signal being maintained by the gain circuit within a specific range just below a detectable threshold range of the light detector 410 may signify that the object 450 is not within the vicinity.
- Light detector 410 may then detect the presence of the object 450 .
- object 450 may interrupt or change the intensity, power, frequency, wavelength or modulation of the signal emitted from the LED 405 .
- Light detector 410 may detect such changes and interpret the detection as the presence of the object 450 .
- the threshold distance or distance range within which the non-contact switch 400 components detect the presence of object 450 may be configured by any configuration method.
- the user configures the threshold or distance range by setting the distance or relative position or direction of the non-contact switch 400 components, such as the LED 405 and light detector 420 .
- the threshold or distance range may be set by choosing a duration of pulse and the frequency of pulses emitted by LED 405 .
- the threshold or distance range may be set by selecting a spectral range of the light emitted by LED 405 , as well as the average intensity of the light emitted.
- lighting system 100 includes a configuration tool which enables the user to configure the vicinity range or threshold within which the object 450 is detected.
- the threshold or the range of the vicinity or distance within which the object 450 is detected is preset or preconfigured by the manufacturer. In further embodiments, the threshold range or the distance range of the vicinity may be adjusted by a button, setting, dial or an input on the light switch enclosure 400 or any other lighting system 100 component.
- the vicinity or range within which the object 450 is detected by the non-contact switch 400 may be as any range or threshold of distance. In some embodiments, the vicinity is any length between the object 450 and the non-contact switch 400 . In some embodiments, the vicinity is any distance or range of about 1, 2, 5, 10 or 15 centimeters. In further embodiments, the vicinity is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 millimeters. In further embodiments, vicinity is a distance of 15, 20, 20, 30, 40 or 50 centimeters. In other embodiments, vicinity is a range or a threshold of distance of between 50 centimeters and 1 meter. In further embodiments, vicinity is a range of between 1 and 10 meters.
- Vicinity may be configured by configuring or adjusting the output signal characteristics of the LED 405 and detectable range and performance of light detector 420 .
- vicinity may be altered by the user using configuration schemes, settings, programs or inputs for the light switch enclosure 400 or lighting system 100 .
- vicinity is a range or threshold of distance which is constant and predetermined for a specific non-contact switch 400 .
- vicinity is a range or threshold of distance which may vary depending on the configuration, user inputs and signals or instructions from other lighting system 100 components.
- Non-contact switch 400 may communicate to other lighting system 100 components by sending or receiving signals or instructions.
- LED 405 of a first light switch enclosure transmits communication to a second light switch enclosure 400 .
- the light detector 420 of the second light switch enclosure 400 may detect the signal emitted by the LED 405 of the first light switch enclosure 400 .
- the second light switch enclosure 400 may process or forward the instruction 650 to one or more lighting devices 110 .
- both the first and the second enclosures 650 are associated with one or more lighting devices 110 .
- a first light switch enclosure 400 transmits a transmission, such as an instruction 650 via LED 405
- the second light switch enclosure 400 may receive the transmission and forward it to the one or more lighting devices 110 associated with the second light switch enclosure 400 .
- the one or more lighting devices 110 may implement the instruction 650 or operate in accordance to the instructions received.
- a plurality of light switch enclosures 400 are configured to be in communication with one or more lighting devices 110 .
- the master lighting device 110 may transmit an instruction 650 to any number of the plurality of lighting devices 110 via it's own non-contact switch 400 .
- the signal, such as the instruction 650 may be transmitted wirelessly via the LED 405 and the plurality of light switch enclosures 400 may receive the instruction 650 and forward the instructions 650 to the lighting devices 110 to implement the instruction 650 .
- Non-contact switch 400 may further communicate with one or more light sources 110 .
- components of the non-contact switch 400 may be associated with one or more light sources 110 .
- a light source 110 may comprise components of the non-contact switch 400 , such as the LED 405 or the light detector 420 .
- Non-contact switches 400 may be used for assigning of unique digital addresses to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- a non-contact switch 400 is used to assign a unique digital address to a lighting device 110 that is connected to a switch 400 .
- a non-contact switch 400 is used to assign a unique digital address to a plurality of lighting devices 110 that are connected to or in communication with the light switch enclosure 400 .
- Assigning of the unique digital address may be done by sending an instruction or a command via connections 105 to all the lighting devices 110 connected.
- the instruction or the command may be any instruction 650 that indicates that a lighting device 110 will be assigned an unique digital address.
- the same or another instruction may be transmitted identifying a first unique digital address, or the first address 127 to all the lighting devices 110 .
- a user may place a hand, or any other object 450 , within the vicinity of a switch 400 associated with a particular lighting device 110 .
- the light detector 420 of the light switch enclosure 400 may detect the presence of the hand and send the signal to the lighting device 110 associated with the light switch enclosure 400 .
- the receipt of the signal by the lighting device 110 will indicate to the lighting device 110 that the user has identified that particular lighting device 110 as the lighting device 110 to be assigned the first address 127 .
- This particular lighting device 110 may then save the address 127 and use the address 127 for communicating with any other lighting devices 110 on the network of lighting devices 110 .
- the user may identify other lighting devices 110 and assign to them any particular unique digital addresses or addresses 127 .
- the user may also assign to a group of lighting devices 110 one address 127 , such that entire group will behave and act in accordance with instructions or commands transmitted along with that particular address 127 .
- Non-contact switch 400 may be used for assigning a master or slave status to any lighting device 110 .
- the user may select a master or slave status by placing a hand in the vicinity of the light switch enclosures 400 associated with particular lighting devices 110 .
- a component of a lighting system 100 may receive an instruction or a signal that the lighting system 110 is placed into an assignment mode.
- An assignment mode may be any mode of operation of the lighting system 100 wherein the lighting system 100 assigns an addresses 127 or a status, such as slave or master status, to one or more lighting system 100 components.
- an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of a lighting system 100 to assign an addresses 127 to any lighting system 100 component.
- an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of a lighting system 100 to assign an master or a slave status to any lighting system 100 component.
- an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of a lighting system 100 to assign any number of lighting devices to a group.
- Assignment mode may be a mode of operation or configuration in which the lighting system 100 allows the user to select via non-contact switch 400 associated with light sources 110 the light sources 110 will be assigned to specific statuses, specific groups or specific addresses 127 .
- the lighting system may send a group assigning instruction to each lighting device 110 .
- the user may select via non-contact switch 400 which of the lighting devices will be assigned to this particular group. Following the selection, the user may exit the assignment mode and each selected light source 110 may be saved into the group as selected.
- the user may assign addresses 127 or master and slave statuses to each of the lighting devices 110 .
- Assignment mode may include a software, a hardware or a combination of software and hardware for implementing tasks relating to assignment of addresses 127 for each of the lighting system 100 components.
- Assignment mode may include a means for transmitting or receiving messages from each of the lighting system 100 components who have received and accepted the addresses 127 . Assignment mode may further receive confirmation messages from the lighting devices 110 that were selected by the user via non-contact switch 400 .
- lighting system 100 components store the address 127 received from the master and transmit the confirmation messages to the master lighting device 110 .
- the master lighting device 110 may then be aware which lighting devices have accepted and saved the address 127 the user has selected.
- the master lighting device 127 may send any further communication of these devices using the addresses 127 assigned.
- the master lighting device 110 transmits one of a plurality of addresses 127 to each of the lighting system 100 components and waits for the lighting system 100 components to accept the address 127 transmitted.
- the lighting system 100 components may accept the address 127 upon receiving the signal from a non-contact switch 400 as selected by the user. Those lighting system 100 components selected by the user may return to the master lighting device 110 the confirmation messages indicating that these lighting system 100 component have accepted the addresses 127 .
- the master lighting device 110 may send out group assignment signals to the lighting devices 110 in the network.
- the lighting devices 110 may, upon receiving signals from the non-contact switch 400 that an object 450 was detected, send to the master lighting device the confirmation signals that the user has selected these lighting devices 110 to be in the same group.
- the group may be assigned a special group address 127 , or a group identifier. Such a group address or a group identifier may be used to control the group of lighting devices 110 selected by the user in the future.
- light source 110 A accepting address 127 A previously sent by the master receives a signal from a light switch enclosure that a user's presence, or an object 450 , was detected.
- the light source 110 A sends a confirmation message confirming that light source 110 A has accepted the address 127 .
- the master lighting device 110 in response to the received confirmation message, associates address 127 with the lighting system 100 component for any future communication.
- assignment mode entails the master receiving messages from one or more lighting system 100 components and assigning addresses 127 in response to the received messages.
- a non-contact switch 400 may be utilized with associated lighting system 100 components for assignment of addresses 127 .
- a master communicates with a plurality of lighting system 100 components which may or may not have a master status.
- One of the plurality of lighting system 100 components is a light source 110 A.
- lighting system 100 components send information to the master using non-contact switch 400 associated with lighting system 100 components.
- a master may be placed in an assignment mode and may be available to receive any information from any one or more of lighting system 100 components.
- a user may select a light source 110 A by placing an object 450 , such as a hand, in front of a non-contact switch 400 associated with the light source 110 A.
- Light detector 420 of the non-contact switch 400 in response to the placed object 450 , detects light emitted by LED 405 and non-contact switch 400 sends a signal indicating that the light source 110 A is selected.
- Light source 110 A transmits a signal to the master indicating the user's selection and the master assigns an address 127 , such as address 127 A, to light source 110 A.
- the master transmits information notifying light source 110 A of the new address 127 assigned to the light source 110 A.
- the light source 110 A uses the assigned address 127 to receive for communication with master or any other lighting system 100 component. In some embodiments, light source 110 A uses the assigned address 127 to recognize which information transmitted by any other lighting system 100 component is addressed to light source 110 A.
- the user may proceed to select any number of lighting system 100 components by placing an object 450 in front of a non-contact switch 400 associated of each selected lighting system 100 component.
- the master in response to user's selections via a non-contact switch 400 , may assign an address 127 to each of the user selected lighting 100 system components.
- the user may terminate the assignment mode and the master may store all the addresses 127 and lighting system 100 components associated with each of the addresses 127 .
- the lighting system 100 components may use addresses 127 assigned to transmit or receive information or communication among the lighting system 100 components assigned.
- similar methods may be used to create a group of lighting system 100 components, or a group of light sources 100 .
- a user may configure the group by selecting via non-contact switch 400 the light sources 110 that are the members of the group.
- non-contact switch 400 may be used to distinguish a group of light sources 110 from another group of light sources 110 .
- each of the groups selected may be controlled separately by the lighting system 100 .
- Each lighting system 100 component may store an addresses 127 of the group or a zone. As the commands or instructions are received for the light sources 110 of the specific group, the address 127 may be used as a key to address the members of the specific group to perform a certain function without affecting light sources 110 of other groups. Such addresses may also be referred to as group identifiers.
- Non-contact switch 400 may be used in any combination with any other lighting system 100 component to select, set up or configure any number of lighting system 100 components.
- an LED of a device emits a signal.
- a first portion of the signal reflects off of a transparent cover towards a detector of the device and a second portion of the signal propagates through the transparent cover.
- a gain circuit maintains a predetermined operation of the detector.
- the detector determines that a reflected first portion of the signal is below a threshold of the detector.
- the second portion of the signal reflects off of an object outside of the device towards the detector of the device.
- the device determines that the object is present responsive to the detector determining that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector.
- a LED of a device emits a signal.
- the signal emitted may be any signal, such has an electromagnetic signal.
- the signal is an infrared signal or a radio signal.
- the signal is a modulated signal comprising a carrier frequency between 20 and 60 kilohertz, such as 40 kilohertz for example.
- the carrier frequency may be a frequency of pulses of bursts of light emitted by the LED.
- the signal may further be amplitude, frequency, phase or pulse width modulated.
- the signal may further be modulated in any additional way.
- the signal comprises high components of the signal and low components of the signal.
- high components of the signal correspond to pulses of light emitted from the LED.
- low components of the signal correspond to durations of time when there are no pulses of the signal.
- low components of the signal correspond to durations of time where LED emits light having a lower intensity than the intensity of light emitted during the emission of high components of the signal.
- the high components of the signal may comprise or correspond to portions of the signal comprising voltage, current, power or intensity that is higher or larger than the voltage, current, power or intensity of the portions of the signal that are comprised by, or correspond to, the low components.
- the signal may comprise portions of the signal comprising any number of pulses such as 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90 or 100 pulses for example. In some embodiments, the portions of the signal comprise more than 100 pulses, such as 200, 500 or 1000 pulses. Each pulse may be a part of a period comprising high and low components. In some embodiments, a pulse may comprise any number of periods comprising high and low components. In further embodiments, a pulse comprises a high component and a duration of signal not having a pulse comprises a low component. The signal may be emitted within any conical angle from the LED, such as 180 degrees, for example. The signal may be emitted from within an enclosure of the device. The signal may comprise any type and form of communication comprising instructions, commands or data. The signal may comprise communication for any component of the lighting system 100 , such as for example a lighting device 100 or another non-contact switch 400 .
- a transparent cover of the device reflects a first portion of the signal and allows a second portion of the signal to propagate through or transmit through the transparent cover.
- the first portion is emitted by a first light source of the LED 405 and the second portion is emitted by a second light source of the LED 405 .
- the first and the second portions are emitted by the same light source of the LED 405 .
- the first and second portions of the signal are emitted by different light sources of the LED 405 .
- some portions of the first or second portions of the signal are emitted by multiple light sources of the LED 405 , which may be same or different light sources.
- the signal may be reflected from components, such as enclosure of the device, led controller 410 , power supply 140 , light detector 420 , detector controller 425 , connections 105 or any other component of the non-contact switch 400 .
- a first portion of the signal is reflected off of the transparent cover 460 .
- a portion of the first portion of the signal may be reflected towards a light detector, such as the light detector 420 .
- the second portion of the signal propagates through the transparent cover and exit the non-contact switch 400 .
- the transparent cover may reflect a percentage of the signal, such as 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 percent and propagate the remainder of the signal.
- a gain circuit maintains, monitors, controls or adjusts operation of the detector.
- Gain circuit may be gain circuit 470 .
- the detector may be light detector 420 .
- Gain circuit may maintain operation of the detector to ensure that the detector operates within a predetermined sensitivity range.
- predetermined sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the detector that is below the threshold for detecting a presence of an object 450 .
- specific sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the light detected that is above the detection threshold for detecting a presence of an object 450 .
- specific sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the light detected that includes a detection threshold for detecting a presence of an object 450 .
- specific sensitivity range may be an intensity or power range of the detector that is below the detection threshold for detecting of the presence of the object 450 .
- Gain circuit may maintain operation of the detector a specific percentage of the detection threshold intensity or power for detecting the presence of the object 450 .
- gain circuit maintains operation of the detector between below the detection threshold for detecting the object 450 by a predetermined percentage of the threshold. The predetermined percentage of the threshold may be any percentage of the intensity or power of light detected to meet or exceed the threshold for detecting of the object 450 .
- the predetermined percentage of the threshold may be between 0 and 5 percent, 5 and 10 percent, 10 and 20 percent, 20 and 30, 30 and 40 percent, 40 and 50, 50 and 60 percent, 60 and 70 percent, 70 and 80 percent, 80 and 90 percent, 90 and 95 percent, or 95 and 100 percent of the detection threshold.
- the gain circuit determines that the signal or a portion of the signal detected by the detector is below the specific sensitivity range.
- the portion of the signal may be a duration of any number of pulses, such as between 1 and 10 pulses, 10 and 20 pulses, 20 and 30 pulses, 30 and 40 pulses, 40 and 50 pulses, 50 and 60 pulses, 60 and 80 pulses, 80 and 100 pulses, 100 and 200 pulses, 200 and 2000 pulses or any other number of pulses.
- the gain circuit determines that a portion of the signal comprising any number of high components and low components is below the specific sensitivity range. The gain circuit may adjust or increase the gain to ensure that the detector detects the portion of the signal within the specific sensitivity range or within a specific percentage range of the detection threshold.
- the gain circuit may determine that a portion of the signal comprising any number of high components and low components is above the specific sensitivity range.
- the gain circuit may adjust or decrease the gain to ensure that the detector detects the portion of the signal within the specific sensitivity range or within a specific percentage range of the detection threshold.
- Adjustment of gain may be done by varying pulse width of the signal.
- adjustment of gain is implemented by increasing or decreasing a duration high components of each pulse.
- adjustment is implemented by increasing or decreasing a duration of low components of each pulse.
- Adjustment of gain may be done at a specific rate to allow the gain not to be adjusted fast enough in embodiments when object 450 approaches the device.
- the object 450 may cause the portion of the signal detected to exceed the detection threshold of the detector faster than the gain circuit would adjust the gain of the signal.
- the detector determines that a reflected first portion of the signal is below a threshold of the detector.
- the threshold of the detector may be a sufficient the power or intensity of signal detected by the detector to recognize the presence of the object 450 .
- the reflected first portion of the signal includes the portion of the signal reflected by the transparent cover 460 .
- the reflected portion of the signal includes the portions of the signal reflected by any segment or component of the non-contact switch 400 .
- detector determines that the total signal reaching the detector is below the threshold, in response to actions, adjustments or maintaining of performance performed by the gain circuit.
- the second portion of the signal reflects off of an object outside of the device.
- the second portion of the signal may comprise a portion of the signal that has propagated through the transparent cover.
- the second portion of the signal may comprise a portion of the signal that has propagated through the transparent cover and has reflected off of an object, such as an object 450 .
- the second portion of the signal or a portion of the second portion of the signal reflects towards detector, such as the light detector 420 .
- the second portion of the signal or a portion of the second portion of the signal reflects off the object and through the transparent cover towards the detector.
- the object may be a portion of a body of a person, such as a user, or any embodiment of the object 450 .
- the device determines that the object is present responsive to the detector determining that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. In some embodiments, the detector determines that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. In some embodiments, the detector receives the reflected second portion of the signal reflected off of the object 450 in addition to the received first portion of the signal. The detector may detect the sum of the reflected first and second portions of the signal. In some embodiments, the detector detects average intensity or power of the reflected first and second portions of the signal. In further embodiments, the detector determines that the sum of the received first and second portions of the signal exceeds the threshold intensity or power needed for the detector to recognize the presence of the object 450 .
- the device determines that the object is present responsive to the determination of the detector that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the intensity or power threshold of the detector needed to detect the presence of the object. In still further embodiments, the determination that the object is present is responsive to the actions or adjustments by the gain circuit. In still further embodiments, the determination that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold is further based on the average intensity of the plurality of pulses of the reflected first and second portions of signal exceeding the threshold established by the gain circuit.
- FIG. 6A depicts lighting devices 110 A and 110 B exchanging communication signals via a connection 105 .
- Lighting device 110 A comprises controller 120 A, master/slave addressor 130 A and a communicator 125 A that further includes address 127 A and detector 605 A.
- Lighting device 110 B includes a controller 110 B that comprises communicator 125 B, address 127 B and master/slave addressor 123 B.
- the signals or communication transmitted between the lighting devices 110 A and 110 B include data 210 , data bits 215 and instruction bits 220 that are divided into time intervals or periods 205 .
- Data 210 , data bits 215 and instruction bits 220 within each period 205 define a duty cycle of each period 205 .
- the duty cycle of each period 205 may further define or identify power 655 or intensity 658 for the lighting devices 110 .
- Data 210 , data bits 215 and instruction bits 220 of the signals may form instructions 650 for assigning master or slave status to the lighting devices 110 .
- the instructions 650 in addition to providing instructions for assigning status, such as a master or slave status, may also be included within the duty cycle that may also provide power 655 and/or intensity 658 for the lighting device 110 .
- FIG. 6A illustrates a detector 605 that receives, detects and identifies instructions 650 .
- Detector 605 may include any type and form of hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software.
- Detector 605 may include any type and form of a device, a unit, a structure, an apparatus, a function, an algorithm, a script, an executable file, a software application or a software program that operates on a computing device such as a lighting device with a processor.
- detector 605 includes any type and form of a function, application, device, unit or a structure for receiving, detecting, identifying, managing or manipulating instructions 650 .
- Detector 605 may comprise any unit, function or a component for identifying or recognizing instructions 650 from any type and form of data 210 , such as data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 .
- detector 605 includes any type and form of a policy or a policy engine.
- detector 605 includes a rule or a rule engine. The policy or policy engine or the rule or the rule engine may determine or identify actions to be taken in response to the instructions 650 .
- detector 605 includes a parser that parses incoming data 210 , data bits 215 and instruction bits 220 . The parsed data may be used by any component of the lighting device 110 to implement or execute actions as defined by the received instructions 650 .
- the parsed data is used to operate the lighting device 110 as identified by the power 655 or intensity 658 .
- detector 605 determines the duty cycle within each of the time interval or period 205 . In still further embodiments, detector 605 determines the starting or ending point of each of the time intervals or periods 205 .
- Power 650 may be any rate of delivery of electrical energy to a lighting device 110 .
- power 650 is a product of voltage and current delivered to a lighting device 110 .
- the power 650 may be delivered to the lighting device 110 from another lighting device 110 , from a power supply 140 or from any power outlet or plug.
- power 650 is defined by the duty cycle of a signal or communication received by the lighting device 110 via connection 105 .
- power 650 within a period 205 is defined by a ratio of a duration of a period 205 for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire duration of the period 205 .
- power 650 within a period 205 is defined by an average voltage, current or power value of the signal within the period 205 .
- power 650 may be defined by a signal that comprises a plurality of periods 205 .
- the lighting device 110 may emit light or otherwise operate in accordance with power 650 .
- the power 650 may change from period 205 to period 205 .
- the power 650 may remain unchanged over any number of consecutive periods 205 , regardless if some periods 205 comprise one or more instructions 650 .
- Intensity 658 may be any amount of electromagnetic radiation emitted or emanated or to be emitted or emanated from the lighting device 110 .
- intensity 658 identifies an amount of photons of light emitted from the lighting device 110 .
- intensity 658 is an amount of light emitted by lighting device 110 per a predetermined amount of time.
- intensity 658 is defined by the duty cycle of a signal or communication received by the lighting device 110 via connection 105 .
- intensity 658 within a period 205 is defined by a ratio of a duration of a period 205 for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire duration of the period 205 .
- intensity 658 within a period 205 is defined by an average voltage, current or power value of the signal within the period 205 .
- intensity 658 may be defined by a signal that comprises a plurality of periods 205 .
- the lighting device 110 may emit light or otherwise operate in accordance with intensity 658 .
- the intensity 658 may change from period 205 to period 205 .
- intensity 658 may remain unchanged over any number of consecutive periods 205 , regardless if some periods 205 comprise one or more instructions 650 .
- Instructions 650 may include any type and form of commands, instructions, or configurations, such as for assigning a status to a lighting device 110 .
- Instructions 650 may include data 210 , data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 .
- instructions 650 includes any combination of data 220 , data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 .
- instructions 650 include any type and form or commands and instructions for assigning a status of a master or a slave to a lighting device 110 . The status of a master may enable the lighting device 110 to send out instructions or commands to one or more lighting devices on a network.
- the status of a master may further enable the lighting device to control, manage or modify operation, functionality or output of other lighting devices 110 connected to the lighting devices 110 via the connection 105 .
- the status of a slave may enable the lighting device 110 to receive instructions and commands from a lighting device 110 that is assigned a status of the master.
- the status of a slave may enable the lighting device to be controlled, managed or have its operation, functionality or output modified by the lighting device that is assigned a status of the master.
- the lighting device 110 assigned the status of a slave may be modified, commanded, operated or have its operation or functionality controlled or modified by the lighting device 110 having the status of the master by receiving instructions 650 via the connection 105 .
- instructions 650 include messages used to diagnose problems of lighting devices 110 .
- Instructions 650 may include requests and responses to the requests and may be sent by master or slave lighting devices 650 , such as:
- LC_ACK_ON_ALERTS sending an acknowledgement to check for an error, such as humidity, temperature or voltage error;
- LC_CLEAR_ALERTS clearing alert flags from the lighting device 110 ;
- LC_SET_ALERT_HISTORY setting alert flag if permanent history exists.
- LC_DRIVE_LED_ALERT setting an alert light or alert LED if an alert is set
- LC_DRIVE_LED_ADDRESS setting alert light to on when a match between an address 127 of a previously received instruction 650 and an address 127 of the lighting device 110 is detected
- LC_NO_DRIVE_LED to set alert light to off
- LC_ACK_ON_AMBIENT sending an acknowledgement if ambient light detector is active
- LC_ACK_ON_PIR sending an acknowledgement if an object 450 is detected on a light switch enclosure.
- instructions 650 include messages that include commands for controlling or managing of the lighting devices 110 .
- Instructions 650 may include dimming or brightness level instructions, color settings, flashing instructions, timing instructions, or any other control instructions, such as:
- Such external signal control may be cancelled with LC_SET_DIM instruction; LC_SELECT_LED1 selecting a lighting device 110 a of the plurality of lighting devices 110 ; LC_SELECT_LED2 selecting a lighting device 110 b of the plurality of lighting devices 110 ; LC_SELECT_LED3 selecting a lighting device 110 c of the plurality of lighting devices 110 ; LC_LATCH_FADE_SPEED using a previously sent value to set speed of fading light between 0% and 100%; LC_LATCH_MAX_LEVEL using a previously sent value as maximum dim or intensity, brightness level; LC_LATCH_SMOOTH_TIME using a previously sent value as dim number last sent as DIM transition time for “smooth DIM” LC_LATCH_ON_TIME using a value sent as a time interval during which the lighting device 110 will be turned on during the strobe or flashing effect; LC_LATCH_OFF_TIME using a value sent as a time interval during which the lighting device 110
- instructions 650 include messages that set or check addresses of the lighting devices 110 .
- Instructions 650 may include any requests for address matches, setting of addresses, such as:
- LC_ACK_ADDRESS requesting response from specific address.
- the address may include a number between 1 and 511. This instruction may send 0 to clear the addresses; LC_ENTER_LEARN_MODE turning on the learn mode or the addressing assignment mode and allowing the lighting devices 110 to learn set addresses, be assigned addresses or modify addresses; LC_CANCEL_LEARN_MODE ignoring learn mode and not saving the modified addresses; LC_EXIT_LEARN_MODE turning off the learn mode or the addressing assignment mode; LC_ACK_ZONE_MATCH sending acknowledgement if a one-wire zone or group of lighting devices 110 was recognized; LC_FLASH_ZONE_ID flashing a zone identifier; LC_RESET_ZONE setting the zone to default, such as value of 0 for example.
- instructions 650 include messages that activate or deactivate light switch enclosure detection of an object 450 , such as:
- instructions 650 include messages that set or check for master or slave statuses of the lighting devices 110 . Instructions 650 may assign or verify master and slave statuses of the lighting devices using any number of commands, such as:
- LC_ACK_MASTER sending a global request to all the lighting devices 110 to acknowledge a master status of a lighting device 110 .
- LC_ACK_GRANT_MASTER granting or assigning a master status to a lighting device 110 previously having a slave status;
- LC_ACK_DECODE_ERR sending an acknowledgement response stating that the instruction 650 to acknowledge a master status was not recognized;
- LC_CHECK_FOR_SLAVE sending a request to set a status of a lighting device 110 to slave status;
- LC_ACK_REQ_SHORT sending a default request to set a hardware to clear.
- instructions 650 include messages that configure options, such as clock and timing of the lighting devices. Such instructions may grant or assign generic status or be used for control of communications, such as:
- LC_POWER_ON_FULL powering on the lighting devices 110 to full 100% brightness or intensity
- LC_POWER_ON_LAST remembering a previous setting for next power-on LC_SET_NUMBER setting current value to be used for intensity, addresses, status, commands or communication to any value between 0 and 1023.
- LC_LATCH_COUNT using a value previously sent as count for upload/download bytes in packet, time setting
- LC_LATCH_CLOCK_TIME using a value previously sent for a time and date, such as years/days/hours/seconds of time
- LC_SET_ACTION using a value previously sent to assign the date and time of the event
- LC_RESET_HARDWARE resetting hardware of the lighting devices 110
- LC_RAW_DATA sending raw data, such as higher-level protocol for extended commands
- LC_REQUEST_STATUS asking for configuration string.
- Instructions 650 may include status responses for lighting devices 110 such as, 12′′ V-Line “Gen2.1”, 18′′ V-Line “Gen-2.1”, Touch V1, Aperion V2, TriLight V3, Lightlink 105 V3, LightLink 101 V3, Super LightLink, or any other lighting device 110 .
- the instructions 650 may further include current software version or revision.
- instructions 650 include software interfaces used for communication, such as the line, DMX communication interface, differential serial communication line or a wireless connection.
- Instructions 650 may further include hardware features installed, such as InfraRed, or IR detect present, light switch enclosure 400 or PIR detect present, ambient light sensor present, fire sensor present, DMZ interface present or wireless radio present.
- Instructions 650 may further include input selections, such as: 0 to 10 volt input, 10 volt current source, MOM switch, DMX address, PWM signal input, inverted PWM signal input, preset switch input, IR touch or IR command line. Instructions 650 may further include a time, such as current time of day, total on duration of time, lighting device 110 on running time, and event timers. Instructions 650 may include humidity, temperature and voltage error readings, such as: humidity reading, minimum lifetime humidity reading with time stamp, maximum lifetime humidity reading with time stamp, temperature reading, minimum lifetime temperature reading with time stamp, maximum lifetime temperature reading with time stamp and over voltage detection with time stamp. Sometimes, instructions 650 may further include current status of sensors, such as: IR detect, PIR detect, PIR person detector tripped since last request, current state of ambient light sensor, and current state of the fire or smoke sensor.
- input selections such as: 0 to 10 volt input, 10 volt current source, MOM switch, DMX address, PWM signal input, inverted P
- Connection 105 which may also be referred to as the line, may be any medium through which signals, communications, instructions, power and intensity are transmitted.
- the line is a I2Systems LightlinkTM of I2Systems Inc.
- the line is I2Systems or I2System Lightlink Control Bus, also referred to as LLCB by I2Systems Inc.
- the line may comprise a single active wire connection between two or more lighting devices 110 and a single ground return wire. Two or more lighting devices 110 may be connected via the line in parallel connection, in series connection or in any combination of parallel and series connections.
- the lighting devices are connected in a parallel connection pattern in which the communication receiving pins of the lighting devices 110 are connected to the active wire of the line and ground pins of the lighting devices 110 are connected to the ground wire of the line.
- the line includes a medium for controlling lighting devices 110 via a lighting dimmer scheme, such as a DMX-512 protocol for a DMX connection.
- the line includes a RS-232 connection, a wireless connection or an Ethernet connection.
- the line is any medium supporting or handling any 8/16 bit digital communication.
- a master lighting device 110 a communicates with a plurality of slave lighting devices 110 via the line.
- the line may include an active wire via which the communications are transmitted, and a ground return wire.
- Communications transmitted may include signals, instructions, request and response messages, power or intensity modulating signals, commands, configurations, settings, read-backs or any other type and form of transmissions
- the communications may be digital transmissions of any voltage or current characteristics or range.
- digital pulse width modulated (PWM) signals based on a 5 volt digital logic are transmitted via the line.
- the PWM signals may use a 5 volt signal to indicate a high state, while a 0 volt transmission may indicate a low state.
- a threshold distinguishing between the high and the low levels may be any value between 0 and 5 volts, such as 2.5 volts for example.
- the signal in addition to only two levels, a high level and a low level, may further include additional levels, such as a third level, a fourth level, a fifth level, and so on.
- the line may transmit communication using a half-duplex channel allowing a single lighting device 110 a to send a communication at one time.
- the lighting devices 110 receiving the communication may send acknowledgement transmissions in response to the received communication.
- the acknowledgement may include a response that a received instruction 650 was implemented or an indication that the received communication was acknowledged.
- acknowledgements include a response that an error occurred or that that the received instruction 650 was not acknowledged.
- the master lighting device 110 a may send an instruction 650 to set a first slave lighting device 110 b as a master lighting device.
- the master lighting device 110 a may receive acknowledgements from each of the lighting devices 110 .
- the first slave lighting device 110 b may be assigned a master status and all the remaining lighting devices 110 , including the master lighting device 110 a , may be assigned a slave status.
- the first slave lighting device 110 b is from that point on recognized as the master and may send any instructions 650 or commands to any of the lighting devices 110 .
- the group of lighting devices 110 in this embodiment only have a single master lighting device 110 at a given time.
- Instructions and acknowledgements transmitted between the lighting devices 110 may be sent via the line using any communication, such as DMX communication that uses DMX-512 protocol.
- the DMX communication may be used or modified to enable two-way communication between lighting devices 110 by using RS-232 connections to listen for incoming communication, such as instructions or acknowledgements.
- Instructions or commands may be of any bit length, such as 2 bits, 4 bits, 8 bits, 16 bits or 32 bits.
- instructions include a command of 4 bits, 8 bits of data and 4 bit checksum.
- an additional instruction may be used to check for activity over the line.
- the rate of the communication transmitted via the line may vary.
- communication is transmitted via the line at a rate of 250 cps.
- communication transmitted may be at speed of 500 cps or clocks per second, 1000 cps, 4000 cps, 16000 cps or any other rate.
- a first lighting device receives via a line a signal comprising an instruction within a first duty cycle.
- a detector of the first lighting device detects the instruction.
- a master/slave addressor assigns a status identified by the instruction to the first lighting device.
- the first lighting device emits light identified by the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device receives via the line a second signal comprising a second duty cycle.
- the detector detects that the second signal comprises no instruction and the first lighting device emits light identified by the second duty cycle.
- a first lighting device receives via a line a signal comprising an instruction within a first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device may receive the signal via any line, such as a connection 105 for example.
- the signal is transmitted to the first lighting device via a conducting wire.
- the first lighting device receives the signal via a wireless link.
- the first lighting device receives the signal in the form of an electromagnetic wireless transmission that can be of any bandwidth or spectral range.
- the first lighting device receives the signal via an optical fiber or via any type and form of a waveguide.
- the signal received may include any type and form of a communication or a transmission, such as digital, analog, optical, wireless, electromagnetic or electrical signal or transmission.
- the signal may be divided into any number of periods 205 .
- the signal is of a duration of a single period 205 .
- the signal is of a duration of a plurality of periods 205 .
- the signal may include any number of instructions, such as the instructions 650 .
- the instruction includes an instruction 650 to set or establish a status of the first lighting device.
- the instruction includes an instruction or a command to set or establish a master status to the first lighting device.
- the instruction includes an instruction or a command to establish a slave status to the first lighting device.
- the instruction includes an instruction or a command to set or establish an intermediary status to the first lighting device.
- the intermediary status may be a status different from the master status or the slave status.
- the intermediary status may enable the first lighting device to act or operate as a master to a first number of lighting devices and to act or operate as a slave to a second number of lighting devices.
- the first number of lighting devices and the second number of lighting devices may be connected to the first lighting device via the same line, such as a connection 105 .
- the instructions comprised by the signal may be included within the first duty cycle of the signal.
- the first duty cycle may be a duty cycle of a first period 205 of a plurality of periods 205 of the signal.
- the first duty cycle may be any fraction or a ratio of a duration of a period 205 for which the signal includes a high voltage value over the total duration of the period 205 .
- first duty cycle is a fraction or a ratio of a duration of a period 205 for which the signal includes a high current value over the total duration of the period 205 .
- first duty cycle is a fraction or a ratio of a duration of a period 205 for which the signal includes a high power value over the total duration of the period 205 .
- duty cycle includes an average value of the signal averaged over the period 205 .
- the total duration of the period 205 may include portions of the signal having any number of values.
- any component of the first lighting device detects the instruction.
- the instruction may be any instruction 650 .
- detector 605 detects the instruction 650 .
- communicator 125 detects the instruction 650 .
- controller 120 detects the instruction 650 .
- master/slave addressor 130 detects the instruction 650 .
- the first lighting device may detect the instruction using any type and form of a detecting mechanism, apparatus, application or a device.
- the first lighting device detects the instruction 650 using a detector that monitors the receiving signal detects the instruction 650 within the signal.
- the first lighting device monitors the incoming signal for a specific signal profile in order to detect the instruction.
- the lighting device 110 may detect the instruction 650 by matching an address or an identifier comprised by the incoming instruction 650 to address 127 stored on the lighting device 110 .
- the address or the identifier of the instruction 650 may include any set of characters, numbers, symbols, data 210 , data bits 215 or instruction bits 220 .
- the address or the identifier of the instruction 650 includes a set of data bits 215 , characters, numbers or symbols that that match data bits 215 , characters, numbers or symbols of the address 127 stored on the lighting device 110 .
- the first lighting device may detect the instruction 650 by parsing the received instruction into components, one of which may be an address comprised by the instruction 650 .
- the address or the identifier of the parsed instruction 650 may be matched to the address 127 of the first lighting device by the detector 605 .
- detector 605 matches the address or the identifier of the instruction 650 to the address 127 of the lighting device using any type and form of a logic comparator, a policy or a rule.
- the lighting device uses a policy engine to match an address or the identifier of the instruction 650 to the address 127 of the lighting device.
- the lighting device uses a rule engine to match an address or the identifier of the instruction 650 to the address 127 of the lighting device.
- the lighting device 110 uses any combination of a comparator, a logic component a parser, a rule engine, a policy engine or any other matching or detecting unit to detect the instruction 650 .
- Detector 605 may further identify the type of instruction, such as an instruction 650 to assign a master status, a slave status or any other type of status to the first lighting device 110 .
- the first lighting device 110 identifies the instruction to assign a master status to the first lighting device.
- the first lighting device identifies the instruction to assign a slave status to the first lighting device.
- the first lighting device identifies the instruction to assign any other status, such as an intermediary status, to the first lighting device.
- a component of the first lighting device assigns a status to the first lighting device.
- the status may be assigned to the first lighting device 110 in response to the identification of the received instruction 650 by the detector 605 .
- the status may be assigned to the first lighting device 110 in response to the matching of the address or the identifier of the instruction 650 .
- master/slave addressor 130 of the first lighting device assigns the status to the first lighting device 110 .
- any component of the lighting device 110 assigns the status to the first lighting device 110 .
- the status assigned to the first lighting device 110 is identified by the instruction 650 received by the first lighting device 110 .
- the status may be assigned in response to the detection of the instruction 650 .
- the status is assigned in response to the matching of the address or the identifier of the instruction 650 with the address 127 of the first lighting device 110 .
- master/slave addressor 130 modifies or edits configuration of the first lighting device 110 in accordance with the status identified by the instruction 650 .
- Master/slave addressor 130 may edit or modify settings or configuration of the first lighting device 110 to a specific configuration of the status identified by the instruction 650 .
- master/slave addressor 130 edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device to the master configuration in response to the detection 650 of the instruction to set the first lighting device 110 to the status of the master.
- master/slave addressor 130 edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device 110 to the slave configuration in response to the detection of the instruction 650 to set the first lighting device 110 to the status of a slave.
- master/slave addressor 130 edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device to the intermediary configuration in response to the detection of the instruction to set the first lighting device to the intermediary status.
- Modified configuration in response to the detection of the instruction 650 to set up or assign a master status to the first lighting device 110 may change operation of the first lighting device 110 to control or manage other lighting devices connected via the line.
- modified configuration in response to the detection of the instruction 650 to assign or set up a slave status to the first lighting device 110 changes or modifies the operation of the first lighting device 110 to be controlled or managed by another lighting device 110 that is connected via the line, or the connection 105 , to the first lighting device 110 .
- the first lighting device emits light identified by the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device 110 may emit the light having the intensity 650 or the power 655 as defined by the first duty cycle or as defined by the signal within the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device emits light that has intensity 658 that is identified by the first duty cycle.
- first lighting device emits light that has intensity 658 that is identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles, such as the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device emits light that has intensity 658 that is proportional to the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device emits light that has intensity 658 that is proportional to the maximum intensity of light emitted by the first lighting device multiplied by the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device emits light that has power 655 identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that has power 655 identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power 655 that is proportional to the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power 655 that is proportional to the maximum power used by the first lighting device multiplied by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, the first lighting device 110 emits light that has pulse or intensity variation that is defined or identified by the first duty cycle or by a plurality of duty cycles such as the first duty cycle.
- the first lighting device receives via the line a second signal comprising a second duty cycle.
- the second signal may be divided into any number of periods 205 .
- the second signal is of a duration of a single period 205 .
- the second signal is of a duration of a plurality of consecutive periods 205 .
- the first lighting device may receive via the line a second signal comprising any functionality or any feature of the signal received by the first lighting device in step 605 .
- the second signal comprises a second duty cycle that is same as the first duty cycle or substantially similar to the first duty cycle.
- the second duty cycle is different from the first duty cycle.
- the second duty cycle may include any embodiments and any functionality of any duty cycle.
- the second duty cycle may not include any instructions 650 but may still define or identify the same power 655 or the same intensity 658 as defined by the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the second duty cycle does not include any instructions 650 but still identifies or defines power 655 that is the same or substantially similar as the power 655 defined or identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, the second duty cycle does not include any instructions 650 but still identifies or defines power 655 that is the same or substantially similar as the power 655 defined or identified by the first duty cycle.
- first lighting device detects that the second signal comprises no instructions and emits light identified by the second duty cycle.
- detector 605 detects no instructions 650 within the second signal.
- the first lighting device may emit light identified by the second duty cycle.
- the first lighting device 110 may emit the light as identified by the second duty cycle regardless of the presence or absence of the instruction 650 from the signal within the second duty cycle.
- the first lighting device 110 may emit the light having the intensity 650 or the power 655 as defined by the second duty cycle or as defined by the signal within the second duty cycle.
- the first lighting device emits light that has intensity 658 that is proportional to the second duty cycle.
- the first lighting device emits light that has intensity 658 that is proportional to the maximum intensity of light emitted by the first lighting device multiplied by the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power 655 identified by the second duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that has power 655 identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power 655 that is proportional to the second duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that has power 655 that is proportional to the maximum power used by the first lighting device multiplied by the second duty cycle. In further embodiments, the first lighting device 110 emits light that has pulse or intensity variation that is defined or identified by the second duty cycle or by a plurality of duty cycles such as the second duty cycle.
- a solar based LED assembly unit which may also be referred to as a solar assembly unit or a system is described.
- the solar assembly unit or system may be a part number 8120193-2-F and/or 8120193-2C manufactured and/or supplied by I2Systems, Inc. of Morris, Conn.
- the solar based LED system may include a mode of independent operation. In some embodiments, no wires or “pattern” programming required for entering light timing patterns for the system.
- the system may automatically perform the operations and functions described herein without any user interaction, programming or wiring.
- the system may be active 24 hours per day and may continuously measure voltage to determine the time of day. In other embodiments, the system may be active for a predetermined amount of time during the day on any basis, such as for a certain percentage on predetermined amount of time of each hour.
- the system monitors the voltage produced by the solar cells to determine the amount of light to be outputted from the LEDs. In one embodiment, the system continuously monitors the voltage produced by the solar cells. In other embodiments, the system monitors the voltage produced by the solar cells at a predetermined frequency or time period.
- the solar based LED system may include a long LED run time.
- the system or assembly provides efficient switching power regulation to the LED. This may lead to longer LED run time or extension of battery life.
- the solar based LED system may further include an assembly or system comprising an intelligent controller, which may further comprise software, hardware or any combination of software and hardware.
- the intelligent controller maintains a predetermined charge level on the battery to extend its life. In one embodiment, the intelligent controller maintain the charge level at high level to extend battery life even in cold weather.
- the solar based LED system may also include a sleep mode.
- the assembly or system is designed and constructed to provide a predetermined power consumption, such as a very Low Power Consumption, when LED is Not Powered On or otherwise when the LED is not operating or emitting light.
- the solar based LED system also referred to as the system, may include a large battery.
- the assembly or system comprises a battery of a size, capacity or capability to enables running for a predetermined amount of days without sun or a predetermined amount of days that are cloudy, or any combination of no sun or cloudy days.
- the battery is of a size, capacity or capability to run the assembly or system for a predetermined amount of days based on a predetermined amount of exposure to sun or a predetermined frequency of exposure to sun.
- the assembly or system comprises a solar panel designed and constructed to be efficient and in a form factor suitable to the assembly or system.
- the solar panel may designed and constructed to fit in a small space relative to the assembly or system and to operate efficiently.
- single crystal cells are used for highest efficiency providing significant power to charge the battery even on partially cloudy days.
- the assembly or system may be designed and constructed with any number and type of solar panels.
- the system is assembled with four independent solar panels. The solar panels may operate independently or dependently to each other. In one embodiment, the system will function if any one panel is shaded or not operational.
- the assembly or system may comprise any type and form of software or executable instructions that may be configured, upgraded or modified to change or add any operational or performance characteristic of the assembly or system.
- software may be reconfigured by a technician allowing in field upgrades.
- the assembly or system may comprise any type and form of interface or port for connecting to, communicating with or receiving any software configuration, upgrades, commands or instructions.
- the system may be installed by anyone, including a user or a customer.
- the assembly or system includes static sensitive components and should be handled in a static free environment. Assembly or system should be installed such that no components or circuit traces are within contact with any conductive material, or any material capable of dislodging components or severing board traces due to vibration. In some embodiments, components are not to be potted.
- the operating environment temperature shall not exceed that of the temperature listed above in section. Operation above or below the specified temperature range may result in reduced operating life or failure of the system.
- the assembly or system shall be installed such that it is properly heat-sinked to a housing exposed to ambient air flow. In another embodiment, the assembly or system should be installed in a sealed environment. Condensation and exposure to water may result in reduced operating life or catastrophic failure of the product.
- the solar based LED assembly may include a printed circuit board, a drive and a control circuitry, a programming and a test header, and a battery hookup with red and black wires feeding the circuit.
- the Solar assembly is configured for day time charging via the installed solar panels installed to the top side of the assembly and illumination during evening hours. Throughout the day, the battery may charge at a maximum rate or any predetermined rate.
- the LED When night time is detected, the LED may be turned on and run a profile as outlined below. Based on measured battery health, this discharge profile may scale over the range of 100/0 down to 25% or lower, operating time being the only constant.
- the Solar assembly may flash the installed LED light source a predetermined number of times, such has 3 times, at any on/off frequency such 100 ms on, 300 ms off. If system detects the solar cell is dark consistently for a predetermined amount of time, such as 3 minutes, the system turns on or delivers power to the LEDs. If the system detects a predetermined amount light via the solar cell, the system may maintain the LEDs off and may continue to charge. In some embodiments, the LEDs slowly ramp up in intensity and operate per the below profile. The maximum intensity may be determined by the battery condition at the start of the ramp-up or any other predetermined or desired time. If the battery voltage under load is below a certain threshold, such as 5.1V, the system does not operate. The system may need additional charging and/or replacement of the battery in order to continue normal operation.
- a certain threshold such as 5.1V
- Battery Health may be determined at any time and/or point of operation.
- the system determines battery health when at or after the LED is turned.
- the battery health procedure use any type and form of logic, function or operates to measure battery impedance, voltage, and/or system temperature.
- health is reflective of the voltage and impedance of the battery, where lower voltage and high impedance equal poor health.
- the battery health may change with current battery charge state and/or temperature, where low charge and low temperature will result in a high impedance.
- the system includes software and/or hardware provisions, mechanisms or logic that compare battery impedance to temperature. This is to help validate if the battery impedance is high due to a bad battery or due to temperature.
- voltage under load is scaled to the anticipated voltage level at 25 degrees C. based on a temperature reading. For example, 6.3 Volts may be taken as a nominal voltage and the LED output is reduced from 100% to 12% in 30 linear steps based on the temperature adjusted voltage reading. If the battery is above the nominal voltage such as 6.3V, then the system may regulate as required in order to maintain 0.5 W output or less during LED operation.
- the intensity profile of the solar assembly or system may be dependent on any one or more factors related to any operation, performance or measurement of the assembly or system
- the Solar assembly's LED Intensity Profile may be dependant on two factors: Battery Health.
- the LED intensity profile may be scaled in any corresponding manner, such as described in 5.3.
- the 100% intensity power level being defined at the time of battery measurement (although the power level may be defined at any other time). When the battery is fully charged, 100% intensity may be approximately 1 ⁇ 2W LED Power.
- the Solar Assembly LED intensity profile may ramp up and then ramp down over the first predetermined number of minutes such as 315 minutes at which the system maintains a predetermined amount of intensity, such s 25% intensity for an undefined or defined period after 315 minutes.
- a predetermined umber of minutes such as 165 minutes before sunrise the Solar assembly initiate a second ramp up/ramp down profile.
- the Solar assembly may include a test mode that may be used prior to shipment of products to an installation site.
- the test mode may be accessed by installing any type and form test jumper, such as an I2Systems test jumper, to the 6-pin test jumper found on the bottom side of the assembly.
- the jumper may work in either orientation.
- To enter test mode the Solar Assembly may be connected to the battery.
- the 6-pin test jumper should be attached as shown in FIG. 8 .
- a momentary switch installed to the jumper should be pressed and released. Upon release, the LED light source may flash once, 1 second on, 0.5 second off.
- the test routine may then begin. If the solar cell is active, the LEDs may turn off. If the solar cell is dark, then the LEDs may turn on. There may be a 3 second delay when the solar cell goes dark until the LEDs turn on.
- the 6-pin test jumper may be removed.
- the system may restart according to normal operation in which the Solar assembly is configured for day time charging via the installed solar panels installed to the top side of the assembly and illumination during evening hours.
- the system may not be shipped to an installation site with the test jumper installed as the system may not be able to operate under such circumstances.
- Solar based systems may require an adequate amount of sunlight to recharge batteries in order to operate each night throughout the year.
- the amount of sunlight available may define the 100% intensity power level of which the product may operate.
- system may not be installed in the shade or in shaded areas.
- obstructions that may shade the system during the winter due to the sun being lower on the horizon may be removed.
- the temperature of the batteries during recharging/discharging affects the lifespan of lead acid batteries as well as the components used to control the system and drive the LEDs.
- the system may include one or more Nichia LED Models 8120193-2-F and/or Cree LED Models 8120193-2C.
- the LED may not light if the battery falls below a predetermined threshold, such as for example 5V.
- the system may need at least a predetermined number of volts, such as 3V to keep track of time.
- the board is protected from reverse polarity, but the battery may be drained if it is connected reverse for more than a few minutes.
- it if it is in darkness then it may run up to 14 hours and shut off and not light again until it sees some sun (for more than a few minutes).
- the board may be fused with a resettable fuse, but the battery may drain completely before the fault is found.
- the system may include integrated protection for voltage surges up to a predetermined threshold, such 40V. In some embodiments, with the system at room temperature (25 deg C.), for about 2 weeks to a month. The battery life may be shortened by deep discharges, and run time is much shorter at warmer and colder temperatures.
- the system may include a temperature sensor that takes continuous measurements of temperature or measurements at predetermined frequencies. The system may use the temperature reading to adjust battery voltage readings up or down to compensate for changes in voltage based on temperature fluctuation.
- the system may reduce the LED output substantially or by a predetermined amount to protect the battery. If enough sunlight appears on the solar cells to charge the battery back to a higher state of charge, the system may raise the LED output the following night.
- the system may monitor (continuously or otherwise) “Open circuit” Voltage, and voltage under load. From the measurements, the system may determines the health of the battery and compensates LED light output accordingly. In some embodiments, this system continuously adjusts instead of switching between 3-4 different dimming presets.
- the Solar Assembly tracks the number of days it has been running (Hours/Days/Weeks/Years) and stores it in any type and form of memory, such as flash memory. In some embodiments, the Solar Assembly tracks and averages sunrise and sunset in order to determine when to begin the final discharge phase of the profile as listed above. In some embodiments, upon initial power up, sunrise and sunset calibration may take several days of operation in order to determine the correct on/off times, in which during these several days operation may not be ideal.
Abstract
The present disclosure presents systems and methods for controlling light intensity and color mixing of light emitted by lighting devices. A controller may use a setting for an intensity of light and an instruction to generate, for a remote lighting device, a signal comprising the instruction and a duty cycle within a time period of the signal that corresponds to the setting for the intensity of light. The signal may comprise a digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction. The remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the received signal based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the period comprises a high value. The remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while implementing an action based on the identified instruction.
Description
- The present application claims priority to U.S. Provisional App. No. 61/099,325 filed on Sep. 23, 2008 and claims priority to and is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Non-Provisional application Ser. No. 12/466,647, filed on Sep. 23, 2008 which claims priority to U.S. Provisional App. No. 61/053,792, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- The present application is generally related to lighting systems. In particular, the present application is directed to systems and methods for controlling and modulating intensity of the light emitted by a light emitting device.
- Lighting systems may include light emitting devices organized in various configurations depending on the illumination applications. Some lighting systems provide only limited control of the features, such as the light intensity. Some traditional lighting systems may control the light sources only by using switches or preset controls. Such systems generally do not have a capability to provide a more sophisticated lighting control. Some more advanced systems may offer some additional lighting controls, but such systems often require expensive upgrades or entirely new installations
- The present disclosure is directed to an inexpensive yet intelligent solution for controlling light intensity and color mixing of light emitted by standard lighting devices or lighting fixtures. A lighting device, such as a standard lighting fixture installed in an office or a home, may be used in communication with one or more other lighting devices which may use controllers to send control signals coordinating operations between the light sources. The intensity of light emitted by a lighting device, or a light source, may be controlled via a received signal that includes one or more digital patterns identifying the intensity or brightness.
- In some aspects, the present disclosure relates to a method for modulating light intensity or brightness emitted by a light emitting device using a digital pattern of a signal. A controller may receive a setting for an intensity of light for a remote lighting device. The controller may be any controller of a lighting system. The controller may further receive an instruction to control the remote lighting device. The controller may generate for the remote lighting device, a signal having an instruction, a time period and a duty cycle corresponding to the setting for the intensity of light. The time period may comprise a first time interval and a second time interval. A first portion of the signal within the first time interval may comprise a first digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction. A duty cycle of the first portion of the signal may be different than a duty cycle of the second portion of the signal. The first digital pattern may comprise at least two bits. The remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the signal received from the controller. The duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval and the second time interval comprises a high value. The remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking an action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern.
- In some embodiments, the controller generates for the remote lighting device, the signal having the time period comprising a third time interval. The signal may comprise a third portion of the signal within the third time interval, a third digital pattern of the third portion of the signal within the third time interval corresponding to at least a second portion of the instruction. The remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the signal. The duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval, the second time interval and the third time interval comprises a high value. The remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking a second action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern and the second portion of the instruction identified by the third digital pattern.
- In some embodiments, the controller receives a second setting for a second intensity of light for a remote lighting device. The second intensity of light may be different than the intensity of light. The controller may generate for the remote lighting device, a second signal having a second time period and a second duty cycle corresponding to the second setting for the intensity of light. The second time period may comprise a new first time interval and a new second time interval. The remote lighting device may determine the second duty cycle of the second time period of the second signal received from the controller. The second duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the second signal within the new first time interval and the new second time interval comprises a high value. The remote lighting device may establish the second intensity of the light emitted based on the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the controller transmits to the remote lighting device, the signal via a wire used for providing electrical power to the remote lighting device. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device emits light based on the established intensity of light. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle of the time period based on a ratio of a sum of durations of time within time period for which the signal comprises a high value to a total duration of the time period.
- In some embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction that instructs the remote lighting device to set a brightness value of a red light source, green light source or a blue light source of the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to turn off the light by dimming the light down. In other embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to enter a learning mode to accept an address assigned to the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to send a configuration status of the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the instruction that instructs the remote lighting device to set a maximum intensity of the light emitted for the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising a continuous stream of data bits divided into a plurality of time periods, where the time period is one time period of the plurality of time periods. In some embodiments, the controller generates the signal comprising the first portion of the signal consisting of the first time interval and the second portion of the signal consisting of the second time interval.
- In some aspects, the present disclosure relates to a system for modulating intensity of light emitted by a light emitting device using a digital pattern of a signal. The system may include a controller receiving a setting for an intensity of light for a remote lighting device and an instruction to control the remote lighting device. The controller may generate for the remote lighting device, a signal having an instruction, a time period and a duty cycle corresponding to the setting for the intensity of light. The time period may comprise a first time interval and a second time interval. A first portion of the signal within the first time interval may comprise a first digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction. A duty cycle of the first portion of the signal may be different than a duty cycle of the second portion of the signal. The first digital pattern may comprise at least two bits. The remote lighting device may determine the duty cycle of the time period of the signal received from the controller. The duty cycle may be based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval and the second time interval comprises a high value. The remote lighting device may establish intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking an action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern.
- The foregoing and other objects, aspects, features, and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent and better understood by referring to the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:
-
FIG. 1A is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of an environment of a lighting system and components of the lighting system; -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram that depicts another embodiment of a lighting system and components of the lighting system; -
FIG. 1C is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of a communication system between light sources; -
FIG. 1D is a block diagram that depicts an embodiment of a light source control and communication; -
FIG. 2A andFIG. 2B are block diagrams of embodiments of digital communication between light sources, intensity control and master/slave control; -
FIG. 3 is a flow chart illustrating steps of a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal. -
FIG. 4A andFIG. 4B are block diagrams of embodiments of additional light intensity control embodiments; -
FIG. 4C is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for modulating intensity of light using a digital pattern of a signal; -
FIG. 5A is a block diagram of a system or an apparatus, such as a non-contact switch for selecting and controlling one or more light sources; -
FIG. 5B is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of a method for detecting presence of an object or a person via a non-contact switch. -
FIG. 6A is a block diagram of an embodiment for lighting devices transmitting power, intensity and instructions for assigning a status to a lighting device via a connection; and -
FIG. 6B is a flow chart illustrating steps of an embodiment of method for assigning a status to a lighting device via a connection used by the lighting device for receiving intensity and/or power. - The features and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent from the detailed description set forth below when taken in conjunction with the drawings, in which like reference characters identify corresponding elements throughout.
- For purposes of reading the description of the various embodiments of the present invention below, the following descriptions of the sections of the specification and their respective contents may be helpful:
-
- Section A describes lighting system environment and components of the lighting system;
- Section B relates to systems and methods for communication among lighting system components;
- Section C relates to embodiments for status assignment of the light sources;
- Section D relates to embodiments for lighting system intensity control with digital patterning and color mixing;
- Section E relates to embodiments for non-contact selection and control of lighting system components;
- Section F relates to systems and methods for status assignment of the light sources; and
- Section G relates to systems and methods for controlling profile intensity based on battery health and time period for a solar LED system.
-
Lighting system 100 comprises a number of lighting system components which may be used for a variety of lighting or illumination applications in numerous environments.FIG. 1A illustrates a block diagram of an environment within whichlighting system 100 may be used.FIG. 1A illustrates alighting system 100 comprising lighting system components called lighting devices, orlight sources lighting system 100 also includes additional lighting system components: acommunicator 125, acontroller 120, a master/slave addressor 130 and apower supply 140. All the lighting system components illustrated byFIG. 1A are connected to each other viaconnections 105.Connections 105 are depicted running into or running through anetwork 104. In many embodiments,network 104 comprises a plurality ofconnections 105 through which signals, information or data packets, or electrical power are propagated. In a plurality of embodiments,network 104 andconnections 105 provide connections between any of the lighting system components. -
FIG. 1A depicts light sources 110 comprising various components.FIG. 1A presents alight source 110A comprising: acontroller 120A, acommunicator 125A which further comprises anaddress 127A, a master/slave addressor 130A, and apower supply 140A.FIG. 1A also illustrates alight source 110B which includes only acommunicator 125B.Light source 110C is shown byFIG. 1A comprising acontroller 120C and anaddress 127C. Other lighting system components, such as acommunicator 125,controller 120,power supply 140 and master/slave addressor 130 are illustrated inFIG. 1A as individual and independent lighting system components not comprising any additional subcomponents. - In some embodiments, however, any of the
communicator 125,controller 120,power supply 140 and master/slave addressor 130 may comprise any number of lighting system components or subcomponents. Herein, the term lighting system component, may be used interchangeably for any component or subcomponent within alighting system 100 or for any component related to alighting system 100. Furthermore, terms lighting device, device, light source, lighting fixture or a lighting unit may also be used interchangeably and may comprise any number of similar orother lighting system 100 components. -
Lighting system 100, illustrated inFIG. 1A , may be any system including one ormore lighting devices 100, also referred to as light sources 110. Sometimes,lighting system 100 is a system comprising one or more light sources or light fixtures controlled by one or more lighting system components. In a plurality of embodiments, alighting system 100 includes a number of light sources 110 connected to each other. In a number of embodiments, alighting system 100 includes a number of light sources 110 connected to apower supply 140 or a source of electricity, such as an electrical outlet. In many embodiments,lighting system 100 is a system comprising a plurality of light sources 110 or other lighting system components connected to each other and communicating with each other. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises a plurality of lighting system components electrically connected to each other in parallel. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises a plurality of lighting system components electrically connected to each other in series. In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises components, such as light sources 110 orpower supplies 140 connected to each other in parallel or in series or in a combination of parallel and series electrical connections. Sometimes,lighting system 100 includes any number of systems, products, components or devices assisting any functionality, operation or control of light sources 110. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 includes one or more components, systems, products or devices assisting or controlling communication between a light source 110 and another light source 110 or another component, device, system or product. In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 is any system comprising a plurality of light sources 110, such as light fixtures for example, illuminating or lighting an area or a space. In many embodiments,lighting system 100 is any system comprising a plurality of light sources 110, providing illumination or lighting an area or a space as controlled by one or more lighting system components. - In some embodiments,
lighting system 100 comprises one or more lighting devices, or light sources 110. In numerous embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 comprising apower supply 140. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises a master/slave addressor 130, acontroller 120, apower supply 140 and acommunicator 125 as separate and independent components of thelighting system 100. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system components are electrically connected to one or more light sources 110 via connections, cables, wires, lines or any electrically conductive mediums. In some embodiments, lighting system components are electrically connected to one or more light sources 110 vianetwork 104. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises any number of lighting system components connected to each other or other lighting system components either directly viaconnections 105, via combinations ofconnections 105 andnetwork 104 or via one ormore networks 104. - In one embodiment, the
lighting system 100 is installed, deployed or otherwise provided in any type or form of indoor, outdoor, residential or commercial environment. In one embodiment,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in any type of indoor environment. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a residential building or a room. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a commercial building or an office area. In many embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a store or a mall. In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a hallway, or a parking garage. In numerous embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a restaurant or a museum. In some embodiments, thelighting system 100 is installed in a laboratory or a research or development laboratory, area or an institution. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed in an outside environment, such as a stadium, or a concert stage. In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 is deployed, installed or provided in a town square, residential area, or section of a town or city. - In many embodiments,
lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which are different from other light sources 110 of thelighting system 100. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which are same or similar to other light sources 110 of thelighting system 100. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 includes only one or two light sources 110 while in other embodiments,lighting system 100 includes a very large number of light sources 110, such as tens or hundreds. In a plurality of embodiments, a plurality oflighting systems 100 are electrically connected to each other and form onelarger lighting system 100 or a lighting system farm. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 includes a plurality ofseparate lighting systems 100 or lighting system farms. -
Connections 105 are represented inFIG. 1A by lines connecting components oflighting system 100 toother lighting system 100 components vianetwork 104.Connections 105 may comprise any type of medium or means for transferring, transporting or propagating electrical power, electronic analog or digital signals, or any other type of communication signal between any two components or devices of thelighting system 100. In some embodiments,connection 105 is a wire or a plurality of wires of any size or gauge capable of conducting electricity or an electronic signal. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105 is a cable including one or more electrical conductors electrically insulated from each other and other conductors. In many embodiments,connection 105 comprises a plurality of separate and mutually insulated conductive mediums, each one transmitting a separate signal or information. In some embodiments,connection 105 is a cable including a plurality of wires insulated with any non-conductive material, the wires being used for electrical power distribution in residential or commercial areas. In certain embodiments,connection 105 includes a cable or a group of wires of any size and gauge comprising any electrical current conducting material. In some embodiments,connection 105 comprises an optical fiber transmitting an optical signal. In a number of embodiments,connection 105 is a coaxial cable. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105 is a wire harness comprising any number of sheathed or unsheathed wires, each wire transmitting a separate signal without interference from an outside wire. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105 is a wire harness comprising a plurality of mediums for transmitting electrical signals and optical signals. In some embodiments,connection 105 is a wire harness comprising three separate mediums for transmitting electrical signals or conducting electricity. In a number of embodiments,connection 105 comprises a plurality of current conducting mediums wherein each of the mediums is sheathed or electrically insulated from other conducting mediums of theconnection 105. -
Connection 105, in some embodiments, is a wireless connection between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments,connection 105 comprises a medium for wireless communication between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, theconnection 105 is a wireless communication link between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments, theconnection 105 is a medium through which wireless communication of two ormore lighting system 100 components is propagated. Theconnection 105 may comprise any number of wireless communication links and wired communication links. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105 comprises a number ofconnection 105 components each of which may further comprise any number of wireless communication links for communication between two ormore lighting system 100 components. The wireless communication link or the wireless communication propagated viaconnection 105 may refer to any transfer of information between any two ormore lighting system 100 components without the use of electrical conductors or wires. In some embodiments,connection 105 comprises any one, or any combination of: a metal wire, a metal line, a cable having one or more wires or lines, a light guide, an optical fiber and a wireless link or wireless connection system. In some of embodiments,connection 105 comprises a plurality ofconnection 105 components comprising metal lines or wires, wireless links, optical fibers or cables. -
Network 104 may be any medium or means for transferring electrical power, electronic data, electromagnetic waves, electrical signals, or communication signals between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,network 104 is a mesh ofconnections 105 connecting any lighting system component with any other component of thelighting system 100. In a plurality of embodiments,network 104 comprises a number ofconnections 105 connecting light sources 110, with each other. In many embodiments,network 104 comprises a number ofconnections 105 connecting anylighting system 100 component to anyother lighting system 100 component.Network 104, in some embodiments, is plurality ofconnections 105 connectingspecific lighting system 100 components to otherspecific lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments, lighting system components are connected to other lighting system components via one ormore connections 105. Thenetwork 104 may also be a wireless network and comprise any number of wireless communication links between any number oflighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, thenetwork 104 comprises wireless links and non-wireless links, such as connections via wires.Network 104, in some embodiments, is a plurality ofconnections 105 connecting any of thelighting system 100 components to anyother lighting system 100 components, such as alighting device 110A tolighting devices - A device 110, also referred to as a lighting device 110 or a light source 110, is any device performing or executing a function or an instruction, or any device operating, outputting or performing as instructed or commanded by an instruction or information received by the device via a
connection 105. In many embodiments, device 110 is any device or an apparatus performing a functionality as directed by a signal. The device 110 may be any electrical, electromechanical or mechanical component, such as a motor for example. The device 110 may be an engine, a turbine, or may be any apparatus or a system comprising a motor or an engine. In some embodiments, device 110 is a device, apparatus or a material capable of producing, emitting or emanating light or electromagnetic radiation. In a plurality of embodiments, a device 110 is any device performing any functionality as instructed via aconnection 105 or any device transmitting instruction to other devices 110, even if the device 110 or the devices 110 receiving or transmitting instructions are not light emitting devices. Devices 110 may be any electronic or electrical components, devices, products or apparatuses performing a function or an operation in response to an electrical or electronic signal. - In many embodiments, device 110 is a lighting device 110 or a lighting fixture, a light source, or any device producing or emitting light. In a plurality of embodiments, device 110 or a light source 110 is a fluorescent light. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a lamp or a light bulb. In many embodiments, light source is a white light emitting diode. In some embodiments, light source 110 is a semiconductor light emitting device, such as a light emitting diode of any spectral or wavelength range. In a plurality of embodiments, the light source 110 is a broadband lamp or a broadband light source. In number of embodiments, the light source 110 is a black light. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a hollow cathode lamp. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a fluorescent tube light source. In some embodiments, the light source 110 is a neon or argon lamp. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a plasma lamp. In certain embodiments, light source 110 is a xenon flash lamp. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a mercury lamp. In some embodiments, light source 110 is a metal halide lamp. In certain embodiments, light source 110 is a sulfur lamp. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a laser, or a laser diode. In some embodiments, light source 110 is an OLED, PHOLED, QDLED, or any other variation of a light source 110 utilizing an organic material. In certain embodiments, light source 110 is a monochromatic light source. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a polychromatic light source. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a light source emitting light partially in the spectral range of ultraviolet light. In some embodiments, light source 110 is a device, product or a material emitting light partially in the spectral range of visible light. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a device, product or a material partially emanating or emitting light in the spectral range of the infra red light. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a device, product or a material emanating or emitting light in the visible spectral range. In some embodiments, light source 110 includes a filter to control the spectral range of the light emitted from the light source 110. In certain embodiments, light source 110 includes a light guide, an optical fiber or a waveguide through which light is emitted from the light source 110. In some embodiments, light source 110 includes one or more mirrors for reflecting or redirecting of light. In some embodiments, lighting device 110 reflects light emitted from another light source. In some embodiments, light source 110 includes a light reactive material affecting the light emitted, such as a polarizer, filter or a prism. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a coherent light source. In some embodiments, light source 110, or a lighting device 110, is an incoherent light source.
- The device 110, or the lighting device 110, may be any light emitting device, comprising one or more light sources and capable of providing light to an area or a space. In other embodiments, lighting device 110 is a semiconductor light emitting diode producing an incoherent light of any given spectral or power range. In another embodiment, lighting device 110 is an ultra-violet light emitting source used for illuminating a light reactive material. A light reactive material sometimes, in response to the illuminated light absorbs the light, and in response to the absorbed light, produces a light of its own. In some embodiments, lighting device 110 is an LED or a light source used for color rendering of the fruits, vegetables, meats or any light reactive materials. In a number of embodiments, lighting device 110 emits light which alters the color of the object illuminated by the light source 110 as perceived by the human eye. In some embodiments,
lighting system 100 is used for illuminating an object whose appearance of color pigment is shifted as perceived by a human eye in response to the illumination of the object using a specific spectral range of light. For example, an object of a yellow pigment may appear orange to a human eye when illuminated by purple light. In another example, a blue pigment may appear black to a human eye when illuminated by orange light. In some embodiments, an object of a red pigment, when illuminated by a deep red light may be perceived by human eye as a even more red. In some embodiments, light source 110 emits a light having a specific spectral range tailored for illuminating a specific object and creating a perception to a human observer of an object having a different color pigment as the result of the illumination. In some embodiments, an array of light sources 110 are used to vary the wavelength and intensity of the light emitted. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 is a monochromatic light source, emitting only a single wavelength of light. In some embodiments, light source 110 is a tunable light source, emitting a light of varying spectral range. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 is a broadband light utilizing a filter for narrowing down the light spectral range. Light source 110, in some embodiments, is any device, product or material emitting, emanating or illuminating light of any spectral or power range, any constant output or varying intensity output, and any type of coherent or incoherent light. - In some other embodiment, light source 110 creates color of the light emitted from the light source 110 using a plurality of light sources emitting specific wavelengths of light which individually or mixed produce the color of the light emitted. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 includes one or more light sources emitting a monochromatic light. In many embodiments, light source 110 includes one or more light sources emitting a relatively monochromatic light, wherein relatively means about ninety percent monochromatic. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 includes one or more light sources emitting a light having a narrow spectral range which when mixed with other light produces white light or light of a color different from the original color. In a plurality of embodiments, monochromatic light is a light having only a single wavelength of light. Relatively monochromatic light is a light similar to a light emitted by a monochromatic laser or a laser diode and it may have a spectral wavelength range of one or a few nanometers. Narrow spectral range, in some embodiments, means a range of about five to fifty nanometers of wavelength range. In some embodiments, light source 110 emits one or more of any of the monochromatic, relatively monochromatic or a narrow spectral range light individually or in any combination. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 emits blue light, such as the light having wavelength length between 460 nanometers and 490 nanometers. Light emanated or emitted from the light source, in some embodiments, has shorter wavelengths or a higher energy than the visible light. In some embodiments, light emitted or emanated from a light source 110 has a spectral range at least partially in the ultraviolet range and at least partially in a visible range. In a plurality of embodiments, the light emitted or emanated from a light source 110 has a spectral range at least partially in the visible range and at least partially in the infrared range. In a number of embodiments, light emitted from a light source 110 is pulsed or varying in intensity, or continuous and/or without any interruption in emission. In some embodiments, light emitted from light source 110 is periodically or non-periodically pulsed. In some embodiments, a light source 110 comprises a plurality of light sources, each of which emits a light having a partially different wavelength from light emitted by other light sources of the light source 110. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a plurality of light sources each emitting a light of different color or a different wavelength or wavelength range. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a plurality of light sources, wherein each of the light sources emits a light having a different intensity or power range.
- The device 110, also referred to as the light source 110, may also comprise a wireless device, such as a wireless signal receiver or a wireless signal transmitter. In some embodiments, light source 110 comprises an antenna for receiving or for transmitting wireless communication. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a wireless connector, a wireless receiver or a wireless signal emitter. In many embodiments, light source 110 comprises a device or a unit controlling and implementing wireless communication between two or more light sources 110. In some embodiments, the light source 110 may comprise a wireless link, such as an infrared channel or satellite band. In many embodiments, the light source 110 comprises a wireless RF network port, such as a network port supporting IEEE 802.11 wireless communication protocols or Bluetooth technology. In a plurality of embodiments, any
lighting system 100 component may comprise any number of wireless communication devices, such as wireless network ports, wireless transmitters or receivers or wireless transceiver used for wireless communication between thelighting system 100 components. - In a number of embodiments, the light source 110 comprises a
controller 120. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises acommunicator 125. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 comprises a master/slave addressor 130. In some embodiments, light source 110 comprises apower supply 140. In certain embodiments, light source 110 comprises any of, or any combination of:controller 120,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 andpower supply 140. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises an enclosure which encloses any of or any combination of:controller 120,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 andpower supply 140. In a plurality of embodiments, light source 110 comprises aconnection 105 which can be used to connect the light source 110 with any other light sources 110 or other lighting system components. - Light system components may transmit to the light sources 110 signals comprising any number of instructions. Instructions, such as the
instruction 650, may include any type and form of instruction or command for operating, configuring, controlling or managing on or more light sources 110. In some embodiments, an instruction comprises a command to set a master or slave status to a lighting device. In other embodiments, instruction includes an instruction to turn a lighting device on or off. In further embodiments, instruction instructs a lighting device to change intensity of light, wavelength of light, pulse of light. In some embodiments, instruction comprises a command to change or set up a configuration of a device, such as a pulsing illumination mode or a constant illumination mode. The instruction may also include a command to include a lighting device 110 into a zone or a group of a plurality of lighting devices. In some embodiments, instruction comprises a command to assign an address to the lighting device. In further embodiments, instruction comprises a command to operate the light for a duration of time identified by the instruction. For example, a lighting device may receive an instruction to maintain an operation at a current intensity for a specific duration of time. In further embodiments, the instruction identifies a command to turn off a lighting device. The instruction may also identify when to turn off the lighting device. The instruction may include any type and form of command, configuration, request, setting or data needed by the lighting device to implement any function of the lighting system described herein. - Still referring to
FIG. 1A ,controller 120 is any unit, system, device or component capable of controlling, modulating light emitted or emanated from any light source 110. In some embodiments,controller 120 includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware for controlling, managing or otherwise directing the operation and/or performance of one or more light sources 110.Controller 120 may include any type and form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware embodied in forming instructions or enabling control of one or more light sources 110. In some embodiments,controller 120 comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein.Controller 120 may include any type and form of executable instructions, including an application, a program, a library, a process, a service, a task or a thread. In one embodiment,controller 120 provides, includes or controls power output for one or more of light sources 110. Herein, terms light emanated from a light source, light produced from a light source or light emitted from a light source may be used interchangeably and may comprise the meaning of any of these terms. - In some embodiments,
controller 120 is any unit used for controlling one or more light sources 110. Sometimes,controller 120 is any device, system, structure, circuit, piece or hardware or software used for controlling a light source 110 or any other lighting system component. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 comprises a combination of any device, system structure, circuit, piece of hardware or software, computer program, structure or algorithm used for controlling a light source 110 or any other lighting system component. In some embodiments,controller 120 includes logic, functions or operations to establish, determine, adapt, coordinate, manage or control any characteristics of light emitted from one or more light sources 110. In numerous embodiments,controller 120 includes logic, functions or operations to establish, determine, adapt, coordinate, manage or control any characteristics of any output of any lighting system component. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 controls a light source 110 which produces a light of a predetermined wavelength. In another embodiment, thecontroller 120 directs the light source to emit a light having a wavelength in a predetermined range. In some embodiments, thecontroller 120 directs the light source to emanate a light at a predetermined frequency or within a predetermined frequency range. In other embodiments,controller 120 adjusts one or more characteristics of the light to be emitted or emanated from the light source 110. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 establishes or adjusts the color and/or color temperature of the light to emanate from the light source. For example, the color may be established or adjusted based on a color rendering index or value thereof. In another example, the color temperate may be established or adjusted based on a temperature value, such as for example, Kelvin scale. In some embodiments,controller 120 comprises functionality for detecting, or detects a duty cycle of a signal. - In some embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110,
communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 or apower supply 140,controller 120 establishes or adjusts intensity of the light emitted from a light source 110. In a number of embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 or apower supply 140,controller 120 establishes or adjusts spectral range of the light emitted from a light source 110. In many embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 or apower supply 140,controller 120 establishes or adjusts wavelength of the light emitted from a light source 110. In numerous embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 or apower supply 140,controller 120 establishes or adjusts frequency of pulses of the light emitted from a light source 110. In certain embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 or apower supply 140,controller 120 establishes or adjusts brightness or luminance of the light emitted from a light source 110. In some embodiments, responsive to information from any one of a light source 110,communicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 or apower supply 140,controller 120 establishes or adjusts chromaticity of the light emitted from a light source 110. In many embodiments, anylighting system 100 component may comprise any number ofother lighting system 100 components, such as, for examplelight source 110A illustrated inFIG. 1A . In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 components comprisingother lighting system 100 components are still controlled, modified, affected or adjusted byother lighting system 100 components not comprised by them. For example,light source 110A inFIG. 1A having a master/slave addressor 130A, in some embodiments, is affected, adjusted, modified or controlled by a master/slave addressor 130. Similarly, in some embodiments,light source 110A having acontroller 120A is affected, adjusted, controlled or modified by acontroller 120 not comprised bylight source 110A. - In a number of embodiments,
controller 120 comprises functionality for detecting an instruction within a duty cycle of a signal. In a number of embodiments,controller 120 comprises functionality for detecting a time interval associated with a duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 receives, decodes or processes a signal comprising a duty cycle of a time interval or within a time interval. In some embodiments,controller 120 receives, decodes or processes an instruction comprised within the duty cycle. In some embodiments,controller 120 receives, decodes or processes a duty cycle within a time interval wherein the duty cycle comprises a plurality of separated portions within the time interval. Thecontroller 120 may detect or process the duty cycle within the time interval regardless if the duty cycle is a single active signal portion within the time interval or a plurality of separated active signal portions within the time interval. - In some embodiments,
controller 120 receives an information from anotherlighting system 100 component and adjusts the output or the light emitted from the light source 110 in response to the communication or information received. In some embodiments, information received by acontroller 120 or anyother lighting system 100 component comprises any one, or any combination of: a command, a signal, an instruction, a digital or analog code, a pulse, a data bit, a data byte, data or any form of electronic or electrical signal. In a number of embodiments,controller 120A oflight source 110A receives an information fromlight source 110B orlight source 110C and changes, amends or adjusts the control of thelight source 110A in response to the received information. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120A oflight source 110A receives an information from any one ofcommunicator 125,controller 120,power supply 140 or master/slave addressor 130 and changes, amends or adjusts the control oflight source 110A in response to the received information. In certain embodiments,controller 120A oflight source 110A receives an information from any one ofcommunicator 125A, address 127A, master/slave addressor 130A and adjusts, changes or amends the control of thelight source 110A in response to the received information. - In some embodiments, the
controller 120 includes a central processing unit (CPU), a memory unit, a power supply and a current driving circuitry for powering and controlling one or more light sources 110. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 comprises a software application controlling a logic unit for managing the circuitry which powers up or controls one or more light sources 110 or an array of light sources within the light source 110. In a number of embodiments,controller 120 is a module comprising a CPU or a microprocessor, a memory and a digital logic circuit subsystem associated with control and management of the light sources 110. In some embodiments,controller 120 controls intensity of the light emitted from a light source 110 using electronic circuitry, software, or a combination of electronic circuitry and software of thecontroller 120. In certain embodiments,controller 120 controls wavelength of the light emitted from a light source 110 using electronic circuitry, software, or a combination of electronic circuitry and software of thecontroller 120. In a number of embodiments,controller 120 controls a duty cycle of the intensity varying light emitted from the light source 110 using hardware, software or a combination of the hardware and software of thecontroller 120. In some embodiments,controller 120 controls or modulates the light emitted from light source 110 using a microprocessor or a processing unit, such as a central processing unit. In a number of embodiments,controller 120 modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source 110 using a combination of hardware and software to control or modulate current through the light source 110. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source 110 using hardware or software or any combination of hardware or software to control or modulate voltage of light source 110. In some embodiments,controller 120 modulates or controls intensity or wavelength of a light source 110 using hardware or software or any combination of hardware and software. In a plurality of embodiments,controller 120 modulates or controls frequency of pulses of light emitted by light source 110 using hardware or software or any combination of hardware and software. -
Controller 120 may include any type and form of device, circuitry or a function for generating a signal to be transmitted to a remote lighting device. Such a component of thecontroller 120 may be referred to as asignal generator 155. The signal generator may further include a function, component or a device for generating digital patterns.Signal generator 155 generating data stream of bits forming digital patterns may also be referred to as a digital pattern generator.Signal generator 155 or the digital pattern generator may generate digital patterns within time intervals or time periods in order to maintain a predetermined intensity of the light to be emitted by the receiving lighting device. The signal generated by thesignal generator 155 may include digital patterns or instructions any number of remote lighting devices. Digital patterns of the signal may include data bits having high and low values. Thesignal generator 155 of thecontroller 120 may include any type and form of processors, functions or components that generate the signals, including the digital patterns of the signal, such that the total duration of the signal for which the digital patterns have a high value within a predetermined time interval is predetermined.Controller 120 may generate the signal such that the digital patterns and instructions are included and embedded into the signal. The signal may further be generated to have a ratio of a duration of the signal for which the digital patterns have a high value within a time interval over the total duration of the time interval. The signal may be generated to ensure that this ratio, which may also be referred to as the duty cycle within the time interval, stays at a level indicating the intended intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. This ratio may be included in the signal and remain at the intended level regardless of the instructions or commands for the remote lighting device inserted into the signal. The signal generator of thecontroller 120 may include any functionality to generate digital patterns, instructions, or any other component of the signal. The signal generator may embed the digital patterns and the instructions into the signal. In some embodiments, thesignal generator 155 may be comprised by any component of the lighting device 110, such as acommunicator 125 for example. -
Controller 120 may include any type and form of device, circuitry or a function for filtering or processing the signal received from another lighting system component. Such a component of thecontroller 120 may be referred as asignal processor 157. Thesignal processor 157 may include any type and form of a filter for filtering the signal. The filters may include frequency filter, optical filter, power filter, intensity filter, phase filter or any other type and form of filter for filtering the signal. Thesignal processor 157 of thecontroller 120 may include circuitry for identifying the duty cycle of the signal within a time interval. The signal processor may determine the duty cycle by determining a sum of all portions of the digital pattern of the signal having a high value within a time interval. In some embodiments, the signal processor determines the duty cycle by determining a ratio of a sum of all durations the digital pattern of the signal within a time interval for which the digital pattern has a high value and the entire duration of the time interval. Thesignal processor 157 may use the ratio to establish the percentage of the maximum intensity with which to operate the lighting device. In some embodiments, the signal processor determines an average value of the signal for the time duration of the signal. In further embodiments, the signal processor of thecontroller 120 determines a duty cycle by summing all the portions of any number of digital patterns of the signal having a high value within a time interval and establishing a ratio of the sum to a total duration of the time interval. Thesignal processor 157 of thecontroller 120 may include any functionality to generate digital patterns, instructions, or any other component of the signal. Thesignal processor 157 may embed the digital patterns and the instructions into the signal. In some embodiments, thesignal processor 157 may be comprised by any component of the lighting device 110, such as acommunicator 125 for example. - The
controller 120, in some embodiments, is a commercial off the shelf system or comprises a commercial off the shelf product, component or a system. In many embodiments,controller 120 is a customized or a proprietary system for controlling light sources 110 or any other lighting system components. In some embodiments,controller 120 comprises controller components such as control circuits, analog or digital logic circuitry, processors or micro-processors, memory units, software or firmware which individually, or in combination, control the output of a light source 110. In a number of embodiments,controller 120 includes any of the products or modules manufactured or provided by Integrated Illumination Systems, Inc. referred to as I2 Systems, of Morris, Conn. In some embodiments,controller 120 includes user interface modules and light source control modules to control and drive one or more light sources 110. -
FIG. 1A also displays a stand-alone communicator 125 connected toother lighting system 100 components vianetwork 104. In some embodiments,communicator 125 andcommunicator 125A comprise or share any embodiments of anycommunicator 125. In some embodiments,communicator 125 comprises all the functionality and performance characteristics ofcommunicator 125A and vice versa.Communicator 125A or anyother communicator 125, may be any device, unit or a component capable of communicating with anyother lighting system 100 component. In some embodiments,communicator 125A receives an information from any component inside oflight source 110A, such ascontroller 120A, address 127A, master/slave 130A or apower supply 140A and in response to the received information transmits an information to any component inside oflight source 110A or anylighting system 100 component. - In some embodiments,
communicator 125 includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware for receiving or sending information or communication, processing received information and sending information. In some embodiments,communicator 125 includes any one of, or any combination of: analog or digital logic circuitry, processing units or microprocessors, memory, hardware or software for receive and processing information, performing and implementing logical functions or algorithms or transmitting information toother lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,communicator 125 includes any one of, or any combination of: analog or digital logic circuitry, processing units or microprocessors, memory, hardware or software for receive and processing information, performing and implementing logical functions or algorithms or transmitting information to other components withinlight source 110A.Communicator 125 may include any type and form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware embodied in forming instructions or enabling control of one or more light sources 110. In some embodiments,communicator 125A or anyother communicator 125 comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein.Communicator 125, in some embodiments, includes any type or form of executable instructions, including an application, program, library, process, service, task or thread. - In a number of embodiments,
communicator 125 detects and processes an instruction within a duty cycle of a signal. In a number of embodiments,communicator 125 detects a time interval associated with a duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments,communicator 125 receives, decodes or processes a signal comprising a duty cycle of a time interval or within a time interval. In some embodiments,communicator 125 receives, decodes or processes an instruction comprised within the duty cycle. In some embodiments,communicator 125 receives, decodes or processes a duty cycle within a time interval wherein the duty cycle comprises a plurality of separated portions within the time interval. Thecommunicator 125 may detect or process the duty cycle within the time interval regardless if the duty cycle is a single active signal portion within the time interval or a plurality of separated active signal portions within the time interval. - In a number of embodiments,
communicator 125A receives all communication or information external to thelight source 110A and distributes the received communication to any of the components within thelight source 110A. In a plurality of embodiments,communicator 125A receives all communication or information from outside of light source 110 and processes, decodes, interprets or reformats the received information. In certain embodiments,communicator 125A transmits the processed, decoded or interpreted received information to one or more components within thelight source 110A. In some embodiments,communicator 125A receives all communication or information from one or more components inside oflight source 110A and processes, decodes, interprets or reformats the received information. In certain embodiments,communicator 125A transmits the processed, decoded or interpreted received information to one ormore lighting system 100 components, such as another light source 110 or anothercommunicator 125 outside oflight source 110A. It will be understood by those with ordinary skill in the art thatcommunicator 125A may comprise all the functionality of anyother communicator 125, and vice versa. -
Address 127A is an address, piece of data, or a piece of information uniquely identifying alighting system 100 component having theaddress 127A fromother lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,address 127A is a number. In many embodiments,address 127A is an electronic data, a number, an electronic code, a binary code or a binary number. In a plurality of embodiments,address 127A is a piece of electronic information stored in a memory location. In some embodiments,address 127A is a setting of a switch or a key. In certain embodiments,address 127A is a setting of a logical circuitry set by a user. In a number of embodiments,address 127A is a digital signal or a digital code. In a plurality of embodiments,address 127A is an internet protocol address. - In some embodiments, address 127 is a unique identifier used for network communication of a lighting system component comprising the address 127. In certain embodiments, address 127 comprises a host name, an internet protocol address or a unique identifier. In a plurality of embodiments, address 127 is used by a lighting system component comprising the address 127 to distinguish a message addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of messages. In many embodiments, address 127 is used by a lighting system component comprising the address 127 to distinguish an information addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of information. In numerous embodiments, address 127 is used by a lighting system component comprising the address 127 to distinguish a communication addressed to the lighting system component from a plurality of communications. In some embodiments,
address 127A is used as a unique network identifier of alighting system 100 component comprising theaddress 127A for network communications of thelighting system 100 component. In a number of embodiments,address 127A is used as a unique network identifier of alighting system 100 component comprising theaddress 127A for communication between thelighting system 100 component and alighting system 100 component comprising an address 127 different than anaddress 127A. It will be understood by those with ordinary skill in the art that address 127A may comprise all the functionality of any other address 127, and vice versa. - Master/
slave addressor 130 may be any unit, circuit, device, software or a system capable of setting, resetting or establishing a master or a slave status of any lighting system component. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is any device, unit or a system setting, resetting or establishing a status of a master or a slave of one of lighting system components from a plurality of lighting system components. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is a component independent from any light source 110. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is a component within a light source 110 and specifically used by the same light source 110. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is associated with a specific lighting system component and used by the same specific lighting system component. In numerous embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is associated with a group of lighting system components within a plurality of groups of lighting system components, and is used by the group of lighting system components for setting or resetting the statuses of the lighting systems components within the group. In a number of embodiments, any master/slave addressor 130 performs any functionality and comprises any embodiments of a master/slave addressor 130A, and vice versa. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is used interchangeably with master/slave addressor 130A. -
FIG. 1A illustrates master/slave addressor 130 as alighting system 100 component while illustrating master/slave addressor 130A as alight source 110A component. Master/slave addressor 130A, in a number of embodiments, is any device, unit, setting, monitoring or recognizing a master or a slave status oflight source 110A among a plurality oflighting system 100 components. Master/slave addressor 130, in a plurality of embodiments, is any is any device, unit, circuit, software or a system setting, resetting, monitoring or recognizing a master or a slave status of any light source 110 of alighting system 100 among a plurality of light sources 110 of thelighting system 100 components. - In many embodiments, one lighting system component of a plurality of lighting system components has a status of a master, while all the remaining lighting system components have status of a slave. In numerous embodiments, all lighting system components of a
lighting system 100 have a status of a slave. In a plurality of embodiments, all light sources 110 of alighting system 100 have a status of a slave. In many embodiments, all lighting system components of alighting system 100 have a status of a master. In some embodiments, all light sources 110 of alighting system 100 have a status of a master. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a master. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a master and all other lighting system components have a status of a slave. In numerous embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a slave. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 is independent of any other lighting system component and has a status of a slave and one or more of other lighting system components have a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, plurality of light sources 110 of alighting system 100 have a status of a master or a slave. In some embodiments, all light sources 110 of alighting system 100 have a status of a master or a slave. In certain embodiments, none of light sources 110 of alighting system 100 have a status of a master or a slave. In a number of embodiments, one of a plurality of light sources 110 has a status of a master and all the remaininglighting system 100 components have a status of a slave. - In some embodiments, a lighting system component having a status of a master controls one or more tasks, actions, functionalities or performances of one or more
light sources 100 having a slave status. Sometimes, a lighting system component having a status of a master controls one or more tasks, actions, functionalities or performances of any lighting system components having a slave status. In many embodiments, alighting system 100 component having a status of a master sends commands or instructions to one or morelight sources 100 having a slave status. In certain embodiments, alighting system 100 component having a status of a master adjusts performance or functionality of one or more components of thelighting system 100 components having a status of a slave. In many embodiments, alighting system 100 component having a status of a master assigns another component which used to have a status of a slave a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments, alighting system 100 component having a status of a master assigns a status of a slave to itself or anyother lighting system 100 component. In some embodiments, wherein all of lighting system components have a status of a slave, a status of a master is assigned to one of a plurality oflighting system 100 components by alighting system 100 component having a status of a slave. - Still referring to
FIG. 1A ,power supply 140 is illustrated as an independent lighting system component.Power supply 140 may be any component, device, apparatus or a source supplying one of, or any combination of: electrical current, voltage and power, to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments,power supply 140 performs any functionality and comprises any embodiments of apower supply 140A, and vice versa. In some embodiments,power supply 140 may be used interchangeably with power supply140 A. Power supply 140 may be a part of any lighting system components. In someembodiments power supply 140 is comprised by a lighting system component and it supplies any of or any combination of power, current or voltage to thelighting system 100 component. In a number of embodiments,power supply 140 is a subsystem of a lighting system component and it supplies power, current or voltage to a plurality of lighting system components. In many embodiments, power, current or voltage is transferred or supplied from apower supply 140 to one ormore lighting system 100 components via one ormore connections 105. In some embodiments,power supply 140 is an electrical outlet supplying electrical current, voltage or power to alighting system 100 component, such as a light source 110. In a plurality of embodiments,power supply 140 comprises a battery. In a number of embodiments,power supply 140 comprises a transformer. In many embodiments,power supply 140 is a device, system or a unit supplying an alternating current or a current changing through time to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In certain embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a constant current to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments,power supply 140 supplies an alternating power or a power changing through time to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a constant power to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments,power supply 140 supplies an alternating voltage or a voltage varying through time to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In certain embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a constant voltage to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a plurality of different power, voltage or source signals to one ormore lighting system 100 components. -
Power supply 140 may comprise any number of thelighting system 100 components or may be connected to or service any number oflighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,power supply 140 allows or enables the power to be transferred between a plurality of lighting system components. In certain embodiments,power supply 140 transmits, propagates or sends commands and communication to other components of thelighting system 100. In numerous embodiments,power supply 140 receives or accepts commands and communication from other components of thelighting system 100. In some embodiments,power supply 140 includes software, hardware, or any combination of software and hardware. In many embodiments,power supply 140 uses software, hardware or the combination of software and hardware to control, manage or supply power, electrical current or voltage to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments,power supply 140 utilizes any one of or any combination of hardware, circuitry, or software to supply, manage or control the flow of current, voltage or power to any one oflighting system 100 components.Power supply 140 may comprise any type or form of logic, electronic circuitry, logic operations or functions, software or hardware. In some embodiments,power supply 140 comprises any type and form of digital and/or analog circuitry, any device, system, unit or a program for performing any of the operations described herein. - In a number of embodiments,
power supply 140 supplies two alternating current signals to one ormore lighting system 100 components, first one of the two having a phase different than a second one of the two. In a number of embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a constant power signal to one or more lighting system components. In numerous embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a varying power signal to one or more lighting system components. In certain embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a constant current signal to one or more lighting system components. In a plurality of embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a constant voltage signal to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a varying current signal, to one or more lighting system components. In certain embodiments,power supply 140 supplies a varying voltage signal, to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments,power supply 140 supplies any combination of one or more alternate or constant current signals, alternate or constant voltage signals and alternate or constant power signals to one ormore lighting system 100 components. - In further reference to
FIG. 1A ,light source 110A may includes any of, or any combination of: acontroller 120, acommunicator 125, master/slave addressor 130 and apower supply 140. In many embodiments,communicator 125A oflight source 110A comprises anaddress 127A. In a plurality of embodiments,communicator 125A does not comprise anaddress 127A.Light source 110A, sometimes, comprises acontroller 120A which controls functionality, performance or features oflight source 110A or any other component within thelight source 110A. In many embodiments,light source 110A comprises acontroller 120A which controls one or more lighting system components. In many embodiments,controller 120A is anycontroller 120. In a plurality of embodiments,communicator 125A is anycommunicator 125. In a number of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A is any master/slave addressor 130. In a plurality of embodiments,power supply 140A is anypower supply 140. -
Communicator 125A is illustrated byFIG. 1A as a component oflight source 110A.Communicator 125A may communicate or enable communication with any other components of thelighting system 100. In a number of embodiments,communicator 125A is a unit or a device communicating with one ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,communicator 125A communicates to a plurality of components withinlight source 110A. In a number of embodiments,communicator 125A communicates to other systems or components within any other lighting system component, also referred to aslighting system 100 component.Communicator 125A, in some embodiments, is used for communication between any components within thelight source 110A or within any other lighting system component.Communicator 125A, in a number of embodiments, includes an address 127 used to uniquely identify alight source 110A in a network 110.Communicator 125A, in many embodiments, uses address 127 for communication between two or more lighting system components. In a number of embodiments,communicator 125A uses address 127 to distinguish which information out of a plurality of information reaching the light source 110 is intended for thelight source 110A. In a plurality of embodiments,communicator 125A comprises address 127 which is used for receiving or transmitting information, communication, commands or instructions between thecommunicator 125A and any lighting system component. In many embodiments,communicator 125A comprises address 127 which is used for receiving or transmitting information, communication, commands or instructions betweenlight source 110A and any other lighting system component. -
FIG. 1A also illustrates another component of alight source 110A, called a master/slave addressor 130A. A master/slave addressor 130A comprises any functionality of any master/slave addressor 130, and vice versa. In many embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A controls the status of thelight source 110A in relation to other lighting system components. In a number of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A receives an instruction from a lighting system component and sets a status of alight source 110A to master. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A receives an instruction from a lighting system component and sets a status of alight source 110A to a slave. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A sends an instruction to set a status of another lighting system component to a status of a master or a slave. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A receives an information from one of acontroller 120A,communicator 125A,power supply 140A or alight source 110A and sets a status of another lighting system component to a master or a slave. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A comprises any functionality or embodiments of acontroller 120, and vice versa. In a plurality of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A comprises any functionality or embodiments of acommunicator 125, and vice versa. In a number of embodiments, master/slave addressor 130A comprises any functionality or embodiments of apower supply 140, and vice versa. - In addition to
light source 110A,FIG. 1A also presentslight sources light source 110A vianetwork 104.Light source 110B includes acommunicator 125B, whilelight source 110C includescontroller 120C and anaddress 127C. Light source 110 may comprise any number of components of thelighting system 100. Some light sources 110 sometimes comprise all of components of thelighting system 100, while other light sources 110 do not comprise any of thelighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, light source 110 comprises a plurality of other light sources 110. In a number of embodiments, a light source 110 comprises an array of light sources 110. In many embodiments, any of thelighting system 100 components comprise any of the functionality or embodiments of anyother lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, any of thelighting system 100 components comprise any number of anyother lighting system 100 components. -
FIG. 1B uses a block diagram to illustrate other embodiments of environment of alighting system 100.FIG. 1B depicts alighting system 100 having alight source 110A andlight source 110B connected to each other and also connected to apower supply 140 viaconnections 105. Each light source 110 includes one ormore controllers 120 for controlling features or functionalities of the light source 110. Light sources 110 also includecommunicators 125 for communicating to other components of thelighting system 100 or other light sources 110. Thecommunicators 125 in each of the two light sources 110 include addresses 127. Addresses 127 comprised by lighting system components are be used, in many configurations, to uniquely identify communications directed to thespecific lighting system 100 components. A light source 110 also includes a master/slave addressor 130 for controlling the status of the light source in terms of control within a lighting system 110. Thepower supply 140 is connected to one or more light sources 110 and it may be used to provide power or electricity to each of the light sources 110 or any other component withinlighting system 100. Connections 115 connect one or more of components of thelighting system 100 and allow for the transfer of power or communication between the components of thelighting system 100. -
FIG. 1B presents a configuration involvinglight sources power supply 140. In many embodiments,controllers light sources light sources power supply 140. In some embodiments,light source 110A has anaddress 127A which is different fromaddress 127B oflight source 110B. In other embodiments,light source 110A has anaddress 127A which is different fromaddress 127B oflight source 110B. In a number of embodiments,light sources slave addressors light sources light source 110A having a master status adjusts the status of alight source 110B to a status of a master or a slave. In numerous embodiments,light source 110A having a master status controls, adjusts or modifies the functionality of alight source 110B having a status of a slave. In a number of embodiments,light source 110B having a master status adjusts the status of alight source 110A to a status of a master or a slave. In some embodiments,light source 110A having a master status controls, adjusts or modifies the functionality of alight source 110B having a status of a slave. In a number of embodiments,light source 110A having a master status controls, modifies, affects or governs functionality, performance or light emitted fromlight source 110B. In a plurality of embodiments,light source 110B has a status of master and alight source 110A has a status of a slave, andlight source 110B controls, modifies, affects or governs functionality, performance or light emitted fromlight source 110A. - Still referring to
FIG. 1B ,power supply 140 may sometimes comprise anaddress 127C which is different thanaddress 127A and address 127B. In a plurality of embodiments,address 127C ofpower supply 140 is used by thepower supply 140 to communicate withlight source address 127C is used for communication betweenlight sources power supply 140.Addresses 127C, for example, may be used to distinguish information, data or commands directed to thepower supply 140 from the information, data or commands directed tolight sources light sources power supply 140 are connected in any electrical connection configuration. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 components are connected in series, in parallel or in a combination of series and parallel configurations. In some embodiments, information transmitted between lighting system components comprises an address 127 of aspecific lighting system 100 component the transmitted information is intended for. In some embodiments,light sources power supply 140 are connected in series and information transmitted comprising an instruction, a command or data is accessible to all threelighting system 100 components while the address 127 within the information transmitted defines which of thelighting system 100 components is the information addressed to. - In some embodiments,
light source 110A transmits an information viaconnection 105 which connectslight source 110A withlight source 110B andpower supply 140. The information transmitted by thelight source 110A sometimes comprises instructions, commands, data and anaddress 127B. Thecommunicator 125B of thelight source 110B may receive theaddress 127B from the transmitted information and confirm that it matches withaddress 127B of thecommunicator 125B. Thecommunicator 125B, in response to the confirmed match, then may receive the entire transmitted information. - In many embodiments, master/
slave addressor 130 performs all functionality of acommunicator 125, or vice versa. In a number of embodiments, light source 110 performs all functionality of a master/slave addressor 130 or acommunicator 125, and vice versa. In a plurality of embodiments, anylighting system 100 components performs any functionality of anyother lighting system 100 component, and vice versa. In many embodiments, any subcomponent of alighting system 100 component performs any functionality of anyother lighting system 100 component, and vice versa. In certain embodiments, any subcomponent of alighting system 100 component performs any functionality of any other subcomponent of alighting system 100 component, and vice versa. - Referring now to
FIG. 1C embodiments of systems and methods for digital communication of lighting system components is illustrated.FIG. 1C presentslight sources connections 105.Connection 105 is illustrated as a shaded region within whichconnection 105 components are comprised. In some embodiments,connection 105 is a wire or a cable harness comprising an enclosure enclosing three separate wires or three electrical conducting lines. Each of the three separate wires or conducting lines may sometimes be referred to asconnection 105 components.FIG. 1C illustratesconnection 105 components:connection 105A,connection 105B andconnection 105C, as independent conducting lines propagating through theconnection 105.Connection 105, however, may also be a wireless communication link. In some embodiments,connection 105 is a wireless communication band comprising a number of wireless communication links Illustrated as separated from each other,connection 105 components are shown as electrically insulated from each other or mutually independent. In some embodiments, however,connection 105 components are not electrically insulated from each other and are not mutually independent.FIG. 1C depictsconnection 105A marked with a bold line, aconnection 105B with a dashed line and aconnection 105C illustrated with a thin non-dashed line. Herein, theterms connections term connection 105 components may sometimes be used interchangeably. - One or
more connections 105 may be used as means for transmitting communication between a plurality of lighting system components, such aslight sources connections 105 connect all of the lighting system components within alighting system 100. In a number of embodiments, one ormore connection 105 components, such asconnections more lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments, allconnection 105 components connect two ormore lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments, allconnection 105 components connect all of thelighting system 100 components. In many embodiments,connection 105 comprises any number ofconnection 105 components connecting any number oflighting system 100 components. - Sometimes,
connection 105 components transmit electrical current, voltage or power between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,connection 105 comprises one ormore connection 105 components transmitting information or communication between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments,connection 105 comprises one ormore connection 105 components which serve as mediums or means for delivering, supplying or transmitting electrical current, power or voltage to one or more lighting system components. In some embodiments,connection 105 comprises one ormore connection 105 components which serve as mediums or means for delivering, supplying or transmitting information transmitted between thelighting system 100 components. -
Connection 105 components, such asconnections more connection 105 components are means through which electrical power is delivered to alighting system 100 component along with analog or digital information or communication. In a plurality of embodiments, two or more lighting system components are connected to each other via one ormore connections 105 or one or more components ofconnections 105. In some embodiments,connection 105 components are means, paths or mediums through which electrical power, voltage or current is transmitted to a group oflighting system 100 components. Sometimes,connection 105 components are means, paths or mediums through which electrical power, voltage, current or information is transmitted to alighting system 100. In a number of embodiments, one ormore connection 105 components are means, paths or mediums through which analog or digital information is transmitted between the two or more lighting system components. Theconnection 105 components may also comprise means, paths or mediums through which wireless information is transmitted between the two or more lighting system components. - In some embodiments,
light source 110A comprises apower supply 140 andlight source 110A provides electrical power tolight source 110B via one ormore connection 105 components. In a number of embodiments,light source 110A supplies power tolight source 110B viaconnections connection 105C. In a some embodiments,light source 110A supplies power tolight source 110B viaconnections light source 110B. In a plurality of embodiments,light source 110A communicates withlight source 110C andlight source 110B viaconnection 105C. In a number of embodiments,light source 110A provides electrical power tolight sources connections light sources connection 105C. In a number of embodiments,light source 110A provides electrical power tolight sources connections light sources connection 105C. In many embodiments, any one or more oflight sources light sources connections light sources connections - In a plurality of embodiments,
light source 110A comprises apower supply 140 and provideslight sources connections light source 110A comprises apower supply 140 and provides electrical power and communication tolight sources connections light source 110A comprises apower supply 140 and provideslight sources connections light source 110A communicates withlight sources connections light source 110B, comprising apower supply 140, provideslight sources connections light source 110A communicates withlight sources connections light sources light sources connections light sources connections -
FIG. 1D presents an embodiment ofconnection 105 comprisingconnection 105 components used for transmission of electrical power and digital data.FIG. 1D illustrates alight source 110A having acontroller 120A, acommunicator 125A with anaddress 127A and amaster slave 130A.Light source 110A is connected to byconnection 105 which comprisesconnection 105A,connection 105B andconnection 105C.Connection 105A is also labeled as VAC or V+.Connection 105B is also labeled Ground, which can sometimes be referred to as electrical ground or a ground potential wire.Connection 105C, in many cases, may be labeled as a neutral, a control, or a control line. -
Connection 105A, may sometimes be used for transmitting or propagating alternate voltage or voltage varying through time. Sometimes,connection 105 is also used for transmitting or propagating alternate current or power or current or power varying through time.Connection 105A, in some embodiments, is used for transmission or propagation of a constant voltage which is positive relative to ground. In such cases, theconnection 105A may be labeled V+. In a number of embodiments,connection 105A is also used for transmission or propagation of a negative voltage potential relative to ground. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105A is a medium through which constant power, constant current or constant voltage are propagated or transmitted.Connection 105B is also labeled Ground, and is sometimes used for transmission or propagation of electrical ground or a ground potential. In some embodiments,connection 105 B is used for same purposes asconnection 105A. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105 B is used for grounding and has a zero voltage potential relative to ground. In many embodiments,connection 105B is a medium through which alternate voltage or constant voltage, alternate or constant current or alternate or constant power signals are propagated or transmitted.Connection 105C is sometimes used as a neutral wire which may have any potential relative to ground, or zero potential relative to ground.Connection 105C is sometimes used as a control wire or a control line which may have any potential relative to ground, or not have any potential relative to ground. In some embodiments,connection 105C is a control line used as a medium through whichlighting system 100 components send information, controls, signals, commands or instructions among each other. In some embodiments,connection 105C performs all the functionality ofconnection 105A. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105C performs all the functionality ofconnection 105B. -
Connection 105C is sometimes used for transmission or propagation of electronic signals. In some embodiments,connection 105C is a medium or a means for transmitting or propagating a digital electronic signal. In various embodiments,connection 105C is a control line connecting two or more light sources 110 or any other lighting system components. Sometimes,connection 105C is a wireless communication link between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In a number of embodiments,connection 105C is a control line or a control wire connecting two ormore lighting system 100 components. In a number of embodiments,connection 105C is a control line used as a medium through which information, instructions, signals or commands are propagated between two ormore lighting system 100 components. In a plurality of embodiments,connection 105C is a medium or means for transmitting or propagating an analog electronic signal. - In many embodiments,
connection 105C is a medium through which digital or analog information or data is transmitted or propagated. Digital data sometimes comprises a high voltage level and a low voltage level which defines communication transmitted as binary values of 1 or 0, respectively. In some embodiments, a signal comprises a high value, or a 1, which is defined by a predetermined threshold having a predetermined voltage value. The voltage of the signal may cross above the voltage value of the predetermined threshold resulting in the signal having a high value, or a value of 1. In some embodiments, a signal comprises a low value, or a 0, which is defined by a predetermined threshold having a predetermined voltage value. The voltage of the signal may cross below the voltage value of the predetermined threshold resulting in the signal having a low value, or a value of 0. In some embodiments, a signal has only one threshold value defining a low and a high value of the signal, the signals below the threshold value being low, or 0, and signals above the threshold value being high, or 1. In a number of embodiments, digital data transmitted viaconnection 105C comprises digital representation of bits. In a plurality of embodiments, digital data transmitted throughconnection 105C comprises digital representation of pluralities of bits or bytes. In a number of embodiments, digital data transmitted viaconnection 105C comprises square waves, wherein the low value of the square wave equals the low voltage value and the high value of the square wave equals a high voltage value. In many embodiments, digital data transmitted viaconnection 105C comprises square waves wherein the low value of the square wave equals zero volts and the high value of the square wave equals any positive voltage value, such as three volts or five volts, for example. -
Connection 105 may comprise anynumber connection 105 components, such asconnection connection 105 components of theconnection 105 may be a wire, a conductor line, a wireless link, a frequency range for a wireless signal, a fiber optic or any other medium capable of transmitting a signal. Any one of theconnection 105 components may comprise a control signal or a return for a control signal. In some embodiments, aconnection 105 component is a control line. Sometimes, aconnection 105 component is a return line. Sometimes, aconnection 105 is a differential line wherein one line of theconnection 105 comprises a voltage above a certain threshold and another line of theconnection 105 comprises a voltage below a certain threshold. In some embodiments,connection 105 comprises any number ofconnection 105 components which may be dedicated to transmitting any one or any number of signals from any components oflighting system 100. - Digital data, such as
data bits 215 may be generated using any device capable of generating signals. Sometimes, acontroller 120 or acommunicator 125 generates signals which are transmitted toother lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments, acontroller 120 receives or processes signals from other devices 110 and generates or sends signals to other devices 110. In a plurality of embodiments, acommunicator 125 receives or processes from other devices 110 and generates or sends signals to other devices 110. In some embodiments, digital data may be generated using a phase control dimmer for example. In a number of embodiments, a device generating a pulsed waveform may be combined with a circuitry clipping top portions of the waveform and creating digital bits using portions of the clipped waveform. In many embodiments, a device producing a square-wave waveform may be used in conjunction with an electronic circuit which controls or adjusts the waveform to produce bits of digital signal, such asdata bits 215 for example. Digital data may be produced or generated using any electronic signal generating device providing means for generating a digital signal having high values corresponding to digital value of 1 (one) and low values corresponding to a digital value of a 0 (zero). In some embodiments, digital signal having high and low values may resemble a square wave having sharp edges. In other embodiments, digital signal may comprise portions of waveforms having rounded edges. - In some embodiments,
connection 105C is a medium through which pulse width modulated information is propagated. In a number of embodiments,connection 105C is a medium through which pulse code modulated data is propagated or transmitted. In many embodiments,connection 105C is a medium through which pulse density modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In a number of embodiments,connection 105C is a medium through which pulse amplitude modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In some embodiments,connection 105C is a medium through which pulse position modulated data is transmitted or propagated. In many embodiments,connection 105C is a medium through which sigma delta modulated data is transmitted or propagated.Connection 105C may be used as a medium through which any type of an electronic or electrical signal is propagated. The propagated signal may be a digital signal of any modulation, such as frequency or phase modulation, amplitude modulation, pulse width modulation or any other type of modulation available. In some embodiments, any one ofconnections other connection 105 or anyother connection 105 component, such asconnections - Referring now to
FIG. 2A , an embodiment of communication betweendevices FIG. 2A depictsdevices light sources connection 105.Connection 105 may be used bylight sources light sources FIG. 2A also illustrates a signal transmitted and represented asdata 210.Data 210 may be transmitted via aconnection 105 and may comprise a plurality ofdata bits 215. In some instances, active portions of the signal, such asdata bits 215 having high values may define a duty cycle of the signal.Data 210 illustrated inFIG. 2A comprises fivedata bits 215 having high values grouped together.Time Interval 205, also referred to as aperiod 205, is a time interval within which portions ofdata 210 are transmitted viacommunication 105.FIG. 2A presents an embodiment showing twotime intervals 205, eachtime interval 205, also known asperiod 205, having a group ofdata 210 comprising an equal amount ofbits 215 having a high value. Amount of bits transmitted within eachtime interval 205 may vary between different embodiments or different applications. -
Data 210 may be any information, communication, instruction or data transmitted viaconnection 105. In some embodiments,data 210 comprises a digital signal. In a plurality of embodiments,data 210 comprises an analog signal. In some embodiment,data 210 comprises a mix of an analog or a digital signal. In a number of embodiments,data 210 comprises a square wave signal. In many embodiments,data 210 comprises a pulse. In some embodiments,data 210 comprises a pulse width modulated signal or data. In a plurality of embodiments,data 210 comprises a pulse amplitude modulated data or signal. In some embodiments, thedata 210 is a wirelessly communicated digital data. In numerous embodiments,data 210 comprises data which is encoded using a binary system and comprises only high values and low values. In some embodiments, high value corresponds to a square-shaped signal whose peak is flat over a period of time and has a value of voltage which is higher than a square-shaped signal of a low value. In a number of embodiments, low value corresponds to a square-shaped wave whose lowest point is flat over a period of time and has a value of voltage which is lower than a square-shaped signal of a high value. - Duty cycle of a signal may be any ratio or fraction of a
time interval 205 in an active state. The active state may be any state of bits ofdata 210 or any portions of the signal which may have high values or low values. In some embodiments, active state comprises bits ofdata 210 having high values, or values equivalent to digital value of 1. In other embodiments, active state comprises bits ofdata 210 having low values, or values equivalent to digital value of 0. Duty cycle may be a ratio of a portion of atime interval 205 for which the signal comprises high values, such as a digital value of 1, to a duration of that same thewhole time interval 205. For example, a duty cycle for atime interval 205 of 1 millisecond may be a ratio of a fraction of theperiod 205 for whichdata bits 210 have a value of 1, e.g. for which the signal is high, to the whole duration period of thetime interval 205, e.g. 1 millisecond. In some embodiments, duty cycle is a ratio oftime interval 205 for which the signal has low values, or values of 0, to the entire duration of the wholesame time interval 205. In another example, a duty cycle for atime interval 205 of 1 millisecond may be a ratio of a fraction of theperiod 205 for whichdata bits 210 have a value of 0, e.g. for which the signal is low, to the whole duration period of thetime interval 205, e.g. 1 millisecond. In a number of embodiments,data 210 comprises bits or portions of signal having high values within atime interval 205, and the bits or portions of signal having high values within thetime interval 205 define a duty cycle of the signal or a duty cycle of thetime interval 205. Sometimes,data 210 comprises bits or portions of signal having low values within atime interval 205, and the bits or portions of signal having low values within thetime interval 205 define a duty cycle of the signal or a duty cycle of thetime interval 205. In some embodiments, duty cycle of a signal within atime interval 205 is defined by a total amount of bits or portions of the signal having high values and transmitted with thetime interval 205, regardless if the portions are separated or bunched together. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal within atime interval 205 is defined by a total amount of bits or portions of the signal having low values and transmitted with thetime interval 205, regardless if the portions are separated or bunched together. The duty cycle may include a ratio of a duration of aperiod 205 for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of theentire period 205. The duty cycle of aperiod 205 may further include an average value of the signal within theperiod 205. - In a number of embodiments,
data 210 is transmitted viaconnection 105 in respect to thetime interval 205. Sometimes,time interval 205 is a predetermined period of time within which a communication or an information comprising a specified amount of data bits is transmitted over aconnection 105. In some embodiments,time interval 205, also referred to asperiod 205, is a period of time within which a communication or an information comprising an unspecified amount of data bits is transmitted over aconnection 105. In a number of embodiments,data 210 is a predetermined amount of data transmitted betweenlight source 110A andlight source 110B within a time range defined by theperiod 205. In many embodiments,data 210 is an amount of data having a predetermined amount of bits having a high or a low value transmitted throughconnection 105 within a time range defined by aperiod 205. In a plurality of embodiments,data 210 transmitted betweendevices time intervals 205. In many embodiments,data 210 having portions having a high value may remain constant through a plurality oftime intervals 205. In many embodiments,data 210 transmitted betweendevices first period 205 is different thandata 210 transmitted betweenlight sources second period 205. In some embodiments,data 210 transmitted betweenlight sources connection 105 has a constant amount of bits through plurality ofperiods 205. Sometimes,data 210 transmitted betweendevices connection 105 has a constant amount of bits having a high value through plurality ofperiods 205. In a number of embodiments,data 210 transmitted betweendevices connection 105 has a constant amount of bits having a low value through plurality ofperiods 205. In a number of embodiments,data 210 transmitted betweendevices connection 105 comprises an amount of bits transmitted within afirst period 205 which is different than the amount of bits transmitted within asecond period 205.Data 210 transmitted betweendevices first time interval 205 different than the amount of bits having a high value transmitted within asecond time interval 205. Similarly,data 210 transmitted betweendevices first time interval 205 different than the amount of bits having a low value transmitted within asecond time interval 205. - In a number of embodiments,
time interval 205, or aperiod 205, is a predetermined period or a duration of time. In a plurality of embodiments,period 205 is constant period or a duration of time. In many embodiments,period 205 is a changing or undetermined period of time. In many embodiments,period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined bydata 210. In a plurality of embodiments,period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by one ormore data bits 215. In many embodiments,period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined bylight source 110A. In some embodiments,period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined bylight source 110B. In many embodiments,period 205 is period of time or a duration of time determined by anylighting system 100 component. In a plurality of embodiments,period 205 is a period of time or a duration of time determined by a clock or a circuit. In some embodiments,period 205 is a period of time within which a predetermined amount of information such as one ormore bits 215 is transmitted. - In a number of embodiments,
lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal determinesperiod 205 based on the statistics ofprevious periods 205. In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal anticipates anext period 205 based on the duration of aprevious period 205. In many embodiments,lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal anticipates aperiod 205 based on an algorithm which uses durations ofprevious periods 205 to determine thenext period 205. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 component receiving information or a signal anticipates aperiod 205 based on a weighted statistics of recently arrivedperiods 205 or cycles of information. In many embodiments, one ormore lighting system 100 components maintains statistics such as average data bits perperiod 205, tolerance for variation of aperiod 205, or duration ofperiods 205. In some embodiments,statistics relating periods 205 ordata bits 215 maintained by one ormore lighting system 100 components are used to anticipate or predict thenext period 205. - In some embodiments,
time interval 205, or aperiod 205, is a period of time determined by an event or a signal. In a plurality of embodiments, afirst period 205 is immediately followed by asecond period 205 and a time duration of thefirst period 205 is different from a time duration of thesecond period 205. In many embodiments, afirst period 205 is immediately followed by asecond period 205 and a time duration of thefirst period 205 is the same as the time duration of thesecond period 205. In a number of embodiments, a number ofdata bits 215 transmitted viaconnection 105 within aperiod 205 is predetermined. In a plurality of embodiments, a number ofdata bits 215 transmitted within afirst period 205 is same as a number ofdata bits 215 transmitted within asecond period 205, the second period immediately following the first. In many embodiments, a number ofdata bits 215 transmitted within afirst period 205 is different from a number ofdata bits 215 transmitted within asecond period 205, the second period immediately following the first. In some embodiments, time duration ofperiod 205 in afirst connection 105 component, such asconnection 105B, is different from a time duration of aperiod 205 in asecond connection 105 component, such asconnection 105C. In many embodiments, time duration of aperiod 205 relating an information transmitted by afirst connection 105 component is the same as a time duration of aperiod 205 relating an information transmitted by asecond connection 105 component. In some embodiments, one ormore connection 105 components do not have aperiod 205. - Referring now to
FIG. 2B another embodiment of communication betweendevices FIG. 2B presentsdevices connection 105.Connection 105 is used by thedevices light sources FIG. 2B also illustratesdata 210 transmitted viaconnection 105. In comparison to the embodiment illustrated byFIG. 2A , the embodiments illustrated inFIG. 2B showsdata bits 215 spread out through the time interval, or theperiod 205.Time intervals 205 and an amount of 215 data bits having a high value in eachtime interval 205 remain the same in the embodiments depictedFIG. 2A andFIG. 2B , illustrating a same or a similar duty cycle for both embodiments. Somedata bits 215, however, are also marked asinstruction bits 220, and may be used for a variety of communication related purposes, such as instructions or commands. - Still referring to
FIG. 2B ,data bits 215 are spread out through theperiod 205.First period 205, in some embodiments, comprisesdata bits 215 spaced out differently thandata bits 215 insecond period 205, thesecond period 205 immediately following thefirst period 205. In many embodiments,first period 205 comprisesdata bits 215 having a high or a low value spaced out differently thandata bits 215 insecond period 205 having a high or a low value, thesecond period 205 immediately following thefirst period 205. When two periods comprise a same amount ofdata bits 215 having a high value, which includesinstruction bits 220, then the two periods may have a same duty cycle. Similarly, when two periods comprise a same amount ofdata bits 215 having a low value, which includesinstruction bits 220, then the two periods may also have a same duty cycle. - Sometimes,
data bits 215 may be transmitted within a specific time range withinperiod 205. In many embodiments, somedata bits 215 having a high or a low value are transmitted outside of a specific time range withinperiod 205 andother data bits 215 are transmitted within the specific time range withinperiod 205. In a plurality of embodiments,data bits 215 having a high or a low value are transmitted outside of a specific time range withinperiod 205. In many embodiments, a specific time range withinperiod 205 is predetermined by anylighting system 100 component. In a plurality of embodiments, a specific time range is always within a same time period for anyperiod 205. In many embodiments, a specific time range within a first 205 period is within a different time period than a second specific time range of a second 205 period, thesecond period 205 immediately following thefirst period 205. - Referring now to
FIG. 2A andFIG. 2B together, combinations of two embodiments of communication betweenlight sources FIG. 2A data bits 215 having a high value are sequentially combined together anddata 210 therefore resembles a periodic square wave having high value during a first portion ofperiod 205 and a low value during the remainder ofperiod 205. In some embodiments, afirst bit 215, which may or may not beinstruction bit 220, ofdata 210 withinperiod 205 triggers or causes theperiod 205 to start. In many embodiments, afirst bit 215, which may or may not beinstruction bit 220, ofdata 210 withinperiod 205 is aligned withperiod 205. In some embodiments, one ormore lighting system 100 components uses thefirst bit 215 ofdata 210 withinperiod 205 to define the beginning of anew period 205. In a number of embodiments, one ormore lighting system 100 components uses thelast bit 215 ofdata 210 withinperiod 205 to define beginning or end ofperiod 205. In many embodiments, one or more lighting system components uses one ormore bits 215 ofperiod 205 to define a specific part ofperiod 205. In some embodiments, communication or information between one or more lighting system components is transmitted within the specific part ofperiod 205 defined by one ormore bits 215 ofperiod 205. In embodiments in whichdata 210 ordata bits periods - In a plurality of embodiments, one or
more lighting system 100 components use one ormore bits data 210 within aperiod 205 to synchronize communication, transmission of communication or information transmitted viaconnection 105. In many embodiments, one ormore lighting system 100 components use one ormore bits data 210 within aperiod 205 to specify a timing withinperiod 205 within which communication or information between two ormore lighting system 100 components is transmitted. In a plurality of embodiments, one ormore lighting system 100 components communicate information within a part of aperiod 205 which is defined by one ormore bits data 210 within theperiod 205. In many embodiments, one ormore bits period 205 are used to identify a specific time period within any of a plurality of 205 periods, wherein the specific time period is a period within which communication between two ormore lighting system 100 components takes place. In some embodiments, one ormore bits period 205 are used to identify a specific time period within any of a plurality of concatenated 205 periods. The specific time period is sometimes designated for communication between two ormore lighting system 100 components. -
FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate an embodiment wherein information relating intensity oflight sources connection 105. In some embodiments,light source 110A is sending information, status, instruction or command tolight source 110B regarding intensity of light emitted bylight source 110A. In many embodiments, light source 110 may be sending any information including information relating: humidity of a room, temperature of a light source 110, temperature of a room, presence of a person in a room, intensity of a light, color of a light or more. In many embodiments,light source 110A is sending information, status, instruction or command tolight source 110B regarding intensity or color of light emitted bylight source 110B. In a some embodiments,light source 110B is sending information, status, instruction or command tolight source 110A regarding temperature or any other characteristic relating specifically tolight source 110A. In many embodiments,light source 110B is sending information, status, instruction or command tolight source 110A regarding intensity of light emitted bylight source 110B. - In some embodiments,
FIG. 2A depicts an embodiment whereinlight source 110B is sending five 215 bits having a high value or a value of 1, to light source 110. The five 215 bits communicated withinperiod 205 having a high value, in some embodiments, specifies an amount of intensitylight source 110A should emit. In many embodiments, the amount ofbits 215 within aperiod 205 having a high value, or a value of 1, is proportional to the intensity of light to be emitted. In a number of embodiments, an instruction comprising an amount ofbits 215 having a high value of a value of 1, within aperiod 205 specifies an intensity a light source 110 receiving the instruction should emit. In a number of embodiments, the higher the proportion ofbits 215 having a high value within aperiod 205, the higher the intensity of the light to be emitted. In a plurality of embodiments, an amount of bits transmitted bylight source 110B to lightsource 110A signifies an instruction forlight source 110A to emit a specific intensity of light as specified by the amount ofbits light source 110B to lightsource 110A signify an instruction forlight source 110A to emit a specific intensity of light as specified by the bits transmitted. - In many embodiments, a total amount of
bits 215 having a high value within aperiod 205, transmitted bylight source 110B to lightsource 110A, is an instruction forlight source 110A to emit. In many embodiments, a total amount ofbits 215 having a low value within aperiod 205, transmitted bylight source 110B to lightsource 110A, is an instruction forlight source 110A to emit. In a plurality of embodiments, amount ofdata bits 215 having a value of 1 within aperiod 205 transmitted bylight source 110B indicates or signifies intensity oflight source 110A. In some embodiments, amount ofdata bits 215 having a value of 0 within aperiod 205 transmitted bylight source 110B indicates or signifies the intensity oflight source 110A. - In
FIG. 2A light source 110B transmits fivebits 215 within eachperiod 205, wherein the five bits specifies intensity with whichlight source 110A should emit light.FIG. 2A also illustrates fivebits 215 ofdata 210 withinperiod 205 positioned at the beginning of eachperiod 205. In many embodiments, allbits 215 positioned at the beginning ofperiod 205 specify intensity of light but do not carry any additional information. In a number of embodiments, fivebits 215 positioned at the beginning ofperiod 205 specify the beginning of aperiod 205. - In
FIG. 2B , fivebits 215 are spread out withinperiod 205, wherein first twobits 215 are at the beginning of eachperiod 205 and remainingbits 215, also referred to asinstruction bits 220, are spread out within a latter portion ofperiod 205. In many embodiments, wherein theinstruction bits 220 are spread out within a latter portion ofperiod 205, theinstruction bits 220 signify information which is not related to intensity of light. In many embodiments, wherein theinstruction bits 220 are spread out within a latter portion ofperiod 205, theinstruction bits 220 signify information which are related to intensity of light as well as another information transmitted to the lighting system component. In a plurality of embodiments, wherein theinstruction bits 220 are spread out within a latter portion ofperiod 205, theinstruction bits 220 signify an instruction to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In many embodiments, wherein theinstruction bits 220 are spread out within a latter portion ofperiod 205, theinstruction bits 220 are information transmitted to onemore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments,instruction bits 220 arebits 215 spread out through any part or portion of aperiod 205. In many embodiments,instruction bits 220 arebits 215 performing a specific task. In a variety of embodiments,instruction bits 220 arebits 215 aredata 210 emitted by alighting system 100 component which sends an information within a specific time frame withinperiod 205. In many embodiments,instruction bits 220 aredata 210 emitted within any one or more sections or portions ofperiod 205. - In many embodiments,
data bits 215 spread out within a latter portion ofperiod 205 are referred to as theinstruction bits 220. In a number of embodiments,data bits 215 spread out within a first portion ofperiod 205 are referred to as theinstruction bits 220.Instruction bits 220, in some embodiments form an address of alighting system 100 component. In many embodiments,instruction bits 220 form a command or an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to change status from master to slave. In a plurality of embodiments,instruction bits 220 are a part of an instruction or a command addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to change status from slave to master. In many embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component relating control of thespecific lighting system 100 component. In a number of embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to change a spectral range of light emitted. - In a plurality of embodiments,
instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to change, adjust or amend intensity of light emitted. In some embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to maintain or confirm intensity of light emitted. In many embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to adjust address 127 of thelighting system 100 component. In numerous embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to turn thelighting system 100 component on. In some embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to start emitting light. In numerous embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to turn thelighting system 100 component off. In some embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to stop emitting light. In numerous embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an instruction addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to turn thelighting system 100 component on. In some embodiments,instruction bits 220 form an information, instruction or command addressed to aspecific lighting system 100 component to perform a task, an action or an adjustment of any kind. - In some embodiments,
instruction bits 220 are positioned in a very first portion ofperiod 205. In many embodiments,instruction bits 220 are positioned in central or middle portion ofperiod 205. In a number of embodiments,instruction bits 220 are positioned in last or final portion ofperiod 205. In numerous embodiments,instruction bits 220 are transmitted within any portion ofperiod 205 or within a plurality of portions ofperiod 205. In a number of embodiments, the portion ofperiod 205 within whichinstruction bits 220 are transmitted remains the same for allperiods 205. In many embodiments, the portion ofperiod 205 within which instruction bits 22 are transmitted varies betweenperiods 205. -
FIG. 2A andFIG. 2B also illustrate how alighting system 100 component, in some embodiments, maintains a same light intensity regardless of whetherdata 210 is in a group or dispersed throughperiod 205. As illustrated byFIG. 2A , in some embodiments,light source 110B transmits an amount ofdata bits 215 having a high value within aperiod 205 tolight source 110A to indicate a light intensitylight source 110A should emit light with. In some embodiments, as illustrated byFIG. 2B ,light source 110B transmits the same amount ofdata bits 215 having a high value within theperiod 205 as inFIG. 2A , while transmittinginstruction bits 220 further specifying additional information to lightsource 110A. In such embodiments,light source 110B is sometimes a master sending instructions to a slavelight source 110A.Light source 110B, in some embodiments, maintains the same intensity oflight source 110A while sending additional information to lightsource 110A. The additional information may be any information, such as instructions, commands, settings, calibrations, tasks, actions, statuses or any other informationlight sources - In some embodiments, it is a position of
data bits 220, orinstruction bits 220, in relation to theperiod 205 which defines the instruction or information transmitted byinstruction bits 220. In a number of embodiments,instruction bits 220 form or define a digital instruction, such as a digital number, a digital sequence of values or a digital value pattern. In a plurality of embodiments, information comprisesdata bits 215 which are notinstruction bits 220, whereindata bits 215 are positioned within a specific portion ofperiod 205 and signify intensity of light to be emitted by light source 110 receiving the information. In numerous embodiments,data bits 215 which are notinstruction bits 220, transmitted within aperiod 205 and comprising bothbits 215 andbits 220, form or define information relating intensity of light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the information. In many embodiments, information relating intensity of light to be emitted by the light source 110 is a command or an instruction indicating the intensity of light the light source 110 will emit. In some embodiments, information relating intensity of light to be emitted by the light source 110 is a command or an instruction indicating to turn light source 110 on or off. In some embodiments,instruction bits 220 form or define an information or instruction which is different from an instruction relating intensity of light for alighting system 100 device. - In some embodiments, information transmitted by
data bits 215 is digital communication information. In a number of embodiments, information transmitted byinstruction bits 220 is digital communication information. In a plurality of embodiments,data bits 215 comprise digital communication. In many embodiments,data bits 215 comprise one or more digital values of 0's and 1's. In many embodiments,bits 215 are digital communication wherein digital value of 1 is marked by a square wave having a height signifying a digital value of 1 and a square wave having a lack of height signifying a digital value of 0. In many embodiments, height of the square wave is defined by a voltage signal, such as a voltage step or a voltage impulse. In a plurality of embodiments,data bits 215 are digital communication wherein digital value of 0 is marked by a square-like wave having a height and a digital value of 0 is marked by a lack of a square-like wave. In a plurality of embodiments, high to low transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies adata bit 210, abit 215 or abit 220. In a number of embodiments, low to high transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies adata bit 210, abit 215 orbit 220. In a plurality of embodiments, a missing, or a lack of, high to low transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies adata bit 210, abit 215 or abit 220. In a number of embodiments, a missing, or a lack of, low to high transition of a digital communication, a wave or an electronic signal indicates or signifies adata bit 210, abit 215 orbit 220. - Duty cycle of
period 205, in some embodiments, is defined as amount ofdata bits 215 having a value of 1 within aperiod 205. Duty cycle ofperiod 205, in other embodiments, is defined as amount ofdata bits 215 having a value of 0 within aperiod 205. Duty cycle ofperiod 205, in many embodiments, is defined as amount ofdata bits 215 having any value. In many embodiments, duty cycle ofperiod 205 signifies or defines intensity light source 110 should emit light with. In a number of embodiments,light source 110B with a master status transmits information tolight source 110A with a slave status, wherein duty cycle ofperiod 205 of the transmitted information signal, signifies or defines intensity instructions forlight source 110A.Light source 110A, in some embodiments, in response to the duty cycle ofperiod 205 of the transmitted information signal adjusts, changes or amends intensity of the light emitted.Light source 110A, in a number of embodiments, in response to the duty cycle ofperiod 205 of the transmitted information signal maintains or remains unchanged intensity of the light emitted. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is related to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the signal or the information. In a plurality of embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is proportional to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the signal or the information. In many embodiments, duty cycle of a signal or an information is inversely proportional to the intensity of the light to be emitted by a light source 110 receiving the signal or the information. - In some embodiments, a duty cycle may be comprised within a time interval of a signal transmitted between two or more lighting system components. The duty cycle within a time interval may be ratio or a fraction of a duration of time within which signal has a certain value to the entire duration of the
time interval 205. In some embodiments, the duty cycle is a duration of time within atime interval 205 for which the signal has high values, such as adigital value 1 in digital signals for example, over the entire duration of thetime interval 205. In some embodiments, duty cycle is a fraction of time within atime interval 205 for which the signal has a high value over the entire duration of thetime interval 205. The duty cycle within a time interval, in some embodiments, may be ratio or a fraction of a time within atime interval 205 for which signal is low values, such as adigital value 0 in digital signals for example, over the entire duration of thetime interval 205. In some embodiments, duty cycle is a fraction of time within atime interval 205 for which the signal has a low value over the entire duration of thetime interval 205. Sometimes, the duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions. Sometimes, each of the portions of the plurality of portions of the duty cycle of the signal may further comprise a duration of the duty cycle. In some embodiments, a duty cycle of a time interval may be a ratio of total amount of time for which the signal within thetime interval 205 was high to thetotal time interval 205 duration. For example, a duty cycle may comprise a duration of time within which a plurality of separateddata bits 215 having high values are dispersed within atime interval 205 and separated from each other by portions oftime interval 205 which does not comprise high values. Therefore, a duty cycle may be the duty cycle of theentire time interval 205, regardless of the number of portions of time within thetime interval 205 for which signal was high or low and regardless of whether the signal having certain values is separated by portions of the signal having certain other values. - In some embodiments, a length of a
period 205 is adjusted to modulate intensity of a light source 110 receiving the information. In a number of embodiments, a length of a preceding or a succeedingperiod 205 is adjusted to modulate intensity of a light source 110 receiving the information. Sometimes, an instruction in apreceding period 205 causes a duty cycle of thepreceding period 205 to temporarily increase the light intensity. In such embodiments, aperiod 205 succeeding thepreceding period 205 is adjusted to compensate for the duty cycle in thepreceding period 205 and maintain intensity or brightness of light to be emitted unchanged. In many embodiments, an instruction in apreceding period 205 causes the duty cycle of thepreceding period 205 to temporarily decrease the light intensity. In such embodiments, aperiod 205 succeeding thepreceding period 205 is adjusted to compensate for the duty cycle in thepreceding period 205 and adjust the duty cycle in the succeedingperiod 205 to maintain intensity or brightness of light to be emitted unchanged or as intended. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 component transmitting or sending information or communication to anotherlighting system 100 component maintains a queue of data to be sent. In a number of embodiments,period 205 or amount ofdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 is adjusted or changed to compensate for the information queued. - In a plurality of embodiments,
lighting system 100 comprises one ormore lighting system 100 components, such as light source 110, receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding information transmitted viadata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. In many embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises one ormore lighting system 100 components not receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding information transmitted viadata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises one ormore lighting system 100 components receiving, reading, interpreting or understanding duty cycle of aperiod 205. In many embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which in response to understanding duty cycle ofperiod 205 adjust intensity of the one or more light sources 110. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 comprises one or more light sources 110 which in response to understanding duty cycle ofperiod 205 maintain intensity of the one or more light sources 110. -
FIG. 2A andFIG. 2B , in some respect, illustrate embodiments of alighting system 100 wherein duty cycle within any of a plurality of concatenatedperiods 205 remains equal with or withoutinstruction bits 220. In such embodiments,light source 110B controls intensity oflight source 110A by transmitting within any period 205 a duty cycle having a specific time duration. Time duration of a duty cycle may be defined or specified by a number of bits, number of bits having avalue 1 or avalue 0. In some embodiments, time duration of a duty cycle is defined or specified by a number of bits transmitted within aperiod 205. In many embodiments, time duration of a duty cycle is defined or specified by a number of bits having a value of 1 transmitted within aperiod 205. In some embodiments, communication or information transmitted using a duty cycle may be referred to as pulse width modulation. - Referring now to
FIG. 3 , a flow chart of a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal is illustrated. In some embodiments,FIG. 3 also relates to a method for communicating between devices using a duty cycle of a signal while a device maintains operation which is responsive to the duty cycle. In brief overview ofmethod 300, at step 305 a first device receives a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval. The duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions and each of which may further comprise a duration of the duty cycle. Atstep 310 the first device operates responsive to the duty cycle. Atstep 315 the first device detects an instruction identified by at least one portion of the duty cycle. Atstep 320 the first device performs a function based on the instruction while the first device maintains operating responsive to the duty cycle. Atstep 325 the first device receives a second signal comprising a second duty cycle within a second time interval. The second duty cycle of the second signal may comprise a plurality of portions and each of the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle of the second signal may further comprise a duration of the second duty cycle. Atstep 330 the first device operates responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal. Atstep 335 the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a second instruction. Atstep 340 the first device performs, responsive to the detection, a function based on the second instruction while maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle of the second signal. - At
step 305 of the method 300 a first device receives a signal comprising a duty cycle within a time interval. In some embodiments, the first device receives a signal from a second device 110. In many embodiments, the first device receives a plurality of signals from a plurality of devices 110. In some embodiments, the first device receives a signal from a controller, a switch or a source external to thelighting system 100. In various embodiments, the first device receives a signal via a wireless link. In a number of embodiments, the first device receives a signal comprising a plurality of duty cycles within a time interval. In various embodiments, the first device receives a signal comprising a plurality of duty cycles within a time interval, the plurality of duty cycles comprising portions of the signal having high values whose sum defines the total duty cycle of the time interval. - At
step 310 the first device operates responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device operates in any manner and at any time, in response to the duty cycle. The first device, also referred to as a device 110, may perform any operation which is responsive to, or modified by the duty cycle of the signal. In some embodiments, the first device spins a motor and a rotational speed or an acceleration of the motor spin is controlled by the duty cycle. In a plurality of embodiments, the first device operates an engine which performs or runs in response to the duty cycle of the signal. In many embodiments, the first device operates an emission of light having an intensity, wherein the intensity is responsive to, modified by, or related to the duty cycle. Sometimes, the first device emits a light having a specific feature, such as a pulse of light, periodicity of pulse, wavelength of light, phase of light, spectral range of light emitted or even power of light, and any of which may be modulated or be responsive to the duty cycle of the signal. The first device may receive a signal comprising a duty cycle within atime interval 205 of the signal and perform a function or an operation modulated, controlled or instructed by the duty cycle within thetime interval 205 of the signal. In some embodiments, the first device operates a second device in response to the duty cycle. In many embodiments, the first device operates a plurality of devices in response to the duty cycle. The plurality of devices may perform as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal received by the first device. In some embodiments, the first device operates based on a threshold or a plurality of thresholds of the duty cycle. The duty cycle may be within or past a threshold point which defines an action or an operation which the first device has to perform. For example, the first device may receive a signal having a duty cycle within a threshold range for which the first device does not perform any function, such as the device is shut off or on standby. In a number of embodiments, the first device receives a signal having a duty cycle within a threshold range for which the first device emits a light at a specific intensity or brightness. In many embodiments, the duty cycle of a signal received is within a threshold range which defines a spin speed of a motor, an intensity range of a light source, a wavelength range of a light source, a power output, a current output, a voltage output, or any other operation by any other device. - At
step 315 the first device detects an instruction identified by at least one portion of the duty cycle. The first device may detect an instruction using any number of components, units or functions capable of detecting, decoding and processing instructions. In some embodiments, thecommunicator 125 or thecontroller 120 detects an instruction comprisinginstruction bits 220,data bits 215 or anydata 210. In a number of embodiments, the first device detects an instruction using a function, structure or an unit of the first device for intercepting and decoding the instruction. The instruction, in such embodiments, may be a codeword, a number of data bits or a pattern of data bits. In some embodiments, the first device detects an instruction using a detector which detects or decodes the signal. The detector may observe, monitor or detect instructions by monitoring a portion of a signal within a predetermined time interval within thetime interval 205. The detector may observe, monitor or detect instructions by monitoring adata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 of the signal within a predetermined time interval within thetime interval 205. In some embodiments, the first device detects an instruction by receiving, decoding or monitoring anydata bits time interval 205 of the signal. In some embodiments, the first device detects an instruction by recognizing, reading or detecting a portion of a signal within a predetermined portion of atime interval 205, orperiod 205. In a plurality of embodiments, the first device detects instructions by observing a specific portion or a specific plurality of portions of thetime interval 205 of the signal. In many embodiments, the instruction is detected by the first device which observes a latter portion of the time interval to search for instruction bits. The first device may detect a codeword, a digital pattern or an instruction comprising any number ofdata bits 215, which may be positioned within any portion of specific time interval within thetime interval 205. In a variety of embodiments, a portion of the duty cycle of the signal comprises a portion of the instruction. In many embodiments, the first device detects that at least a portion of the duty cycle of the signal comprises a portion of the instruction. - At
step 320 the first device performs a function based on the instruction while the first device maintains operating responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of the first device responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of a second device responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs any type and form of function or operation while maintaining operating of a plurality of devices responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device performs a function based on the instruction without maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device instructs a second device to perform a function and operates, or maintains operating, of the second device in response to the duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device was emitting light having an intensity, brightness or pulse frequency as instructed by the previous duty cycle and upon receiving the signal and the duty cycle of the signal, the first device maintains the intensity, the brightness or the pulse frequency of the light emitted as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal. In a variety of embodiments, the first device was operating any one, or any combination of: a light source, a motor, an engine, a power supply or a unit supplying electrical power as instructed by the previous duty cycle as instructed by previous duty cycles, and upon receiving the duty cycle of the signal, the first device maintains operating of the light source, the motor, the engine, the power supply or the unit supplying electrical power of the light emitted as instructed by the duty cycle of the signal. The function may be any action executed upon receiving an instruction, such as for example, turning on or off of a first device. In some embodiments, the function is setting an intensity of the light emitted by the first device. In a plurality of embodiments, the function performed is setting a status, such as a master or a slave status to the first device. In a variety of embodiments, the function performed is processing a communication, data or a command comprised by the instruction. In a number of embodiments, the function is any function or any operation performed by the first device or any device 110, or any lighting system component described herein. In some embodiments, the first device performs the function based on the instruction and maintains operating of the first device responsive to the duty cycle. Operating may refer to performing operation of any device 110 or any function or operation of anylighting system 100 component described herein. - At
step 325 the first device receives a second signal comprising a second duty cycle within a second time interval. In some embodiments, the first device receives a second signal which is a signal immediately following the signal. In some embodiments, the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a plurality of portions. Each of the plurality of portions of the second duty cycle of the second signal may further comprise a duration of the second duty cycle. A second signal may comprise any functionality or any characteristics of the first signal. In some embodiments, the second signal is identical or substantially similar to the first signal. In a variety of embodiments, the second signal comprises a second duty cycle which is different than a first duty cycle. In many embodiments, the second duty cycle is the same as the first duty cycle. The plurality of portions of the second duty cycle may comprise any number ofdata bits 215 comprising any number of digital portions of the signal having high or low values. The second duty cycle may comprise a plurality of portions which are similar or identical to the plurality of portions of the first duty cycle. The plurality of portions may comprise a portion of atime interval 205 within which a signal has a high value for the cases in which high value is the active value of the signal, or low value for the cases in which the low value is the active value of the signal. The second time interval may be same as the time interval or any otherprevious time interval 205 in the chain oftime intervals 205. In some embodiments, the second time interval is a different time interval than the time interval, or thepreceding time interval 205. In a number of embodiments, the second time interval is a longer period of time than the time interval. In a plurality of embodiments, the second time interval is a shorter period of time than the time interval. - At
step 330 the first device operates responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal. The first device operating responsive to the second duty cycle of the second signal may be similar to the first device operating responsive to the duty cycle of the signal. In a number of embodiments, the first device operates or performs an operation of the first device or any other device 110 in response to the duty cycle of the signal received. In many embodiments, the second duty cycle of the second signal is different than the duty cycle of the signal. The first device may change or modify the operating of, or operation performed by, the first device, the second device or any device which operates in response to the second duty cycle of the second signal. In a number of embodiments, the first device instructs a second device or a plurality of devices to perform in response to the second duty cycle of the second signal. The operating may comprise emitting a light having a specific brightness, intensity, spectral range or pulse duration. In a variety of embodiments, the operating comprises supplying electricity or power to a component or a plurality of components of the first device or any number of devices 110, the electricity or power responsive to the duty cycle or the second duty cycle. - At
step 335 the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a second instruction. The first device may detect the second instruction in a same way as detecting the instruction. In many embodiments, the second instruction is detected differently than the first instruction. In a number of embodiments, the second instruction comprises a number ofdata bits 215 positioned within a specific time interval withintime interval 205. In a variety of embodiments, a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a portion of the second instruction. In many embodiments, the first device detects that at least a portion of the second duty cycle of the second signal comprises a portion of the second instruction. - At
step 340 the first device performs, responsive to the detection, a function based on the second instruction while maintaining operating responsive to the duty cycle of the second signal. In some embodiments, the first device performs a function based on the second instruction without maintaining operating responsive to the second duty cycle. The function may be any action executed upon receiving an instruction. In a number of embodiments, the function is any function or any operation performed by the first device or any other device 110 described herein. In some embodiments, the first device performs the function based on the second instruction and maintains operating of the first device responsive to the second duty cycle. In a variety of embodiments, the first device performs the function based on the second instruction and maintains operating of a second device responsive to the second duty cycle. Sometimes, the first device performs the function by any device 110 based on the second instruction for any device 110 and maintains operating of any device 110 in response to the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first device instructs a second device to perform a function and operates or maintains operating of the second device in response to the second duty cycle. Operating may refer to performing operation of any device 110 described herein. - Further referring to figures
FIG. 2A andFIG. 2B discussed in the earlier sections,FIGS. 2A and 2B further refer to embodiments within which light sources 110 may transmit among each other instructions to assign statuses of masters and slaves. In one example, afirst lighting system 100 component, such as a lighting device 110 may have a status of a master. The master first lighting device 110 may transmit a first information usingdata bits second lighting system 100 component, such as a second lighting device 110. The second lighting device component having a slave status. Thesecond lighting system 100 component receives the first information and in response to the first information adjusts the status of thesecond lighting system 100 component to a master status. Thesecond lighting system 100 component having a master status transmits a second information usingdata bits first lighting system 100 component. Thefirst lighting system 100 component receives the second information and in response to the second information adjusts the status of thefirst lighting system 100 component to a status of a slave. - In some embodiments,
light source 110B, having a master status, transmits a first information usingdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 tolight source 110A which has a slave status.Light source 110A receives the first information and in response to the first information adjusts the status of thelight source 110A to a master status.Light source 110A, having a master status, transmits a second information usingdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 to thelight source 110B.Light source 110B receives the second information and in response to the second information adjusts the status of the firstlight source 110B to a slave status. In a number of embodiments,light source 110A, having a master status, transmits a third information viadata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 to a plurality of lighting system components, one of which islight source 110B. The third information transmitted bylight source 110A comprisesaddress 127B. The plurality of lighting system components receive the third information andlight source 110B receives the third information.Light source 110B matches address 127B within the third information to address 127B of thelight source 110B. In some embodiments,light source 110B, in response to the third information, adjusts the status oflight source 110B to a status of a master. In a number of embodiments,light source 110B, in response to theaddress 127B matching theaddress 127B of thelight source 110B, adjusts the status oflight source 110B to a status of a master. In a plurality of embodiments,light source 110B, in response to the received third information and in response to theaddress 127B matching theaddress 127B of thelight source 110B, adjusts the status oflight source 110B to a status of a master. - In some embodiments, a plurality of light sources 110, each having a status of a master or a slave, communicate using a
same connection 105 component, such as a wire or an electrical current conducting line. In such embodiments, any of the light sources 110 may become a master or a slave. Sometimes, the plurality of light sources 110 communicating over asame connection 105 component include only a single master, while all other light sources 110 have a status of a slave. In such embodiments, one of the light sources 110 having a status of a slave pulls the voltage potential within theconnection 105 component low for a period of time, such as a microsecond, a millisecond or a second. The light source 110 having a status of a master interprets the low voltage signal in theconnection 105 component as a signal to change status from master to slave. The light source 110 having a status of a master accepts the status of a slave, and the light source 110 which pulled the voltage potential low accepts the status of a master. Thus the signal across theconnection 105 component signals a change in the status of one or more light sources 110 communicating over thesame connection 105 component. In some embodiments, the signal that changes the status of one or more lighting system components may be a high voltage potential signal, a low voltage signal, an impulse, a digital pattern, a ground signal, or any other analog or digital signal transmitted overconnection 105. - In a number of embodiments, when a group of light sources 110 are all off, upon being turned on, each one of the group of light sources 110 turns on with a status of a master. In some embodiments, upon receiving a signal that a light source 110 having a master status, also called a master, already exists, a light source that has just turned on changes its own status to a status of a slave. Thus, when a group of light sources 110 are all turned on at once it is ensured that at least one master exists. In some embodiments, light source 110 upon turning on and automatically changing its own status to a master, the light source 110 listens for a period of time if there is another master on the network. If the light source 110 does not receive any messages that there is another master on the network, the light source 110 remains the master.
- In some embodiments, a
lighting system 100 component receiving instruction from a sender assembles receivedbits 215 from a plurality ofperiods 205. In some embodiments, thelighting system 100 component receiving information from a sender parses the bits and bytes of the received information and forms instruction, data or commands. In a plurality of embodiments,lighting system 100 component receiving instruction from a sender interprets the forms instructions, data or commands and implements the same formed instructions, data or commands. - Therefore, in many embodiments,
lighting system 100 components use bidirectional digital pulse width modulated communication to transmit and receive information. Furthermore, in some embodiments,lighting system 100 components use digital pulse width modulated communication to control performance and functionality of one ormore lighting system 100 components. Light brightness, also referred to as intensity, in many embodiments is controlled, communicated or instructed using a pulse width modulated communication. In many embodiments, light brightness or intensity is controlled, communicated or instructed using a duty cycle of aperiod 205. Pulse width modulated signals may therefore be referred to as transport mechanism of the digital communication betweenlighting system 100 components. - D. Lighting System Intensity Control with Digital Patterning and Color Mixing
- Referring back to
FIG. 2A andFIG. 2B , embodiments of systems and methods for controlling intensity or brightness of light devices 110 using digital patterns are depicted. A digital pattern may be any order or any formation ofdata 210,data bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. A digital pattern may include an order or a formation of a specific number of data bits within aperiod 205. Data bits, such asdata bits 215, may include bits having a high value, or a digital value of 1, and a number of data bits having a low value, or a digital value of 0. Data bits may form a duty cycle within theperiod 205. The duty cycle formed by the data bits of the digital pattern may identify the intensity or brightness of the light emitted. Duty cycle may be determined by summing up all time durations of the digital patterns for which data bits had high values within the time interval. For example, if the signal comprising a data stream made up of digital patterns has data bits havinghigh values 70 percent of the time within a time interval, the duty cycle for the time interval may be 0.7. The duty cycle may be determined by summing portions of the signal within the time interval for which the signal was high and dividing the signal by the total duration of the time interval. In some embodiments, duty cycle is determined based on a sum of time durations of the signal having low values. -
Data bits 215 may be transmitted via aconnection 105 within one ormore time intervals 205. A number of data bits having a value of 1 (and/or a value of zero) within the time interval may determine the intensity of light or brightness of light emitted by the light device 110. The intensity may be determined for the duration of that time interval. A digital pattern may include an order or a formation ofdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 within a predetermined number of concatenatedperiods 205. For example, a stream ofdata bits 215 may be transmitted to a light device 110 within a chain of a predetermined number ofperiods 205, such as for example 128periods 205. Eachperiod 205 may include a separate digital pattern. A lighting device 110 receiving the data stream may calculate a duty cycle for all of 128periods 205 using all the digital data patterns within each period. The duty cycle of the 128 periods may indicate the brightness or intensity at which light device 110 will emit. In one instance, duty cycle of 128 periods may be 0.8, indicating that the light device 110 will emit at 80% of it's maximum brightness. - A digital pattern may comprise a ratio of high to low values which encode or identify an intensity or brightness of light. The intensity or brightness of light emitted may defined by a total number of bits having a value of 1 within a period of time per a period of time. Digital patterns may include one or more predetermined patterns of
data bits 215 that are oriented to have any high value signal to low value signal ratio. In some embodiments, the ratio of high signal to a total duration of period may encode or identify the brightness or intensity. For example, if aperiod 205 has six bits of data having a value of 1 and two bits of data having a value of zero, the intensity or brightness may indicate 6/8 of maximum intensity or brightness for thatperiod 205. - In some embodiments, a digital pattern may identify a specific ratio of bits having high values to bits having low values within a
period 205. A specific ratio may include a duration of time for which a portion of aperiod 205 includes high values, such as digital bits with a value of 1 divided by the entire time duration ofperiod 205. Similarly, the specific ratio may include a duration of time for which a portion of theperiod 205 includes low values having a digital value of zero divided by the entire time duration ofperiod 205. The specific ratio may identify a duty cycle. The duty cycle may be proportional or inversely proportional to the brightness or intensity of the light emitted. Similarly, the specific ratio of the signal may include a ratio of a duration of time for which signal is high in relation to the duration of time for which the signal is low. An algorithm may be used to identify the intensity or brightness based on the ratio of the duration of time for which the signal is high in relation to the time duration for which the signal is low. A digital pattern may identify or form an average value of the signal within one ormore periods 205. In some embodiments, a digital pattern forms an average value of the bits within aperiod 205. The average value of the bits within aperiod 205 may determine or identify the intensity or brightness of the light emitted. Any of the duty cycle, average signal, and the specific ratios may be formed by digital signals, as well as analog signals, pulses, PWM signals, encoded data bit signals, encoded digital number signals, or any other type and form of signals having at least a high value and a low value. - A digital pattern may be random or predetermined and may include any number of digital bits of any pattern of format. Digital bits may be formed by a switch or a transistor. The switch or the transistor may transmit high and low signals. The high and low signals may be received by the light devices 110, and may be processed by filters to determine the specific ratios, average values or the duty cycles. In one example, a digital pattern may include a predetermined total number of data bits of which 10 data bits have a high value within a
period 205. The brightness or intensity of the light emitted by the light device may be determined by dividing 10 bits with the total predetermined number of data bits within the period that can be transmitted within theperiod 205. In some embodiments, digital pattern may include a predetermined order of bits. In other embodiments, digital pattern includes a random order of the bits. - Digital pattern may be altered to accommodate instructions or information transmitted to the light device 110 using
instruction bits 220. For example, if a transmission includes a number of bits having a high value within aperiod 205, the digital pattern may add a number of bits that accommodates the already transmittedinstruction bits 220 within theperiod 205. Iftransmission bits 220 carry an instruction to thelight device 220, the digital pattern within thesame period 205 may include a number of bits determined by subtracting the number of instruction bits having a high value from the originally intended digital pattern bits. Then, a digital pattern that has a number of data bits that is determined by subtracting the number of already sent instruction bits having a high value from the total intended number of data bits having a high value. As such, the number of bits having a high value from the instruction within theperiod 205 would be included in the overall digital pattern, thereby maintaining the duty cycle unchanged even if an instruction is transmitted withinsame period 205. Using this technique, a digital pattern may maintain the intensity or brightness of the light device 110, while an instruction could be transmitted within theperiod 205 without affecting the total number of data bits having a high value. In a similar embodiment, in techniques where data bits determining intensity have a low value, a number of bits having the low value would be maintained within the period to accommodate the transmitted instruction. - In some embodiments, a digital pattern comprises a number of
data bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 which is equal over allperiods 205. As the data bits are transmitted through a plurality ofperiods 205, the lighting device 110 may continuously receive intensity information and instructions via digital patterns of theperiods 205. The digital patterns may instruct the lighting device 110 to emit light at the intensity or brightness indicated by the digital pattern of each period. As periods may include predetermined durations of time a continuous data stream of digital patterns may be received to maintain desired intensity. Each digital pattern may include a predetermined number of data bits or a varying or random number of data bits within each time period. In some embodiments,periods 205 may have a varying number ofdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. Asperiods 205 may be indicated by a specific signal, such as one or more bits, pause or an impulse,periods 205 may vary in time duration as well as the number of bits transmitted. In some embodiments, digital pattern affects or defines duty cycle of aperiod 205. - A digital pattern of a
period 205 may include any number of data bits, such as between 1 and 1024 data bits. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes more than 1024 data bits within aperiod 205. In further embodiments, a digital pattern includes between 4 and 512 data bits, such as 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 256 and 512 data bits. In one example, eightdata bits 215 may be transmitted within aperiod 205. An 8-bit digital patterning for generating the digital pattern may include any number of sequences or distinct digital patterns of any variation of 8 bits. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes a single bit having a high value, or a value of 1, and seven remaining bits within theperiod 205 having a low value or a value of zero. In these embodiments, duty cycle of theperiod 205 may be ⅛. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes two out of eight bits having a high value or a bit having a value of 1, and six remaining bits having a value of zero or a low value. In these embodiments, duty cycle may be ¼. In still further embodiments, a digital pattern may include 4 bits of high value and 4 bits of low value. In these embodiments, duty cycle may be ½. These bits may be ordered in a predetermined fashion to maintain a desired duty cycle. In some embodiments, digital patterns are randomized while maintaining the desired duty cycle. For example, a duty cycle of ½ may be generated by an 8-bit digital pattern of 01010101, 00001111, 11001100, 01100110 or any other digital pattern having 4 high bits and 4 low bits within aperiod 205. Similarly, any digital patterns may be generated, including five, six, seven or eight bits having high values. Asperiod 205 may include any number of bits, such as a total of 16 bits, a digital pattern may have any number of variations to accommodate any number of bits. In the example of a digital pattern for a 16bit period 205, a duty cycle of 15/16 may be implemented by a pattern of 0111111111111111, 1110111111111111, 1111111101111111, 1111111111111101, or any other configuration of the similar kind. Such concepts may apply to embodiments of digital patterns of any number ofbits 215 within aperiod 205, such as a 4 bit digital pattern, 6 bit digital pattern, 8 bit digital pattern, 10 bit digital pattern, 12 bit digital pattern, 16 bit digital pattern, 24 bit digital pattern, 32 bit digital pattern, 64 bit digital pattern or a digital pattern comprising any number of data bits within one ormore periods 205. - A digital pattern may also include a numbering format or a code. In some embodiments, a digital pattern includes a data bits identifying a number. For example, a digital pattern may include code 0001 identifying the
number 1, 0010 identifying a number 2, 0100 identifying a number 4 or a 1000 identifying anumber 8. In further embodiments, a digital pattern may include code 0101 identifying a number 5 or a 1010 identifying anumber 10. The light source 110 may receive the codes and interpret the numbers accordingly. The light source may determine a value of 10 to mean an intensity of 10/16 of the maximum intensity of the light for the lighting device. In some embodiments, the light source may determine the value of 10 to mean alevel 10 of a total of 16 levels of intensity for the light emitted. Similarly, a digital pattern may include any type and form of code that may be mapped, encoded, decoded or interpreted by the light source 110 to identify a brightness or intensity of the light emitted. - Referring now to
FIGS. 4A-B embodiments of a digital pattern having a smaller number of bits within aperiod 305 is illustrated.FIGS. 4A-B illustrate digital data transmitted betweenlight sources periods 305, each of which includes 8 bits of data.Period 305 include a period of time within which 8 bits ofdata 215 are transmitted, sent or received by lighting device 110. Similarly,period 305 may be modified so that any number of data bits are transmitted within theperiod 305, such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 24, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 or any other number of data bits. In some embodiments,period 305 is aperiod 205. In further embodiments,period 305 is a duration of time within which 8 bits are transmitted. In still further embodiments, aperiod 205 includes a plurality ofperiods 305. Aperiod 305 may include a number of bits of data one ormore lighting system 100 components use or receive in a single instruction or a single instruction set.Periods Periods bit period 305 is a period of time defined by, determined by, or corresponding to a duration of time within whichlighting system 100 components communicated viaconnection 105 transmit 8 bits ofdata 210. In some embodiments,period 305 is a period of time defined by, determined by, or corresponding to a duration of time within whichlighting system 100 components communicated viaconnection 105 receive any predetermined number of data bits, such as 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 256, or 512.Periods 305 may include same or different durations of time. In some embodiments, someperiods 305 are longer or shorter thanother periods 305. In further embodiments, allperiods 305 are of a same predetermined length of time. Eachperiod 305 may include a same predetermined number of data bits. In some embodiments, someperiods 305 include a number of data bits that is different than the number of data bits of anotherperiod 305. Aperiod 205 may include a predetermined number ofperiods 305. For example, aperiod 205 may include a duration of time within which a predetermined number ofperiods 205 is enclosed. Eachperiod 205 may include a digital pattern having any number of bits. In some embodiments, someperiods 305 of aperiod 205 may have different average value of the data bits within theperiod 205 from the average values of data bits ofother periods 305 of thesame period 205. Similarly, someperiods 305 of aperiod 205 may include a different number of data bits having a high value from a number of data bits having a high value withinother periods 305 of thesame periods 205. As such, a total duration of time for which the signal has a high value within aperiod 305 may vary fromother periods 305 of thesame period 205. A ratio of a duration of time within which the signal has a high value per a total duration of aperiod 305 may be also referred to as the duty cycle of theperiod 305. Duty cycles of someperiods 305 of aperiod 205 may differ from the duty cycles ofother periods 305 of thesame period 205. - In one example, a
period 205 may include 128periods 205 each of which further includes an 8 bit digital pattern. Theperiod 205 along with all the bits from each of theperiods 305 within theperiod 205 may form or identify a specific ratio of a number of bits having a high value to a number of bits having a low value within theperiod 205. Theperiod 205 may have a duty cycle determined by a total duration of time within theperiod 205 for which the signal is high (or for which the bits have a value of 1) divided by the total duration of time of theperiod 205. The duty cycle of theperiod 205 may be used to scale the maximum intensity or brightness of the light emitted by the light source 110 to the desired intensity. Anew period 205 immediately following theperiod 205 may identify another duty cycle for a changed or modified intensity or brightness. The light source may modify the light intensity emitted based on the new duty cycle for thenew period 205. Should the light source 110 receive an instruction or a command within one ormore periods 305 of aperiod 205, digital patterns ofother periods 305 within theperiod 205 may be modified by the pattern generator of thecommunicator 125 of the sender to maintain the desired intensity for the light source 110 at a predetermined level. Using the real time update via a stream of bits divided intoperiods 305 within aperiod 205, light devices 110 may receive real-time updated intensity or brightness while receiving instructions or commands for other functions or purposes of the light device 110. - Still referring to
FIGS. 4A-B , an embodiment of a digital pattern determining intensity or brightness via aperiod 315 for a 16-bit transmission is illustrated.FIGS. 4A-B illustrate alight source 110A connected tolight source 110B viaconnection 105.Connection 105 transmits information or communication transmitted betweenlight sources FIG. 4B illustrates embodiments where digital data transmitted betweenlight sources bit periods 305 and 16-bit periods 315. In some embodiments, 8-bit period 305 may be modified to accommodate a 16-bit period 315 for a finer control of the brightness and intensity range. As such, instead of dividing the total brightness in 8 shades of brightness, the brightness intensity may be divided into 16 shades, or any other number of shades. In this example, a 16-bit period 315 is aperiod 205 whose time length is tailored to allow transmission of 16 bits ofdata 215 within theperiod 205. - The plurality of
periods 305 orperiods 315 within aperiod 205 may include any digital pattern. In one example, aperiod 305 of aperiod 205 may have 4 bits having a high value and 4 bits having a low value, while anotherperiod 305 from thesame period 205 may include 8 bits having a high value and no bits having a low value. Duty cycles ofperiods 305, average values of signal within theperiod 305 or specific ratios of the high to low bits withinperiods 305 may vary while the overall duty cycle, average value or specific ratio of theperiod 205 as a whole may be maintained at a particular predetermined level. In further example, aperiod 205 comprising 50periods 305 may include one or more periods comprising instructions and commands for the light device 110. Theperiods 305 within which the instructions were transmitted may have duty cycles altered from other duty cycles. (Duty cycles ofperiods 305 may be defined as durations of time for which the signal had a high value divided by the total duration of time of period 305) A pattern generator of thecommunicator 125 sending the data bits to the light device 110 may compensate for the transmitted instructions by increasing or decreasing the number of data bits having a high value in order to maintain the intensity or brightness of theentire period 205 at a predetermined level. The pattern generator may keep a track of the number of data bits having a high value within aperiod 205. As instructions and commands are transmitted to the light device 110, pattern generator of thecommunicator 125 of the sender may determine how many data bits having a high value need to be added in theperiods 305 following theperiods 305 that included the instructions. By keeping track of the overall number ofdata bits 215 within aperiod 205, intensity and brightness may remained controlled by the number of data bits having a high value even when the instructions are transmitted within theperiod 205. - In some embodiments,
lighting system 100 components, such aslight source 110B andlight source 110A, communicate usingdata bits 215,instruction bits 220 or a combination ofdata bits 215 andinstruction bits 220. The light devices 110 may receive real time adjustments for the brightness or intensity for each light source 110 via the stream of data bits per each receivingperiod 205. Sometimes, lighting system components using 8-bit periods 305 are capable of transmitting or receiving information twice as fast. In such embodiments, lighting system components, such aslight sources 110 B 16 bit send or transmit a 16-bit digital pattern within an 8 bit period. In further embodiments,light source 110B communicates withlight source 110A transmitting or receiving information within 8-bit periods 305. In many embodiments,light source 110B transmits a 16-bit digital pattern comprisingdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220 within an 8-bit period 305 tolight source 110A.Light source 110A receives 16-bit digital pattern within the 8-bit period 305 and in response to the received 16-bit digital pattern adjusts, changes or maintains the intensity of the light emitted by thelight source 110A. - Duration of
periods periods periods periods - Digital patterns comprising any number of bits may have duty cycles of
periods period controller 120 or acommunicator 125 that determines the duty cycle and controls the brightness or intensity of the light emitted. The filter may determine the duty cycle of eachperiod 205 by counting the instructions from within theperiod 205. In some embodiments, the filter of thecontroller 120 or thecommunicator 125 of the receiving light source 110 may determine the duty cycle of theperiod 205 while not including the instructions within theperiod 205. - Digital patterns within
periods lighting system 100 comprises a plurality of light sources 110 each emitting a light of a different spectral range or a different color. The plurality of light sources may be within a single lighting fixture, or they may comprise separate lighting devices. Thelighting system 100 may include alight source 110A emitting a red light, alight source 110B emitting a green light and alight source 110C emitting a blue light. In such a configuration, thelighting system 100 may use digital patterns withinperiods light sources 110A-C. For example, digital patterns may govern the intensity of each of thelight devices 110A-C in order to establish a specific hue of light, such as a white color for example. The lighting system may transmit digital patterns and vary the number of data bits within each period of time to produce any particular color by mixing light at intensities determined via digital patterning from each one of thesources 110A-C. Thelight sources 110A-C may receive digital patterns within varying durations of time, or varyingperiods 205 for each of thelight source 110A-C in order to produce the white light. Thelight sources 110A-C may receive real-time updates of the intensity at periods of 205 and receive instructions withinperiods 305 which are withinperiods 205. Sometimes, alighting system 100 controls the total color output of the light emitted by all three light sources 110 by using a feedback to adjust intensity of some light sources via digital patterning in order to adjust the total hue of the output light. In one example, a plurality oflight sources 110A-N may each emit light of a different spectral range or a different color. In such embodiments, alighting system 100 component controlling thelight sources 110A-N may emit separate data streams comprising digital patterns withinperiods light sources 110A-N. - Referring now to
FIG. 4C , an embodiment of steps of amethod 400 for modulating intensity of light emitted by a lighting device using a digital pattern is depicted. In some embodiments,method 400 relates to a method of color mixing of a plurality of light sources emitting different light color. Atstep 405 of themethod 400, a controller receives or generates an instruction for a remote lighting device and a setting for an intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. Atstep 410, the controller generates a signal that comprises the instruction, a time period and a duty cycle of the signal within a time interval of the time period. The duty cycle of the signal may be based on a sum of portions of a digital pattern of the signal which have a high value within the time interval. Atstep 415, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wire used for supplying electrical power to the remote lighting device. Atstep 420, the remote lighting device establishes intensity of light or performs color mixing of a plurality of lights emitting different colors of light, based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time interval. Atstep 425, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined intensity of the light or mixes colors of light based on intensities of each of the plurality of light sources emitting a different color of light. Atstep 430, the remote lighting device takes or implements an action based on the instruction from the signal. - Further referring to step 405, a controller acquires an instruction and a setting for a remote lighting device. The remote lighting device may include a single light source or a plurality of light sources. The instruction may include an instruction for a single light source or for each of the plurality of light sources. In some embodiments, the controller generates the instruction or the setting. In further embodiments, the controller receives the instruction or the setting from another lighting system component. In still further embodiments, the controller generates an instruction or a setting based on a configuration set by a user. In further embodiments, the controller receives an instruction or a setting from a user input or an instruction file. In some embodiments, a controller generates instructions based on a program, script, prior instruction file or a user input identifying actions to be taken by the remote lighting device.
- The acquired instruction may include any type and form of a command for an action implemented by a lighting device. In some embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an error message. In other embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement message or an alert when an address of an instruction matches the address of the lighting device. In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement if ambient light detector of the lighting device is active. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to send an acknowledgement if a presence of an object is detected in the vicinity of a light switch enclosure.
- In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to set a brightness value of the remote lighting device or a light source within the remote lighting device, such as a green light source, blue light source or a red light source of the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to use an external source for PWM signal to control the intensity of the light. In further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to use a value sent to the remote lighting device as a maximum intensity or maximum brightness value of the remote lighting device. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a command to turn the light emitted by the remote lighting device off by dimming.
- In some embodiments, the instruction includes a setting for the remote lighting device as a master or a slave. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes a setting for the remote lighting device as a member of a group or a zone. The setting for the remote lighting device may include a setting for an intensity or brightness of the light to be emitted by the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the setting identifies an intensity or brightness of light relative to the maximum intensity set for the remote lighting device. The setting may identify the dimness or brightness of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device for a predetermined duration of time.
- At
step 410, the controller generates a signal comprising the instruction, a time period and a duty cycle of the signal within a time interval. The controller may generate a signal comprising one or more digital patterns. Digital patterns may be generated to compensate for any instructions to be embedded with the signal. Digital patterns may further be generated to ensure that a duty cycle within a time interval remains at a predetermined level. In some embodiments, digital patterns comprise one or more portions of the signal having high and low values within a time interval. In further embodiments, a digital pattern that includes a plurality of high and low data bits is located within a predetermined time interval of a plurality of time intervals of a time period of a signal. Each time interval may or may not include an instruction. Each time interval may include one or more digital patterns generated to ensure that the duty cycle of the signal remains at a level indicating a predetermined light intensity for the time interval, regardless of the presence of the instruction within the time interval. The duty cycle of the signal may be based upon a sum of portions of one or more digital patterns having a high value within a predetermined time interval. In one embodiment, the controller generates the signal that has a digital pattern that includes digital bits having high values and low values within a time interval of the time period. In some embodiments, digital patterns may include any variation or order of high and low data bits within a time interval. The digital pattern may be generated such that a sum of time durations of the digital bits having high values within a time interval divided by the duration of the time interval corresponds to the setting for the intensity of the light. - In one example, a generated digital pattern includes a sum of time durations of the signal having high values 65 percent of the time within the time interval. In such example, the sum of the time durations having high values divided by the total duration of the time interval may equal 0.65. This result may correspond to the setting for the intensity of light to be emitted by the remote lighting device identifying an intensity of about 65% of the maximum light intensity.
- In other embodiments, digital patterns of the signal may be generated to identify any intensity of light. The intensity may be in percentages of the maximum light intensity, in Watts, Watts per meter square, lumens, nits or any other unit of light intensity or brightness. In some embodiments, a signal generator of the controller generates the signal comprising the digital patterns and a plurality of time intervals within a time period. The signal may be generated to further include the instruction into one or more of the time intervals of the time period of the signal. In some embodiments, the controller generates a signal to be comprised by a first time interval of the time period while generating one or more digital patterns of the first time interval.
- The digital patterns may be generated to account for the number of the portions of the instruction having high values so that the total duty cycle within the first time interval remains at a predetermined level regardless of the instruction being present. In further embodiments, the controller generates the signal to include the instruction in the first time interval of the time period. In such embodiments, digital patterns are included into other time intervals of the time period to compensate or account for the instruction and maintain the duty cycle within the period at a predetermined level.
- At
step 415, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wire of the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a power supplying line or an active wire of a standard power distribution system powering the lighting device. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a common wire of a traditional power distribution system. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a ground wire, or a conductive sheathing of a cable. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a wireless signal, such as a WIFI signal or a radio signal. In yet further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via a network, such as a computing network or a communication network of the plurality of lighting devices. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via an infrared channel. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device receives the signal via an optical channel, such as a fiber optic or an optical wireless receiving system. The remote lighting device may receive the signal via a controller or a communicator. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device uses a signal processor or a signal processing unit to receive and process the signal. In other embodiments, controller filters the signal using filters, such as frequency filters, power filters or optical filters. The filtered signal may be processed for the duty cycle and for the instructions for the remote lighting device. - At
step 420, the remote lighting device establishes intensity of light based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time interval. The remote lighting device may establish the intensity based on a determination of the duty cycle of the signal within the time period. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the ratio of the sum of the portions of the digital patterns within the time interval having high values and a duration of the time interval. In other embodiments, the duty cycle is determined based on a ratio of the sum of the portions of the digital patterns within a plurality of time intervals of the time period and the entire duration of the time period. In some embodiments, a signal processor of a controller of the remote lighting device processes the signal to determine the duty cycle. The signal may be processed using any type of function, script or an algorithm operating of the signal processor to determine the duty cycle. In further embodiments, the controller of the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle. In further embodiments, the communicator of the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle within the time period. In still further embodiments, the controller of the remote lighting device screens for any instructions within the received signal and determines the duty cycle of the signal. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of the Watts of the light emitted. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of Watts per unit of area. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle within each single time period. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle over a plurality of time periods. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle over a plurality of time intervals within a single time period. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light by determining the duty cycle within each individual time interval of each individual time period. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device determines the intensity of light in terms of the relative light intensity of the remote lighting device, such as the maximum light intensity. For example, the remote lighting device may determine the intensity of light based on the duty cycle identifying 0.85 or 85% of the maximum light intensity of the remote lighting device. - At
step 425, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined intensity of light. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device emits light based on the determined ratio. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device multiplies the ratio with the maximum intensity to determine the intensity of light at which the remote lighting device will emit. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device continuously receives the signal and determines the intensity for each time period of the signal. In such embodiments, the remote lighting device updates or adjusts the intensity of the light emitted in real-time. For example, in an instance where a time period comprises time a duration of a millisecond, the intensity of the light emitted may be determined for the millisecond. The intensity of light at which the remote lighting device would operate the following millisecond may be determined based on the duty cycle of the signal within the following time period. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device maintains the intensity of light until a signal comprising a different duty cycle within a time period or time interval is detected. - At
step 430, the remote lighting device takes an action based on the instruction. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an error message out in response to the instruction. In other embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement message or an alert when an address of an instruction matches the address of the lighting device in response to the instruction. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement if ambient light detector of the lighting device is active. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device sends an acknowledgement if a presence of an object is the object is detected in the vicinity of a light switch enclosure. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a brightness value of the remote lighting device or a light source within the remote lighting device. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a brightness or intensity value for a green light source, a blue light source or a red light source within the remote lighting device. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device begins to use an external source for PWM signal to control the intensity of the light. In further embodiments, the remote lighting device begins to use a value sent to the remote lighting device as a maximum intensity or maximum brightness value of the remote lighting device. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device turns the light emitted by the remote lighting device off by dimming. In some embodiments, the remote lighting device sets a status for the remote lighting device as a master or a slave in response to the instruction. In still further embodiments, the remote lighting device sets the remote lighting device as a member of a group or a zone in response to the instruction. The remote lighting device may implement any instruction received or set any configuration or setting in response to the instruction received from the signal. Any portion of the controller of the remote lighting device may receive and process the instruction. In some embodiments, a communicator of the remote lighting device processes the instruction. The remote lighting device may implement any action or a function instructed by any instruction of a command received. - In one example, a lighting device, such as a standard fluorescent lighting fixture or a source comprising a plurality of light emitting diodes is installed in an office, a building or at a home. The lighting device may include a single color light source or a plurality of light sources, each of which may emit light of a different color. The lighting device may be used in communication with one or more other lighting devices which may use controllers to send control signals coordinating operations between the light sources. The intensity of light emitted by a lighting device, or a light source, may be controlled via a received signal that includes one or more digital patterns identifying the intensity or brightness. The signal may be delivered to the lighting device via standard wiring components commonly used for providing power to the lighting fixtures. Such standard wiring components may include electrical wires or power lines used for providing electrical power for the light sources. More specifically, the signal may be delivered via traditional wires, such as active lines, common lines or ground lines of the standard power distribution electrical wiring system. The signal may include analog or digital components and may include any type, form or format of signal. The signal may comprise digital patterns that may be made up of pulse width modulated signals, square wave signals, datagram, data packets, or any other type or form of digital information. The signal may further comprise a stream of data bits divided into time intervals, each comprising one or more portions of the signal. The portions of the signal may include digital patterns identifying intensity or brightness of the light to be emitted by the remote lighting device receiving the signal. In some embodiments, digital patterns identify a duty cycle within a time interval. Such duty cycle within the time interval may be based on a sum of all time durations of the signal for which the signal is high within the time interval. The sum of the time durations may be divided by the total duration of the time interval to determine the ratio of the intensity. The ratio may be the ratio of the maximum intensity of light that can be emitted by the remote lighting device. The lighting device may filter and process the digital patterns and identify the intensity of the light from the digital patterns by determining the duty cycle or the ratio based on the duty cycle. The remote lighting device may emit the light as identified by the duty cycle or the ratio based on the duty cycle.
- Referring now to
FIG. 5A , an embodiment of a non-contact selection and control device of alighting system 100 is illustrated.FIG. 5A depicts alighting system 100 comprising anon-contact device 400 or a lightnon-contact switch 400 that includes alight source LED 405,LED controller 410,power supply 140,light detector 420 anddetector controller 425. Thenon-contact device 400 is in connection with one or more LED devices, such as lighting devices or sources 110 or any other components of thelighting system 100.LED 405 andlight detector 420 furthercomprise gain circuit 470.LED 405 of thenon-contact switch 400 is a light source that may emit an electromagnetic signal, such as a light, a wireless or an optical signal.LED 405 is controlled by aLED Controller 410 via aconnection 105. The components of thenon-contact device 400 may also be connected to apower supply 140.Non-contact switch 400 may further include alight detector 420 that may be connected todetector controller 425 viaconnection 105. Thenon-contact device 400 may detect anobject 450 located outside of the lightnon-contact switch 400 by detecting any interference, effect or reflection of the signal emitted byLED 405 caused by theobject 450.Object 405 may also generate or emit an electromagnetic or other type or form signal to be detected by thenon-contact device 400.Light detector 420 of thenon-contact device 400 may be controlled or modulated by thedetector controller 425 in any number of configurations to detect the signal reflected or emitted by theobject 450.Non-contact device 400 may transmit any detected signals to any number of lighting devices 110 or any other components of thelighting system 100. - Referring to
FIG. 5A in further detail,non-contact switch 400 may be any device, apparatus or a unit comprising any type and form of hardware, software, or any combination of hardware and software for non-contact selection or detection by any object. In some embodiments,non-contact switch 400 is a light switch box or a light switch device or package.Non-contact switch 400 may be any unit, apparatus, system or a component detecting anobject 450, a signal, a person or any living being within a distance from the non-contact switch. In further embodiments,non-contact switch 400 detects anobject 450, a person or a living being without theobject 450, the person or the living being touching thenon-contact switch 400 physically. In still further embodiments,non-contact switch 400 detects anobject 450, a person or a living being with theobject 450, the person or the living being physically touching or nearly touching thenon-contact switch 400.Non-contact switch 400 may comprise a box enclosing aLED 405, alight detector 420 or anyother lighting system 100 component, or more specifically a lightnon-contact switch 400 component, such as those displayed inFIG. 5 . In some embodiments, anon-contact switch 400 comprises, or is a component of a light fixture installed in a room. Thenon-contact device 400 may include any type of processor or processors configured to implement specialized functions for controlling, modulating or configuring any component of thenon-contact device 400, such as thelight detector 420 orLED 405.Non-contact device 400 may include any type and form of firmware or software instructions operating on the processor or the processors configured for controlling any of thenon-contact device 400 components. In addition to the components illustrated byFIG. 5 ,non-contact switch 400 may further include any number of hardware components detecting of any type and form of object, person or a user located at any distance from thenon-contact device 400.Non-contact device 400 may be used by a user to control one or more lighting devices, adjust brightness of the light emitted or to select specific lighting devices. In some embodiments,non-contact device 400 is used to select a particular light source 110 or a group of light sources 110 during the configuration thelighting system 100. In further embodiments, the user selects one or more light sources 110 to select or identify specific light sources to be configured a certain way, to be assigned a particular address or to be processed, programmed or controlled in a way determined by the system or the user. -
Transparent cover 460 may be any portion ofnon-contact switch 400 comprising a material that is transparent to a portion of the light emitted byLED 405.Non-contact switch 400 may comprise an enclosure that may further include any number of additional components, such as thetransparent cover 460. In some embodiments,transparent cover 460 comprises a material transparent in the visible or infrared range, such as for example, a glass, a clear plastic or a plexiglass cover.Transparent cover 460 may further comprise any other material that is transparent or semi-transparent to any light or signal emitted by theLED 405. The transparent cover may comprise a filter that filters out wavelengths of light outside of a predetermined range. The transparent cover may reflect a portion of a light, such as for example 0.01, 0.1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 percent of the light, or any other percentage of light between 10 and 90 percent that reach thetransparent cover 460. Thetransparent cover 460 may further include any component or a part of thenon-contact switch 400 that reflects or is capable of reflecting signal emitted from theLED 405.Transparent cover 460 may be opaque to any wavelength of light aside from the light emitted by theLED 405.Transparent cover 460 may comprise an optical filter, filtering, absorbing or reflecting some wavelengths of light and allowing others to pass through.Transparent cover 460 may be positioned on the enclosure of thenon-contact switch 400 to reflect a specific portion of light from theLED 405 towards thelight detector 420.Transparent cover 460 may comprise a reflective coating to ensure a specific reflectivity, or a reflectivity of a specific percentage or portion of the signal fromLED 405. In some embodiments,transparent cover 460 comprises a reflective surface, such as a mirror for example. Transparent cover may be positioned anywhere within thenon-contact switch 400 or outside of theswitch 400. In some embodiments,transparent cover 460 is a component of the enclosure of thenon-contact switch 400. -
Transparent cover 460 may allow only a portion of light to propagate through the transparent cover while reflecting a fraction of the light. In some embodiments, transparent cover reflects between 10 and 20, 20 and 30, 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90 and 90 and 99.99 percent of the signal. The transparent cover may also propagate, transmit or allow transmission of any portion of the signal such as for example, 99.99 and 95, 95 and 90, 90 and 80, 80 and 70, 70 and 60, 60 and 50, 50 and 40, 40 and 30, 30 and 20, 20 and 10, or 10 and 0.01 percent of the signal. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 0 and 1 percent of light, such as for example 0.2, 0.4, 0.6 or 0.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 1 and 2 percent of light, such as for example 1.2, 1.4, 1.6 or 1.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 2 and 3 percent of light, such as for example 2.2, 2.4, 2.6 or 2.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 3 and 4 percent of light, such as for example 3.2, 3.4, 3.6 or 3.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 4 and 5 percent of light, such as for example 4.2, 4.4, 4.6 or 4.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 5 and 6 percent of light, such as for example 5.2, 5.4, 5.6 or 5.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 6 and 7 percent of light, such as for example 6.2, 6.4, 6.6 or 6.8 percent of light emitted by theLED 405 reaching the transparent cover. In further embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 7-10 percent of light emitted by theLED 405. In further embodiments, the transparent cover reflects between about 10 and 20 percent of light, or between 20 and 30, 30 and 40, 40 and 50, 50 and 60, 60 and 70, 70 and 80, 80 and 90 or 90 and 99.99 percent for example.Transparent cover 460 may comprise any component, or any group of components of thenon-contact switch 400 that reflect, refract, permeate or propagate any portion of the signal emitted byLED 405. -
LED 405 of thenon-contact device 400 may be any type and form of an apparatus, component or a device emitting or producing an electromagnetic signal.LED 405 may be positioned or deployed anywhere within or around any lighting system 110 component. In some embodiments,LED 405 is light source 110. In other embodiments,LED 405 is a semiconductor light emitting diode. In further embodiments,LED 405 is a component producing a wireless signal. In still further embodiments,LED 405 is a unit producing a radio or an RF (radio frequency) signal.LED 405 may emit or generate an electromagnetic wave of any wavelength, power or spectral range. In still further embodiments,LED 405 is an infra red light emitting diode or source.LED 405 may be a light emitting source that emits light of constant intensity or varying intensity. In some embodiments,LED 405 is a light emitting diode emitting a time dependent intensity or power varying signal. In further embodiments,LED 405 is a flickering light emitting device.LED 405 may emit an amplitude modulated, frequency modulated, phase modulated, pulse width modulated or any signal or output of single or multi-level modulation scheme or type.LED 405 may further comprise any number of light sources or light emitting devices. In some embodiments,LED 405 comprises an array of light emitting diodes, laser diodes, lamps, bulbs or any other type or form of electromagnetic wave emitting devices.LED 405 may include a number of similar or different light emitting devices, sources, diodes or any other components which may or may not be associated with a light source 110. - Different light sources within the
LED 405 may emit signals at different power ranges, different spectral ranges, different intensities and signals with no modulations or signals modulated with various types of modulation schemes.LED 405 may further include a second light emitting source emitting a light signal intended to help control or modulate the gain circuitry, such asgain circuit 470, of thelight detector 420. The noise signal light source may emit light at a specific average intensity and a specific spectral range to maintain the gain feedback circuitry, such as thegain circuit 470, of thelight detector 420 within a specific sensitivity range. Such sensitivity range of thelight detector 420, based on the intensity and the spectral range of the signal, may enable thelight detector 420 to detect anobject 450 at a specific distance or distance range from thenon-contact device 400. The total light of theLED 405 may include the first light source emitting the modulated and controlled signal and the second light source emitting the noise or the background signal for modulating the gain of thelight detector 420. In some embodiments,LED 405 includes two ormore LED 405 components, each of which may include any functionality or embodiment of anyother LED 405. -
LED 405 may include any number of sources that emit pulsed signals at a specific frequency or at a number of specific frequencies or frequency ranges. For example, light emitted by one or more sources of theLED 405 may have a spectral ranges in the visible, near infra red, infra red or far infra red range. The light emitted may also be modulated in bursts or pulses occurring for a specific duration of time at a specific frequency or a range of frequencies. In some embodiments, light emitted may be random and constant light. In further embodiments, signal comprises light in x-ray range, visible range, near infrared range, mid infrared range, a far infrared range or radio wavelength range. - The signal may comprise light having any spectral range, such as between 1 and 5 nanometers, 5 and 10 nanometers, 10 and 15 nanometers, 15 and 20 nanometers, 20 and 25 nanometers, 25 and 30 nanometers, 30 and 40 nanometers, 40 and 60 nanometers, 60 and 80 nanometers, 80 and 100 nanometers, 100 and 400 nanometers or 400 and 2000 or more nanometers. In still further embodiments, signal comprises pulses or bursts of signal which may occur at a carrier frequency. The carrier frequency may be any frequency, such as for example, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 or 60 kilohertz. In still further embodiments, the carrier frequency may include any frequency between 100 hertz and 1 kilohertz, 1 kilohertz and 5 kilohertz, 5 kilohertz and 20 kilohertz, 20 kilohertz and 50 kilohertz, 50 kilohertz and 70 kilohertz, 70 kilohertz and 150 kilohertz, 150 kilohertz and 300 kilohertz, 300 kilohertz and 1 megahertz, 1 megahertz and 10 megahertz, 10 megahertz and 100 megahertz, or 100 megahertz and 1000 megahertz. The signal may comprise modulation such as frequency, phase, amplitude or pulse width modulation. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency of the signal is in the range of 30-35 kilohertz. In further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 35-40 kilohertz. In still further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 40-45 kilohertz. In yet further embodiments, the signal has a carrier frequency of 45-100 kilohertz. The signal may be emitted within any conical angle from the LED, such as between 1 and 3 degrees, 3 and 5 degrees, 5 and 10 degrees, 10 and 20 degrees, 20 and 30 degrees, 30 and 40 degrees, 40 and 50 degrees, 50 and 60 degrees, 60 and 70 degrees, 70 and 80 degrees, 80 and 90 degrees, 90 and 100 degrees, 100 and 110 degrees, 110 and 120 degrees, 120 and 130 degrees, 130 and 140 degrees, 140 and 150 degrees, 150 and 180 degrees, 180 and 220 degrees, 220 and 250 degrees, 250 and 270 degrees and 270 and 360 degrees. In a plurality of embodiments,
LED 405 emits pulses of light wherein the pulses occur within any frequency range. In some embodiments,LED 405 emits pulses of light wherein the pulses have a specific duty cycle. In some embodiments,LED 405 emits an electromagnetic signal that is modulated and controlled byLED controller 410. In some embodiments,LED 405 is positioned inside thenon-contact switch 400. In other embodiments,LED 405 is positioned outside of thenon-contact switch 400. In some embodiments,LED 405 is positioned or installed on or within a lighting device 110. In further embodiments,LED 405 is positioned near alighting system 100 component, such as a lighting device 110. In still further embodiments,LED 405 is positioned on a wall of a room that is illuminated by a lighting device 110. -
Gain circuit 470 may be any hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software that controls, modulates or maintains performance or operation ofLED 405 orlight detector 420.Gain circuit 470 may include logic circuits, or software operating on one or more processors to control or manage how signals from theLED 405 are detected bylight source 410.Gain circuit 470 may utilize a fraction of light reflected by thetransparent cover 460 towards thelight detector 420 to maintain thelight detector 420 within a specific detection range. In some embodiments,gain circuit 470 manages or controls detection oflight detector 410 of any signal, including the signal from theLED 405 or from any other light source, such as for example an emitter ofobject 450. In some embodiments, gain circuit may be comprised by any component of thenon-contact switch 400, such as anLED 405,light detector 420,LED controller 410 ordetector controller 425.Gain circuit 470 may be connected in a feedback loop with thelight detector 420 or theLED 405. - The
gain circuit 470 may maintain thelight detector 420 at a specific detection threshold or detection range. The gain circuit may be configured to provide real-time adjustments to thelight detector 420 so that the signal detected by thelight detector 420 may be maintained within a specific operating range of thelight detector 420. In some embodiments, thegain circuit 470 maintains a feedback loop with thelight detector 420 to maintain the detecting range of thelight detector 420 at a specific detection range, such as slightly below a threshold level of the detection of thelight detector 420. As ambient light, such as background noise light, increases in intensity, thegain circuit 470 may compensate and adjust to still maintain the gain of thelight detector 420 within the specific range. Following the adjustment by thegain circuit 470,light detector 420 would still adjust and maintain the sensitivity to the presence ofobject 450. For example, when there is a lot of ambient light in the room wherenon-contact switch 400 is installed,gain circuit 470 may decrease the gain of thelight detector 420 to compensate for the increased ambient light. In the instance where theobject 450 is brought within a specific distance from thenon-contact device 400, the reflected portion of theLED 405 signal may increase the amount of the detected signal slightly above the threshold. Thelight detector 420 may then detect the presence of theobject 450 as the threshold has been exceeded by the portion of the signal reflected by theobject 450. Normally, thegain circuit 470 may compensate for any changes in ambient light by setting and maintain thelight detector 420 within the detection range just below the detectable threshold. However, as thepresent object 450 reflects a substantial amount of light towards thelight detector 420, thegain circuit 470 may not compensate for such a great increase in light intensity fast enough and theobject 450 may be detected by thelight detector 420. As such,gain circuit 470 may control the sensitivity of the signal detected bylight detector 420 such that compensates for changes in ambient light or background noise but does not lose sensitivity to the presence of theobject 450. Thegain circuit 470 may control thelight detector 420 such that thelight detector 420 it is not oversensitive to detect the presence of theobject 450 when theobject 450 is not present within a predetermined distance from thenon-contact device 400. The gain circuit of any of theLED 405,LED controller 410,detector controller 425 orlight detector 420 may perform any functionality or include any embodiments of any of the gain circuits of theLED 405,LED controller 410,light detector 420 anddetector controller 425. - In some embodiments,
gain circuit 470 includes an average intensity filter, a frequency filter and a comparator. The average intensity filter of thegain circuit 470 may monitor the average intensity of the signal detected by thelight detector 420. The average intensity filter may further filter out intensity of signal that is below or above a predetermined threshold intensity. In some embodiments, average intensity filter may only allow the signals that are within a predetermined range of the average intensities to pass through the filter. For example, if average intensity of light received by thelight detector 420 is below a predetermined intensity threshold, the average intensity may filter out the signal. As such, the average intensity filter may filter out signals outside of the predetermined range. Just as with average intensity filter, the frequency filter of thegain circuit 470 may filter out any signal that is outside of a predetermined frequency range. In some embodiments, the frequency signal filters out signals that have carrier frequency outside of the allowed frequency range. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency range of allowed signals may be any signals that have pulses or carrier frequency between 30 and 50 kilohertz. In some embodiments, the carrier frequency range of allowed signals may be around 40 kilohertz, such as 41 or 42 kilohertz for example. Comparator of thegain circuit 470 may compare the signals that passed through the average intensity filter and the frequency filter against a threshold. The comparator may compare the signal filtered by the average intensity filter and the frequency filter against a predetermined threshold or a predetermined threshold range. If the comparator detects that the signal exceeds the threshold theobject 450 is detected. Similarly, in set-ups where the comparator compares the signal that is lower than a predetermined threshold, theobject 450 is detected if the signal is lower than the predetermined threshold.Gain circuit 470 may use any one of, or any combination of, the average intensity filter, frequency filter and a comparator together with any automatic gain controller circuit to control the detection of thelight detector 420. -
LED controller 410 may be any device, unit, component or a function for controlling, managing or drivingLED 405.LED controller 410 may include any hardware, software or any combination of hardware and software for controlling, driving or enabling emitting of light by one ormore LED 405.LED controller 410 may be a device, product or a system controlling, maintaining or enabling functionality or operation ofLED 405. In some embodiments,LED controller 410 comprises a processing unit configured or comprising specific instructions for controlling, adjusting, maintaining or enabling functionality or operation ofLED 405, such as signal or light emitting. In many embodiments,LED controller 410 comprises analog or digital circuitry for controlling, maintaining, adjusting or enabling functionality ofLED 405. In further embodiments,LED controller 410 comprises switches, latches or transistor circuitry which switchLED 405 on or off. In a plurality or embodiments,LED controller 410 comprises monitoring circuitry monitoring and observing performance or functionality ofLED 405. In many embodiments,LED controller 410 comprises modulating circuitry, gain circuitry or circuitry for maintaining the detector within a specific gain range or detection range. Sometimes,LED controller 410 modulates, adjusts or changes state, status or performance ofLED 405 in response to the monitored or observed performance or functionality ofLED 405. - In some embodiments,
LED controller 410 may include gain circuitry, such asgain circuit 470, adjustment of gain of the signal emitted by the LED and detected by thelight detector 420 in order to maintain thelight detector 420 within a specific detection range. The adjustment may be real-time adjustment.Gain circuit 470 may be comprised by any component of thenon-contact switch 400. For example, a gain circuitry of theLED controller 410 may maintain the output at a specific threshold or within a specific range. Thegain circuit 470 of theLED controller 410 may control the properties of the electromagnetic signal emitted by theLED 405 such that thelight detector 420 is maintained slightly below a detection range threshold. By maintaining thelight detector 420 within a specific range, thelight detector 420 may be controlled such that the reflected signal reaching the detector is below the detectable threshold unless anobject 450 is placed within a predetermined distance from thenon-contact switch 400.LED controller 410 may modulate current, voltage or power toLED 405 to maintain thelight detector 420 within a specific threshold or operating range as desired by the configuration of distance within which theobject 450 may be detected. In some embodiments, gain circuitry may be adjusted so thatobject 450 is detected at a greater distance. In other embodiments, gain circuitry is adjusted so that theobject 450 is detected at a distance very close to thenon-contact switch 400. The distance may be any distance ranging from 1 millimeter, 2 millimeters, 5 millimeters, 1 centimeter, 2 centimeters, 5 centimeters, 10 centimeters, 20 centimeters, 50 centimeters, 70 centimeters, 1 meter, 2 meters, 5 meters, 10 meters, 20 meters or any other distance desired by the user. In some embodiments,LED controller 410 comprises functionality which scales up or scales down the gain of theLED 405 using a dial, a button or a setting. In some embodiments, software operating on a processor of theLED controller 410 monitors and modulates the gain of the light emitted by one or more light sources of theLED 405 to maintainlight detector 420 within a specific operating detection range. The gain circuitry of theLED controller 410 may be adjusted in response to background noise to compensate for increased or decreased background noise. -
LED controller 410 may modulate, control or adjustLED 405 operation such thatLED 405 emits or generates light of a specific wavelength, power or intensity range as controlled by theLED controller 410. In a number of embodiments,LED controller 410 modulates, adjusts or controls LED 405 such thatLED 405 emits one or more signals of a specific intensity controlled byLED controller 410. In many embodiments,LED controller 410 modulates, adjusts or controls LED 405 such thatLED 405 emits light in pulses occurring at a specific frequency. In some embodiments,LED controller 410 modulates LED 405 to emit light within the infra red wavelength range. In many embodiments,LED 405 emits light within infra-red wavelength range. In a plurality of embodiments,LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than 100 nanometers. In many embodiments,LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than 50 nanometers. In some embodiments,LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than 10 nanometers. In a number of embodiments,LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of about 5 nanometers or less than 5 nanometers. In some embodiments,LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of about one or two nanometers of full width at half maximum of the signal. In a number of embodiments,LED 405 emits light having a spectral range of less than one nanometer. -
LED 405 may include a plurality of light sources, one of which acts as a light source emitting a background noise signal. In some embodiments, anon-contact switch 400 comprises a plurality ofLEDs 405. A first one of theLEDs 405 may emit a pulsed signal designated to be the signal that thelight detector 420 detects and interprets. This signal may be the signal to be reflected off of theobject 450 and detected by thelight detector 420. The second one of theLEDs 405 may emit a constant low intensity signal, such as a synthetic background noise signal. Synthetic noise may be noise generated byLED 405 to suppress any background noise created by the environment. The synthetic noise signal may be in the general intensity or power range or in an intensity or power range that is larger than the intensity or power range of the background signal of the environment coming from outside of thenon-contact switch 400. The synthetic background noise or background noise signal produced by thesecond LED 405 may be any signal within a wavelength and power range detectable by thelight detector 420. By having a stronger synthetic constant background noise signal transmitted by one ormore LEDs 405, any additional less intense background noise signals from the environment may be not as damaging to the communications of theLED 405. In one example, afirst LED 405 emits a high intensity signal via which thelight switch enclosure 400 detects the presence of theobject 450. Thesecond LED 405 of the same or a different light switch enclosure may emit a lower intensity signal than the signal emitted by thefirst LED 405. Thesecond LED 405 signal may have an intensity that is higher than a common or expected background noise from the environment. Both, the first and thesecond LEDs 405, may emit signals that are electromagnetic signals within a frequency, power or intensity range that is detected by thelight detector 420. Thelight detector 420 may detect both signals. As background noise is generated from the environment, thesecond LED 405 emitting a stronger signal in this wavelength range than the background noise, may in suppress the background noise. In some embodiments,LED 405 comprises a Rohm or Sharp surface mount infrared emitting component, such as for example a Rohm palm device component emitting infrared light at pulses of around 40 kilohertz. -
Light detector 420 may be any device, component or a unit detecting or sensing any electromagnetic signal or wave.Light detector 420 may include or comprise any type and form of hardware, software or combination of software and hardware for sensing or detecting light or optical signal. In some embodiments,light detector 420 senses light or an electromagnetic wave and produces a voltage or a current proportional to the intensity or the power of the light or the electromagnetic wave sensed. Thelight detector 420 may detect emission or radiation of any type and form, of any frequency and of any power or wavelength range.Light detector 420 includes a semiconductor detector, such as a silicon detector or a Gallium Arsenide detector. In some embodiments,light detector 420 includes a diode, such as a photodiode. In some embodiments,light detector 420 detects or senses heat or infra red radiation or signals. In other embodiments,light detector 420 includes a sensor for detecting light within a room that is illuminated by a lighting device 110. In another embodiment,light detector 420 includes a sensor detecting ambient light. In other embodiments,light detector 420 includes a color sensor for sensing a color of light or a wavelength of light. In yet further embodiments,light detector 420 is a color temperature sensor for detecting color temperature of a light source. In still further embodiments,light detector 420 senses or detects chromaticity of light. In a number of embodiments,light detector 420 detects an electromagnetic signal within the frequency or wavelength range of the signal emitted by theLED 405. For example,light detector 420 may be tuned to collect any radiation having spectral or modulation characteristics of the signal emitted byLED 405 in order to detect if anobject 450 is present. Theobject 450 may be detected by thedetector 420 due to theobject 450 reflecting the signal from theLED 405 to thelight detector 420. In such instances,light detector 420 may detect the presence of anobject 450 whenobject 450 is within a specific distance from thelight detector 420. In some embodiments,light source 420 is a sound or acoustic wave sensor detecting sound or acoustic signals. In some embodiments,light detector 420 detects RF or radio frequency signals. - In still further embodiments,
light source 420 detects any type, form or configuration of a signal that may be affected by presence of anobject 450 within a perimeter of thelight detector 420. In some embodiments,light detector 420 detects or senses near infra red signals, such as the signals emitted by a remote control. In still further embodiments,light detector 420 detects or senses wireless transmission signals, such as the signals of a wireless internet connection generally received by wireless network cards of computers and laptops. In various embodiments,light detector 420 comprises any functionality of anyother lighting system 100 component.Light detector 420 may be detecting modulation of the light oscillating at a carrier frequency. The carrier frequency may be any carrier frequency, such as a carrier frequency of about 40 kilohertz. In some embodiments,light detector 420 comprises a Panasonic receiver, such PNA4602 receiver. -
Detector controller 425 may be any device controlling or managing operation or functionality of thelight detector 420.Detector controller 425 may be any device, unit or component processing or modifying the output signal of thelight detector 420. In some embodiments,detector controller 425 is a device, product or a system controlling, configuring or managing thelight detector 420. In other embodiments,detector controller 425 comprises hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software for controlling, adjusting or maintaining functionality of one or morelight detectors 420. In some embodiments,detector controller 425 comprises analog or digital circuitry for controlling, maintaining, adjusting or enabling functionality of thelight detector 420. In further embodiments,detector controller 425 comprises switches, latches or transistor circuitry which controls or modulateslight detector 420.Detector controller 425 may comprise monitoring circuitry which uses a software running on a processor of thedetector controller 425 to receive, process or modify the output signal of thelight detector 420. For example, output signal of alight detector 420 may be sent to thedetector controller 425, which may use any functionality to determine if the received signal signifies the presence of anobject 450 within a predetermined perimeter from thelight detector 420. In some embodiments,light detector controller 425 may use thelight detector 420 output signal to determine performance, operation or action of the lighting device 110. For example, if alight detector 420 detects a signal affected by anobject 450,detector controller 425 may process the signal and determine that anobject 450 is present. Thedetector controller 425 may in response to the determination that theobject 450 is present sent a signal to the lighting device 110 or any other component of thelighting system 100. The lighting device 110 may, in response to the signal from thedetector controller 425, start emitting light, stop emitting light or change the intensity, color or any other configuration of the light emitted. -
Detector controller 425 may receive and monitor current or voltage output signals from any number oflight detectors 420. In some embodiments,detector controller 425 receives current or voltage output signal from one or morelight detectors 420 and converts the current or the voltage signal into a digital signal. Sometimes,detector controller 425 processes current or voltage output signal from one or morelight detectors 420. In various embodiments,detector controller 425 adjusts one or more functionalities or performance characteristics of one or morelight detectors 420 in response to the received current or voltage output signal received. In a plurality of embodiments,detector controller 425 may form and transmit commands or instructions, such asinstructions 650, to any lighting device 110.Detector controller 425 may send communication or receive communication fromother lighting system 100 components, as desired or as necessary. In some embodiments,detector controller 425 includes any functionality of anyother lighting system 100 component, such as the lighting device 110. -
Object 450 may be any type and form of an object, such as a book, a chair, a door, a pen, a signal, a human being or any other living being.Object 450 may be an object capable of changing, modifying or affecting the signal detected by thelight detector 420.Object 450 may be a person or a part of a person, such as a person's hand.Object 450 may be a signal emitter emitting an electromagnetic signal, such as a remote controller, light emitter or a radio emitter. In some embodiments,object 450 is a person that reflects a signal into thelight detector 420 of thenon-contact switch 400 by walking into a room that has a lightnon-contact switch 400 installed on a wall. In some embodiments,LED 405 emits an electromagnetic signal which is reflected off of the person and detected by thelight detector 420. Thelight detector 420 may detect the presence of the person in the room and send the signal to thedetector controller 425 which in turn may send an instruction to lighting devices 110 in the room to turn on and emit light. -
Object 450 may be a device or an apparatus emitting a signal. In some embodiments,object 450 is an emitter such as a remote controller that emits an infra red signal detected by thenon-contact switch 400. The signal may be detected by thelight detector 420 and the light from the lighting devices 110 may be turned on. In still further embodiments, object 450 may be any object, person or a device intercepting, reflecting or affecting the signal detected or sensed by thelight detector 420.Object 450 may be any object reflecting a portion of light emitted byLED 405 towardlight detector 420. In some embodiments,object 450 emits an electromagnetic signal, heat, acoustic or sound signal, a wireless signal, radio signal or any type and form of signal that thelight detector 420 detects. In some embodiments,object 450 creates an interference or obstruction to an intensity, phase, frequency or amplitude of a signal detected bylight detector 420.Object 450 may create an obstruction or a lapse in the signal amplitude, phase, frequency or intensity, which may be detected by alight detector 420. In some embodiments,object 450 reflects a signal such that thelight detector 420 detects the reflected signal in an increasing fashion as theobject 450 approaches thelight detector 420. - The components of the
non-contact switch 400, such as theLED 405,LED controller 410,light detector 420 and thedetector controller 425 may each include one or more gain circuits to adjust the amount of light from theLED 405 to be detected by thelight detector 410. In one example, a gain circuit of aLED 405 may adjust and control the output light of theLED 405 to maintain thelight detector 420 within a specific operating range. The specific operating range may be a range of operation of theLED 405 orlight detector 420 or both such that thelight detector 410 detects the light from theLED 405 with a specific sensitivity. For example, the gain circuit may cause theLED 405 to emit just enough light to enable thelight detector 420 to barely detect portions of the light from theLED 405 reaching thelight detector 410. The portions of light may be the fraction of light reflected from a transparent or a semi-transparent portion of an enclosure of thenon-contact switch 400, such as a transparent cover. The transparent cover may include glass or a plexiglass portion that reflects the light towardsdetector 420. The gain circuit may maintain the amount of light detected by thelight detector 420 just below the threshold of the presence of theobject 450. The presence of theobject 450 may then provide an additional amount of reflection reaching thelight detector 420, thus exceeding the threshold of detection. Once the threshold is exceeded thelight detector 420 may send the signal that object 450 has been detected. - Similarly in another example, a gain circuit of
light detector 420 may adjust and control the detection settings of thelight detector 420 to maintain thelight detector 420 within a specific operating range. The gain circuit may cause thelight detector 420 to detect light with a specific sensitivity or configuration to enable thelight detector 420 to detect portions of the light from theLED 405 just below the detection threshold of thelight detector 420. As such, thelight detector 420 may detect absence of anyobject 450 from the perimeter of thenon-contact switch 450. In the instance that theobject 450 approaches thenon-contact switch 400, theobject 450 will detect an additional amount of the signal from theLED 405 back into thelight detector 420. The gain circuit maintaining the amount of light detected by thelight detector 420, may experience a rising signal which will be too strong to be compensated for by the gain circuit quickly enough and thelight detector 410 will detect the presence of theobject 450. Similarly, gain circuits may be deployed in the ledcontroller 410 ordetector controller 425 in any orientation. The gain circuits may control the sensitivity of thelight detector 420 or the gain circuits may control the intensity, power, pulse frequency, carrier frequency or even wavelength of the light emitted fromLED 405 to enable and control the detection of theobject 450 when present. -
Non-contact switch 400 may be used by any number of users to control, manage or configure alighting system 100 as well as to communicate with one or more oflighting system 100 components. Sometimes, lightnon-contact switch 400 is configured to perform a set of tasks enabling user communication with alighting system 100. In some embodiments,non-contact switch 400 is configured or tuned to perform sensing of a user's presence. In many embodiments,non-contact switch 400 is configured or tuned to enable a user to control light intensity, light color, pulsing or other performance characteristics of light sources 110. In many embodiments,non-contact switch 400 is configured or tuned to enable a user to select a group of light sources 110 and control them separately from otherlight sources 100. In some embodiments,non-contact switch 400 components are tuned and configured to operate based on frequency of pulses of signal at a specific predetermined frequency. In some embodiments, lightnon-contact switch 400 components are tuned and configured to emit and/or detect pulses of signal at a specific predetermined intensity. In still further embodiments, lightnon-contact switch 400 components are tuned and configured to emit and/or detect pulses of signal within a specific predetermined spectral range. - For example,
non-contact switch 400 components may be tuned and configured to emit and/or detect the signal at a specific predetermined combination of frequency, intensity, wavelength or modulation. Upon placing anobject 450 in the vicinity of thenon-contact switch 400 component, any feature of the signal, such as the intensity, frequency, wavelength or format, may be interrupted and the interruption may be detected by thelight detector 420. In some embodiments,LED controller 410 modulates LED 405 to emit or generate pulses or bursts of electromagnetic, acoustic or other wireless signal at a specific frequency and a specific intensity.Light detector 420 may be modulated bydetector controller 425 to detect the signals emitted by theLED 405 at the frequency and intensity range emitted by theLED 405. Thedetector controller 425 may modulate thelight detector 420 by user configuration, frequency or resistance adjustment, programming of thedetector controller 425, setting up configuration inputs or any other user action or activity.Detector controller 425 may process the signals from thelight detector 420 in accordance with configuration settings and alertother lighting system 100 components when theobject 450 is in the vicinity. In some embodiments, signals emitted byLED 405 may be adjusted to include pulse frequency, signal intensity, signal wavelength and modulation format which are all within detectable range of thelight detector 410. Thelight detector 410 may continuously, periodically or randomly check for the signal presence. The signal being maintained by the gain circuit within a specific range just below a detectable threshold range of thelight detector 410 may signify that theobject 450 is not within the vicinity. However, when theobject 450 is within the vicinity the signal reflected off of theobject 450 and reaching thelight detector 410 may increase and exceed the threshold.Light detector 410 may then detect the presence of theobject 450. In some embodiments, object 450 may interrupt or change the intensity, power, frequency, wavelength or modulation of the signal emitted from theLED 405.Light detector 410 may detect such changes and interpret the detection as the presence of theobject 450. - The threshold distance or distance range within which the
non-contact switch 400 components detect the presence ofobject 450 may be configured by any configuration method. In some embodiments, the user configures the threshold or distance range by setting the distance or relative position or direction of thenon-contact switch 400 components, such as theLED 405 andlight detector 420. In further embodiments, the threshold or distance range may be set by choosing a duration of pulse and the frequency of pulses emitted byLED 405. In still further embodiments, the threshold or distance range may be set by selecting a spectral range of the light emitted byLED 405, as well as the average intensity of the light emitted. In other embodiments,lighting system 100 includes a configuration tool which enables the user to configure the vicinity range or threshold within which theobject 450 is detected. In some embodiments, the threshold or the range of the vicinity or distance within which theobject 450 is detected is preset or preconfigured by the manufacturer. In further embodiments, the threshold range or the distance range of the vicinity may be adjusted by a button, setting, dial or an input on thelight switch enclosure 400 or anyother lighting system 100 component. - The vicinity or range within which the
object 450 is detected by thenon-contact switch 400 may be as any range or threshold of distance. In some embodiments, the vicinity is any length between theobject 450 and thenon-contact switch 400. In some embodiments, the vicinity is any distance or range of about 1, 2, 5, 10 or 15 centimeters. In further embodiments, the vicinity is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 millimeters. In further embodiments, vicinity is a distance of 15, 20, 20, 30, 40 or 50 centimeters. In other embodiments, vicinity is a range or a threshold of distance of between 50 centimeters and 1 meter. In further embodiments, vicinity is a range of between 1 and 10 meters. Vicinity may be configured by configuring or adjusting the output signal characteristics of theLED 405 and detectable range and performance oflight detector 420. In some embodiments, vicinity may be altered by the user using configuration schemes, settings, programs or inputs for thelight switch enclosure 400 orlighting system 100. In many embodiments, vicinity is a range or threshold of distance which is constant and predetermined for a specificnon-contact switch 400. In other embodiments, vicinity is a range or threshold of distance which may vary depending on the configuration, user inputs and signals or instructions fromother lighting system 100 components. -
Non-contact switch 400 may communicate toother lighting system 100 components by sending or receiving signals or instructions. In some embodiments,LED 405 of a first light switch enclosure transmits communication to a secondlight switch enclosure 400. Thelight detector 420 of the secondlight switch enclosure 400 may detect the signal emitted by theLED 405 of the firstlight switch enclosure 400. The secondlight switch enclosure 400 may process or forward theinstruction 650 to one or more lighting devices 110. In some embodiments, both the first and thesecond enclosures 650 are associated with one or more lighting devices 110. When a firstlight switch enclosure 400 transmits a transmission, such as aninstruction 650 viaLED 405, the secondlight switch enclosure 400 may receive the transmission and forward it to the one or more lighting devices 110 associated with the secondlight switch enclosure 400. The one or more lighting devices 110 may implement theinstruction 650 or operate in accordance to the instructions received. In some embodiments, a plurality oflight switch enclosures 400 are configured to be in communication with one or more lighting devices 110. The master lighting device 110 may transmit aninstruction 650 to any number of the plurality of lighting devices 110 via it's ownnon-contact switch 400. The signal, such as theinstruction 650, may be transmitted wirelessly via theLED 405 and the plurality oflight switch enclosures 400 may receive theinstruction 650 and forward theinstructions 650 to the lighting devices 110 to implement theinstruction 650. -
Non-contact switch 400 may further communicate with one or more light sources 110. In some embodiments, components of thenon-contact switch 400 may be associated with one or more light sources 110. For example, a light source 110 may comprise components of thenon-contact switch 400, such as theLED 405 or thelight detector 420.Non-contact switches 400 may be used for assigning of unique digital addresses to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, anon-contact switch 400 is used to assign a unique digital address to a lighting device 110 that is connected to aswitch 400. In further embodiments, anon-contact switch 400 is used to assign a unique digital address to a plurality of lighting devices 110 that are connected to or in communication with thelight switch enclosure 400. Assigning of the unique digital address may be done by sending an instruction or a command viaconnections 105 to all the lighting devices 110 connected. The instruction or the command may be anyinstruction 650 that indicates that a lighting device 110 will be assigned an unique digital address. The same or another instruction may be transmitted identifying a first unique digital address, or the first address 127 to all the lighting devices 110. A user may place a hand, or anyother object 450, within the vicinity of aswitch 400 associated with a particular lighting device 110. Thelight detector 420 of thelight switch enclosure 400 may detect the presence of the hand and send the signal to the lighting device 110 associated with thelight switch enclosure 400. The receipt of the signal by the lighting device 110 will indicate to the lighting device 110 that the user has identified that particular lighting device 110 as the lighting device 110 to be assigned the first address 127. This particular lighting device 110 may then save the address 127 and use the address 127 for communicating with any other lighting devices 110 on the network of lighting devices 110. In such or similar manner the user may identify other lighting devices 110 and assign to them any particular unique digital addresses or addresses 127. The user may also assign to a group of lighting devices 110 one address 127, such that entire group will behave and act in accordance with instructions or commands transmitted along with that particular address 127. -
Non-contact switch 400 may be used for assigning a master or slave status to any lighting device 110. In some embodiments, the user may select a master or slave status by placing a hand in the vicinity of thelight switch enclosures 400 associated with particular lighting devices 110. A component of alighting system 100 may receive an instruction or a signal that the lighting system 110 is placed into an assignment mode. An assignment mode may be any mode of operation of thelighting system 100 wherein thelighting system 100 assigns an addresses 127 or a status, such as slave or master status, to one ormore lighting system 100 components. In some embodiments, an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of alighting system 100 to assign an addresses 127 to anylighting system 100 component. In other embodiments, an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of alighting system 100 to assign an master or a slave status to anylighting system 100 component. In yet further embodiments, an assignment mode is a mode, a function, a feature of alighting system 100 to assign any number of lighting devices to a group. Assignment mode may be a mode of operation or configuration in which thelighting system 100 allows the user to select vianon-contact switch 400 associated with light sources 110 the light sources 110 will be assigned to specific statuses, specific groups or specific addresses 127. When thelighting system 100 is placed in the assignment mode, the lighting system may send a group assigning instruction to each lighting device 110. The user may select vianon-contact switch 400 which of the lighting devices will be assigned to this particular group. Following the selection, the user may exit the assignment mode and each selected light source 110 may be saved into the group as selected. Similarly, the user may assign addresses 127 or master and slave statuses to each of the lighting devices 110. - Assignment mode, implemented by a
non-contact switch 400, may be any function or a setting of any of thelighting system 100 components, such as a function, a feature or a setting implemented by any of acontroller 120, acommunicator 125, a master/slave addressor 130, apower supply 140 or a light source 110. Assignment mode may include a software, a hardware or a combination of software and hardware for implementing tasks relating to assignment of addresses 127 for each of thelighting system 100 components. Assignment mode may include a means for transmitting or receiving messages from each of thelighting system 100 components who have received and accepted the addresses 127. Assignment mode may further receive confirmation messages from the lighting devices 110 that were selected by the user vianon-contact switch 400. In some embodiments,lighting system 100 components store the address 127 received from the master and transmit the confirmation messages to the master lighting device 110. The master lighting device 110 may then be aware which lighting devices have accepted and saved the address 127 the user has selected. The master lighting device 127 may send any further communication of these devices using the addresses 127 assigned. In some embodiments, the master lighting device 110 transmits one of a plurality of addresses 127 to each of thelighting system 100 components and waits for thelighting system 100 components to accept the address 127 transmitted. Thelighting system 100 components may accept the address 127 upon receiving the signal from anon-contact switch 400 as selected by the user. Thoselighting system 100 components selected by the user may return to the master lighting device 110 the confirmation messages indicating that theselighting system 100 component have accepted the addresses 127. Similarly, the master lighting device 110 may send out group assignment signals to the lighting devices 110 in the network. The lighting devices 110 may, upon receiving signals from thenon-contact switch 400 that anobject 450 was detected, send to the master lighting device the confirmation signals that the user has selected these lighting devices 110 to be in the same group. The group may be assigned a special group address 127, or a group identifier. Such a group address or a group identifier may be used to control the group of lighting devices 110 selected by the user in the future. In one example,light source 110A acceptingaddress 127A previously sent by the master receives a signal from a light switch enclosure that a user's presence, or anobject 450, was detected. Thelight source 110A sends a confirmation message confirming thatlight source 110A has accepted the address 127. The master lighting device 110, in response to the received confirmation message, associates address 127 with thelighting system 100 component for any future communication. In some embodiments, assignment mode entails the master receiving messages from one ormore lighting system 100 components and assigning addresses 127 in response to the received messages. - In one example, a
non-contact switch 400 may be utilized with associatedlighting system 100 components for assignment of addresses 127. In some embodiments, a master communicates with a plurality oflighting system 100 components which may or may not have a master status. One of the plurality oflighting system 100 components is alight source 110A. In a number of embodiments,lighting system 100 components send information to the master usingnon-contact switch 400 associated withlighting system 100 components. A master may be placed in an assignment mode and may be available to receive any information from any one or more oflighting system 100 components. A user may select alight source 110A by placing anobject 450, such as a hand, in front of anon-contact switch 400 associated with thelight source 110A.Light detector 420 of thenon-contact switch 400, in response to the placedobject 450, detects light emitted byLED 405 andnon-contact switch 400 sends a signal indicating that thelight source 110A is selected.Light source 110A transmits a signal to the master indicating the user's selection and the master assigns an address 127, such asaddress 127A, to lightsource 110A. The master transmits information notifyinglight source 110A of the new address 127 assigned to thelight source 110A. Thelight source 110A uses the assigned address 127 to receive for communication with master or anyother lighting system 100 component. In some embodiments,light source 110A uses the assigned address 127 to recognize which information transmitted by anyother lighting system 100 component is addressed tolight source 110A. - In a similar example, the user may proceed to select any number of
lighting system 100 components by placing anobject 450 in front of anon-contact switch 400 associated of each selectedlighting system 100 component. The master, in response to user's selections via anon-contact switch 400, may assign an address 127 to each of the user selectedlighting 100 system components. Upon completing all the selections, the user may terminate the assignment mode and the master may store all the addresses 127 andlighting system 100 components associated with each of the addresses 127. Thelighting system 100 components may use addresses 127 assigned to transmit or receive information or communication among thelighting system 100 components assigned. In some embodiments, similar methods may be used to create a group oflighting system 100 components, or a group oflight sources 100. A user may configure the group by selecting vianon-contact switch 400 the light sources 110 that are the members of the group. In further embodiments,non-contact switch 400 may be used to distinguish a group of light sources 110 from another group of light sources 110. In some embodiments, each of the groups selected may be controlled separately by thelighting system 100. Eachlighting system 100 component may store an addresses 127 of the group or a zone. As the commands or instructions are received for the light sources 110 of the specific group, the address 127 may be used as a key to address the members of the specific group to perform a certain function without affecting light sources 110 of other groups. Such addresses may also be referred to as group identifiers.Non-contact switch 400 may be used in any combination with anyother lighting system 100 component to select, set up or configure any number oflighting system 100 components. - Referring now to
FIG. 5B , an embodiment of steps of a method for detecting an object is depicted. Atstep 505, an LED of a device emits a signal. Atstep 510, a first portion of the signal reflects off of a transparent cover towards a detector of the device and a second portion of the signal propagates through the transparent cover. Atstep 515, a gain circuit maintains a predetermined operation of the detector. Atstep 520, the detector determines that a reflected first portion of the signal is below a threshold of the detector. Atstep 525, the second portion of the signal reflects off of an object outside of the device towards the detector of the device. Atstep 530, the device determines that the object is present responsive to the detector determining that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. - Further referring to step 505 of
FIG. 5B , a LED of a device emits a signal. The signal emitted may be any signal, such has an electromagnetic signal. In some embodiments, the signal is an infrared signal or a radio signal. In further embodiments, the signal is a modulated signal comprising a carrier frequency between 20 and 60 kilohertz, such as 40 kilohertz for example. The carrier frequency may be a frequency of pulses of bursts of light emitted by the LED. The signal may further be amplitude, frequency, phase or pulse width modulated. In some embodiments, the signal may further be modulated in any additional way. In some embodiments, the signal comprises high components of the signal and low components of the signal. In some embodiments, high components of the signal correspond to pulses of light emitted from the LED. In further embodiments, low components of the signal correspond to durations of time when there are no pulses of the signal. In still further embodiments, low components of the signal correspond to durations of time where LED emits light having a lower intensity than the intensity of light emitted during the emission of high components of the signal. The high components of the signal may comprise or correspond to portions of the signal comprising voltage, current, power or intensity that is higher or larger than the voltage, current, power or intensity of the portions of the signal that are comprised by, or correspond to, the low components. The signal may comprise portions of the signal comprising any number of pulses such as 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90 or 100 pulses for example. In some embodiments, the portions of the signal comprise more than 100 pulses, such as 200, 500 or 1000 pulses. Each pulse may be a part of a period comprising high and low components. In some embodiments, a pulse may comprise any number of periods comprising high and low components. In further embodiments, a pulse comprises a high component and a duration of signal not having a pulse comprises a low component. The signal may be emitted within any conical angle from the LED, such as 180 degrees, for example. The signal may be emitted from within an enclosure of the device. The signal may comprise any type and form of communication comprising instructions, commands or data. The signal may comprise communication for any component of thelighting system 100, such as for example alighting device 100 or anothernon-contact switch 400. - At
step 510, a transparent cover of the device reflects a first portion of the signal and allows a second portion of the signal to propagate through or transmit through the transparent cover. In some embodiments, the first portion is emitted by a first light source of theLED 405 and the second portion is emitted by a second light source of theLED 405. In further embodiments, the first and the second portions are emitted by the same light source of theLED 405. In other embodiments, the first and second portions of the signal are emitted by different light sources of theLED 405. In still further embodiments, some portions of the first or second portions of the signal are emitted by multiple light sources of theLED 405, which may be same or different light sources. In some embodiments, the signal may be reflected from components, such as enclosure of the device, ledcontroller 410,power supply 140,light detector 420,detector controller 425,connections 105 or any other component of thenon-contact switch 400. In some embodiments, a first portion of the signal is reflected off of thetransparent cover 460. A portion of the first portion of the signal may be reflected towards a light detector, such as thelight detector 420. In some embodiments, the second portion of the signal propagates through the transparent cover and exit thenon-contact switch 400. The transparent cover may reflect a percentage of the signal, such as 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 percent and propagate the remainder of the signal. - At
step 520, a gain circuit maintains, monitors, controls or adjusts operation of the detector. Gain circuit may begain circuit 470. The detector may belight detector 420. Gain circuit may maintain operation of the detector to ensure that the detector operates within a predetermined sensitivity range. In some embodiments, predetermined sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the detector that is below the threshold for detecting a presence of anobject 450. In some embodiments, specific sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the light detected that is above the detection threshold for detecting a presence of anobject 450. In other embodiments, specific sensitivity range may be an average intensity range of the light detected that includes a detection threshold for detecting a presence of anobject 450. In some embodiments, specific sensitivity range may be an intensity or power range of the detector that is below the detection threshold for detecting of the presence of theobject 450. Gain circuit may maintain operation of the detector a specific percentage of the detection threshold intensity or power for detecting the presence of theobject 450. In some embodiments, gain circuit maintains operation of the detector between below the detection threshold for detecting theobject 450 by a predetermined percentage of the threshold. The predetermined percentage of the threshold may be any percentage of the intensity or power of light detected to meet or exceed the threshold for detecting of theobject 450. In some embodiments, the predetermined percentage of the threshold may be between 0 and 5 percent, 5 and 10 percent, 10 and 20 percent, 20 and 30, 30 and 40 percent, 40 and 50, 50 and 60 percent, 60 and 70 percent, 70 and 80 percent, 80 and 90 percent, 90 and 95 percent, or 95 and 100 percent of the detection threshold. In some embodiments, the gain circuit determines that the signal or a portion of the signal detected by the detector is below the specific sensitivity range. The portion of the signal may be a duration of any number of pulses, such as between 1 and 10 pulses, 10 and 20 pulses, 20 and 30 pulses, 30 and 40 pulses, 40 and 50 pulses, 50 and 60 pulses, 60 and 80 pulses, 80 and 100 pulses, 100 and 200 pulses, 200 and 2000 pulses or any other number of pulses. In some embodiments, the gain circuit determines that a portion of the signal comprising any number of high components and low components is below the specific sensitivity range. The gain circuit may adjust or increase the gain to ensure that the detector detects the portion of the signal within the specific sensitivity range or within a specific percentage range of the detection threshold. Similarly, the gain circuit may determine that a portion of the signal comprising any number of high components and low components is above the specific sensitivity range. The gain circuit may adjust or decrease the gain to ensure that the detector detects the portion of the signal within the specific sensitivity range or within a specific percentage range of the detection threshold. Adjustment of gain may be done by varying pulse width of the signal. In some embodiments, adjustment of gain is implemented by increasing or decreasing a duration high components of each pulse. In further embodiments, adjustment is implemented by increasing or decreasing a duration of low components of each pulse. By adjusting the high component to low component duration ratio of the pulses of the signal the device may adjust the gain of the detector. Adjustment of gain may be done at a specific rate to allow the gain not to be adjusted fast enough in embodiments whenobject 450 approaches the device. In such instances, theobject 450 may cause the portion of the signal detected to exceed the detection threshold of the detector faster than the gain circuit would adjust the gain of the signal. - At
step 520, the detector determines that a reflected first portion of the signal is below a threshold of the detector. The threshold of the detector may be a sufficient the power or intensity of signal detected by the detector to recognize the presence of theobject 450. In some embodiments, the reflected first portion of the signal includes the portion of the signal reflected by thetransparent cover 460. In further embodiments, the reflected portion of the signal includes the portions of the signal reflected by any segment or component of thenon-contact switch 400. In still further embodiments, detector determines that the total signal reaching the detector is below the threshold, in response to actions, adjustments or maintaining of performance performed by the gain circuit. - At
step 525, the second portion of the signal reflects off of an object outside of the device. The second portion of the signal may comprise a portion of the signal that has propagated through the transparent cover. The second portion of the signal may comprise a portion of the signal that has propagated through the transparent cover and has reflected off of an object, such as anobject 450. In some embodiments, the second portion of the signal or a portion of the second portion of the signal reflects towards detector, such as thelight detector 420. In further embodiments, the second portion of the signal or a portion of the second portion of the signal reflects off the object and through the transparent cover towards the detector. The object may be a portion of a body of a person, such as a user, or any embodiment of theobject 450. - At
step 530, the device determines that the object is present responsive to the detector determining that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. In some embodiments, the detector determines that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold of the detector. In some embodiments, the detector receives the reflected second portion of the signal reflected off of theobject 450 in addition to the received first portion of the signal. The detector may detect the sum of the reflected first and second portions of the signal. In some embodiments, the detector detects average intensity or power of the reflected first and second portions of the signal. In further embodiments, the detector determines that the sum of the received first and second portions of the signal exceeds the threshold intensity or power needed for the detector to recognize the presence of theobject 450. In still further embodiments, the device determines that the object is present responsive to the determination of the detector that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the intensity or power threshold of the detector needed to detect the presence of the object. In still further embodiments, the determination that the object is present is responsive to the actions or adjustments by the gain circuit. In still further embodiments, the determination that the reflected first and second portions of the signal exceed the threshold is further based on the average intensity of the plurality of pulses of the reflected first and second portions of signal exceeding the threshold established by the gain circuit. - Referring now to
FIG. 6A , an embodiment of a system for assigning of master or slave status to a light device 110 is illustrated.FIG. 6A depictslighting devices connection 105.Lighting device 110A comprisescontroller 120A, master/slave addressor 130A and acommunicator 125A that further includesaddress 127A anddetector 605A.Lighting device 110B includes acontroller 110B that comprisescommunicator 125B, address 127B and master/slave addressor 123B. The signals or communication transmitted between thelighting devices data 210,data bits 215 andinstruction bits 220 that are divided into time intervals orperiods 205.Data 210,data bits 215 andinstruction bits 220 within eachperiod 205 define a duty cycle of eachperiod 205. The duty cycle of eachperiod 205 may further define or identifypower 655 orintensity 658 for the lighting devices 110.Data 210,data bits 215 andinstruction bits 220 of the signals may forminstructions 650 for assigning master or slave status to the lighting devices 110. Theinstructions 650 in addition to providing instructions for assigning status, such as a master or slave status, may also be included within the duty cycle that may also providepower 655 and/orintensity 658 for the lighting device 110. - In further detail,
FIG. 6A illustrates adetector 605 that receives, detects and identifiesinstructions 650.Detector 605 may include any type and form of hardware, software or a combination of hardware and software.Detector 605 may include any type and form of a device, a unit, a structure, an apparatus, a function, an algorithm, a script, an executable file, a software application or a software program that operates on a computing device such as a lighting device with a processor. In some embodiments,detector 605 includes any type and form of a function, application, device, unit or a structure for receiving, detecting, identifying, managing or manipulatinginstructions 650.Detector 605 may comprise any unit, function or a component for identifying or recognizinginstructions 650 from any type and form ofdata 210, such asdata bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. In some embodiments,detector 605 includes any type and form of a policy or a policy engine. In further embodiments,detector 605 includes a rule or a rule engine. The policy or policy engine or the rule or the rule engine may determine or identify actions to be taken in response to theinstructions 650. In further embodiments,detector 605 includes a parser that parsesincoming data 210,data bits 215 andinstruction bits 220. The parsed data may be used by any component of the lighting device 110 to implement or execute actions as defined by the receivedinstructions 650. In some embodiments, the parsed data is used to operate the lighting device 110 as identified by thepower 655 orintensity 658. In further embodiments,detector 605 determines the duty cycle within each of the time interval orperiod 205. In still further embodiments,detector 605 determines the starting or ending point of each of the time intervals orperiods 205. -
Power 650 may be any rate of delivery of electrical energy to a lighting device 110. In some embodiments,power 650 is a product of voltage and current delivered to a lighting device 110. Thepower 650 may be delivered to the lighting device 110 from another lighting device 110, from apower supply 140 or from any power outlet or plug. In some embodiments,power 650 is defined by the duty cycle of a signal or communication received by the lighting device 110 viaconnection 105. In some embodiments,power 650 within aperiod 205 is defined by a ratio of a duration of aperiod 205 for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire duration of theperiod 205. In further embodiments,power 650 within aperiod 205 is defined by an average voltage, current or power value of the signal within theperiod 205. In some embodiments,power 650 may be defined by a signal that comprises a plurality ofperiods 205. The lighting device 110 may emit light or otherwise operate in accordance withpower 650. Thepower 650 may change fromperiod 205 toperiod 205. In some embodiments, thepower 650 may remain unchanged over any number ofconsecutive periods 205, regardless if someperiods 205 comprise one ormore instructions 650. -
Intensity 658 may be any amount of electromagnetic radiation emitted or emanated or to be emitted or emanated from the lighting device 110. In some embodiments,intensity 658 identifies an amount of photons of light emitted from the lighting device 110. In further embodiments,intensity 658 is an amount of light emitted by lighting device 110 per a predetermined amount of time. In some embodiments,intensity 658 is defined by the duty cycle of a signal or communication received by the lighting device 110 viaconnection 105. In some embodiments,intensity 658 within aperiod 205 is defined by a ratio of a duration of aperiod 205 for which the signal or communication have a high value to a duration of the entire duration of theperiod 205. In further embodiments,intensity 658 within aperiod 205 is defined by an average voltage, current or power value of the signal within theperiod 205. In some embodiments,intensity 658 may be defined by a signal that comprises a plurality ofperiods 205. The lighting device 110 may emit light or otherwise operate in accordance withintensity 658. Theintensity 658 may change fromperiod 205 toperiod 205. In some embodiments,intensity 658 may remain unchanged over any number ofconsecutive periods 205, regardless if someperiods 205 comprise one ormore instructions 650. -
Instructions 650 may include any type and form of commands, instructions, or configurations, such as for assigning a status to a lighting device 110.Instructions 650 may includedata 210,data bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. In some embodiment,instructions 650 includes any combination ofdata 220,data bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. In some embodiments,instructions 650 include any type and form or commands and instructions for assigning a status of a master or a slave to a lighting device 110. The status of a master may enable the lighting device 110 to send out instructions or commands to one or more lighting devices on a network. The status of a master may further enable the lighting device to control, manage or modify operation, functionality or output of other lighting devices 110 connected to the lighting devices 110 via theconnection 105. The status of a slave may enable the lighting device 110 to receive instructions and commands from a lighting device 110 that is assigned a status of the master. The status of a slave may enable the lighting device to be controlled, managed or have its operation, functionality or output modified by the lighting device that is assigned a status of the master. The lighting device 110 assigned the status of a slave may be modified, commanded, operated or have its operation or functionality controlled or modified by the lighting device 110 having the status of the master by receivinginstructions 650 via theconnection 105. - In some embodiments,
instructions 650 include messages used to diagnose problems of lighting devices 110.Instructions 650 may include requests and responses to the requests and may be sent by master orslave lighting devices 650, such as: - LC_ACK_ON_ALERTS sending an acknowledgement to check for an error, such as humidity, temperature or voltage error;
LC_CLEAR_ALERTS clearing alert flags from the lighting device 110;
LC_SET_ALERT_HISTORY setting alert flag if permanent history exists.
LC_DRIVE_LED_ALERT setting an alert light or alert LED if an alert is set;
LC_DRIVE_LED_ADDRESS setting alert light to on when a match between an address 127 of a previously receivedinstruction 650 and an address 127 of the lighting device 110 is detected;
LC_NO_DRIVE_LED to set alert light to off;
LC_ACK_ON_AMBIENT sending an acknowledgement if ambient light detector is active;
LC_ACK_ON_PIR sending an acknowledgement if anobject 450 is detected on a light switch enclosure. - In some embodiments,
instructions 650 include messages that include commands for controlling or managing of the lighting devices 110.Instructions 650 may include dimming or brightness level instructions, color settings, flashing instructions, timing instructions, or any other control instructions, such as: - LC_SET_DIM commanding a setting of a dimming or a brightness value
LC_SET_RED setting a value of brightness of red light;
LC_SET_GREEN setting a value of brightness of green light;
LC_SET_BLUE setting a value of brightness of blue light;
LC_LATCH_RGB setting a value of brightness or intensity using a previous value for a specific zone or a specific group of lighting devices 110;
LC_LATCH_RGB SHORT setting a value of brightness or intensity for all zones or all groups of lighting devices 110;
LC_MOVING_DOWN decreasing dim or brightness, intensity level;
LC_MOVING_UP increasing dim or brightness, intensity level;
LC_FOLLOW_DIM_LINE using external source for PWM signal to modify the dim or brightness and intensity level. Such external signal control may be cancelled with LC_SET_DIM instruction;
LC_SELECT_LED1 selecting a lighting device 110 a of the plurality of lighting devices 110;
LC_SELECT_LED2 selecting a lighting device 110 b of the plurality of lighting devices 110;
LC_SELECT_LED3 selecting a lighting device 110 c of the plurality of lighting devices 110;
LC_LATCH_FADE_SPEED using a previously sent value to set speed of fading light between 0% and 100%;
LC_LATCH_MAX_LEVEL using a previously sent value as maximum dim or intensity, brightness level;
LC_LATCH_SMOOTH_TIME using a previously sent value as dim number last sent as DIM transition time for “smooth DIM”
LC_LATCH_ON_TIME using a value sent as a time interval during which the lighting device 110 will be turned on during the strobe or flashing effect;
LC_LATCH_OFF_TIME using a value sent as a time interval during which the lighting device 110 will be turned off during the strobe or flashing effect;
LC_START_FLASH starting a flashing or strobe effect by counting PWM pulses from the master lighting device 110;
LC_STOP_FLASH stopping the flashing or strobe effect. - In some embodiments,
instructions 650 include messages that set or check addresses of the lighting devices 110.Instructions 650 may include any requests for address matches, setting of addresses, such as: - LC_ACK_ADDRESS requesting response from specific address. The address may include a number between 1 and 511. This instruction may send 0 to clear the addresses;
LC_ENTER_LEARN_MODE turning on the learn mode or the addressing assignment mode and allowing the lighting devices 110 to learn set addresses, be assigned addresses or modify addresses; LC_CANCEL_LEARN_MODE ignoring learn mode and not saving the modified addresses;
LC_EXIT_LEARN_MODE turning off the learn mode or the addressing assignment mode;
LC_ACK_ZONE_MATCH sending acknowledgement if a one-wire zone or group of lighting devices 110 was recognized;
LC_FLASH_ZONE_ID flashing a zone identifier;
LC_RESET_ZONE setting the zone to default, such as value of 0 for example. - In some embodiments,
instructions 650 include messages that activate or deactivate light switch enclosure detection of anobject 450, such as: - LC_IR_TOUCH_SENSE commanding to use infrared, or IR, touch sensing;
LC_IR_CODE_SENSE commanding to use IR receive code sensing;
LC_PIR_SENSE commanding to use passive IR person sensing
LC_KEY_FOB_SENSE commanding to use wireless key fob sensing
LC_OTHER_SENSE commanding to use unlisted or an auxiliary technology for sensing
LC_NO_SENSE commanding to turn off all sensing, and instead use the line communication between the lighting devices 110 only. - In some embodiments,
instructions 650 include messages that set or check for master or slave statuses of the lighting devices 110.Instructions 650 may assign or verify master and slave statuses of the lighting devices using any number of commands, such as: - LC_ACK_MASTER sending a global request to all the lighting devices 110 to acknowledge a master status of a lighting device 110.
LC_ACK_GRANT_MASTER granting or assigning a master status to a lighting device 110 previously having a slave status;
LC_ACK_DECODE_ERR sending an acknowledgement response stating that theinstruction 650 to acknowledge a master status was not recognized;
LC_CHECK_FOR_SLAVE sending a request to set a status of a lighting device 110 to slave status;
LC_ACK_REQ_SHORT sending a default request to set a hardware to clear. - In some embodiments,
instructions 650 include messages that configure options, such as clock and timing of the lighting devices. Such instructions may grant or assign generic status or be used for control of communications, such as: - LC_POWER_ON_FULL powering on the lighting devices 110 to full 100% brightness or intensity;
LC_POWER_ON_LAST remembering a previous setting for next power-on
LC_SET_NUMBER setting current value to be used for intensity, addresses, status, commands or communication to any value between 0 and 1023.
LC_LATCH_COUNT using a value previously sent as count for upload/download bytes in packet, time setting;
LC_LATCH_CLOCK_TIME using a value previously sent for a time and date, such as years/days/hours/seconds of time;
LC_SET_ACTION using a value previously sent to assign the date and time of the event;
LC_RESET_HARDWARE resetting hardware of the lighting devices 110;
LC_RAW_DATA sending raw data, such as higher-level protocol for extended commands;
LC_REQUEST_STATUS asking for configuration string. -
Instructions 650 may include status responses for lighting devices 110 such as, 12″ V-Line “Gen2.1”, 18″ V-Line “Gen-2.1”, Touch V1, Aperion V2, TriLight V3,Lightlink 105 V3, LightLink 101 V3, Super LightLink, or any other lighting device 110. Theinstructions 650 may further include current software version or revision. In some embodiments,instructions 650 include software interfaces used for communication, such as the line, DMX communication interface, differential serial communication line or a wireless connection.Instructions 650 may further include hardware features installed, such as InfraRed, or IR detect present,light switch enclosure 400 or PIR detect present, ambient light sensor present, fire sensor present, DMZ interface present or wireless radio present.Instructions 650 may further include input selections, such as: 0 to 10 volt input, 10 volt current source, MOM switch, DMX address, PWM signal input, inverted PWM signal input, preset switch input, IR touch or IR command line.Instructions 650 may further include a time, such as current time of day, total on duration of time, lighting device 110 on running time, and event timers.Instructions 650 may include humidity, temperature and voltage error readings, such as: humidity reading, minimum lifetime humidity reading with time stamp, maximum lifetime humidity reading with time stamp, temperature reading, minimum lifetime temperature reading with time stamp, maximum lifetime temperature reading with time stamp and over voltage detection with time stamp. Sometimes,instructions 650 may further include current status of sensors, such as: IR detect, PIR detect, PIR person detector tripped since last request, current state of ambient light sensor, and current state of the fire or smoke sensor. -
Connection 105, which may also be referred to as the line, may be any medium through which signals, communications, instructions, power and intensity are transmitted. In some embodiments, the line is a I2Systems Lightlink™ of I2Systems Inc. In further embodiments, the line is I2Systems or I2System Lightlink Control Bus, also referred to as LLCB by I2Systems Inc. The line may comprise a single active wire connection between two or more lighting devices 110 and a single ground return wire. Two or more lighting devices 110 may be connected via the line in parallel connection, in series connection or in any combination of parallel and series connections. In some embodiments, the lighting devices are connected in a parallel connection pattern in which the communication receiving pins of the lighting devices 110 are connected to the active wire of the line and ground pins of the lighting devices 110 are connected to the ground wire of the line. In some embodiments, the line includes a medium for controlling lighting devices 110 via a lighting dimmer scheme, such as a DMX-512 protocol for a DMX connection. In further embodiments, the line includes a RS-232 connection, a wireless connection or an Ethernet connection. In still further embodiments, the line is any medium supporting or handling any 8/16 bit digital communication. - In one embodiment, a master lighting device 110 a communicates with a plurality of slave lighting devices 110 via the line. The line may include an active wire via which the communications are transmitted, and a ground return wire. Communications transmitted may include signals, instructions, request and response messages, power or intensity modulating signals, commands, configurations, settings, read-backs or any other type and form of transmissions The communications may be digital transmissions of any voltage or current characteristics or range. In some embodiments, digital pulse width modulated (PWM) signals based on a 5 volt digital logic are transmitted via the line. The PWM signals may use a 5 volt signal to indicate a high state, while a 0 volt transmission may indicate a low state. A threshold distinguishing between the high and the low levels may be any value between 0 and 5 volts, such as 2.5 volts for example. In some embodiments, the signal in addition to only two levels, a high level and a low level, may further include additional levels, such as a third level, a fourth level, a fifth level, and so on. The line may transmit communication using a half-duplex channel allowing a single lighting device 110 a to send a communication at one time. The lighting devices 110 receiving the communication may send acknowledgement transmissions in response to the received communication. The acknowledgement may include a response that a received
instruction 650 was implemented or an indication that the received communication was acknowledged. In some embodiments, acknowledgements include a response that an error occurred or that that the receivedinstruction 650 was not acknowledged. For example, the master lighting device 110 a may send aninstruction 650 to set a first slave lighting device 110 b as a master lighting device. In response to the receivedinstruction 650, the master lighting device 110 a may receive acknowledgements from each of the lighting devices 110. Once each of the lighting devices 110 has acknowledged affirmatively, the first slave lighting device 110 b may be assigned a master status and all the remaining lighting devices 110, including the master lighting device 110 a, may be assigned a slave status. The first slave lighting device 110 b is from that point on recognized as the master and may send anyinstructions 650 or commands to any of the lighting devices 110. Thus, the group of lighting devices 110 in this embodiment only have a single master lighting device 110 at a given time. - Instructions and acknowledgements transmitted between the lighting devices 110 may be sent via the line using any communication, such as DMX communication that uses DMX-512 protocol. In some embodiments, the DMX communication may be used or modified to enable two-way communication between lighting devices 110 by using RS-232 connections to listen for incoming communication, such as instructions or acknowledgements. Instructions or commands may be of any bit length, such as 2 bits, 4 bits, 8 bits, 16 bits or 32 bits. In some embodiments, instructions include a command of 4 bits, 8 bits of data and 4 bit checksum. In further embodiments, an additional instruction may be used to check for activity over the line. The rate of the communication transmitted via the line may vary. In some embodiments, communication is transmitted via the line at a rate of 250 cps. In further embodiments, communication transmitted may be at speed of 500 cps or clocks per second, 1000 cps, 4000 cps, 16000 cps or any other rate.
- Referring now to
FIG. 6B , an embodiment of steps for a method for assigning a status to a lighting device over a single line or a connection used by the lighting device to communicate with one or more of other lighting devices is illustrated. Atstep 605, a first lighting device receives via a line a signal comprising an instruction within a first duty cycle. Atstep 610, a detector of the first lighting device detects the instruction. Atstep 615, a master/slave addressor assigns a status identified by the instruction to the first lighting device. Atstep 620, the first lighting device emits light identified by the first duty cycle. Atstep 625, the first lighting device receives via the line a second signal comprising a second duty cycle. Atstep 630, the detector detects that the second signal comprises no instruction and the first lighting device emits light identified by the second duty cycle. - At
step 605, a first lighting device, such as the lighting device 110, receives via a line a signal comprising an instruction within a first duty cycle. The first lighting device may receive the signal via any line, such as aconnection 105 for example. In some embodiments, the signal is transmitted to the first lighting device via a conducting wire. In further embodiments, the first lighting device receives the signal via a wireless link. In yet further embodiments, the first lighting device receives the signal in the form of an electromagnetic wireless transmission that can be of any bandwidth or spectral range. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device receives the signal via an optical fiber or via any type and form of a waveguide. The signal received may include any type and form of a communication or a transmission, such as digital, analog, optical, wireless, electromagnetic or electrical signal or transmission. The signal may be divided into any number ofperiods 205. In some embodiments, the signal is of a duration of asingle period 205. In other embodiments, the signal is of a duration of a plurality ofperiods 205. The signal may include any number of instructions, such as theinstructions 650. In some embodiments, the instruction includes aninstruction 650 to set or establish a status of the first lighting device. In further embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction or a command to set or establish a master status to the first lighting device. In other embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction or a command to establish a slave status to the first lighting device. In still further embodiments, the instruction includes an instruction or a command to set or establish an intermediary status to the first lighting device. The intermediary status may be a status different from the master status or the slave status. The intermediary status may enable the first lighting device to act or operate as a master to a first number of lighting devices and to act or operate as a slave to a second number of lighting devices. The first number of lighting devices and the second number of lighting devices may be connected to the first lighting device via the same line, such as aconnection 105. The instructions comprised by the signal may be included within the first duty cycle of the signal. The first duty cycle may be a duty cycle of afirst period 205 of a plurality ofperiods 205 of the signal. The first duty cycle may be any fraction or a ratio of a duration of aperiod 205 for which the signal includes a high voltage value over the total duration of theperiod 205. In some embodiments, first duty cycle is a fraction or a ratio of a duration of aperiod 205 for which the signal includes a high current value over the total duration of theperiod 205. In further embodiments, first duty cycle is a fraction or a ratio of a duration of aperiod 205 for which the signal includes a high power value over the total duration of theperiod 205. In some embodiments, duty cycle includes an average value of the signal averaged over theperiod 205. The total duration of theperiod 205 may include portions of the signal having any number of values. - At
step 610, any component of the first lighting device detects the instruction. The instruction may be anyinstruction 650. In some embodiments,detector 605 detects theinstruction 650. In further embodiments,communicator 125 detects theinstruction 650. In still further embodiments,controller 120 detects theinstruction 650. In yet further embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 detects theinstruction 650. The first lighting device may detect the instruction using any type and form of a detecting mechanism, apparatus, application or a device. In some embodiments, the first lighting device detects theinstruction 650 using a detector that monitors the receiving signal detects theinstruction 650 within the signal. In further embodiments, the first lighting device monitors the incoming signal for a specific signal profile in order to detect the instruction. The lighting device 110 may detect theinstruction 650 by matching an address or an identifier comprised by theincoming instruction 650 to address 127 stored on the lighting device 110. The address or the identifier of theinstruction 650 may include any set of characters, numbers, symbols,data 210,data bits 215 orinstruction bits 220. In some embodiments, the address or the identifier of theinstruction 650 includes a set ofdata bits 215, characters, numbers or symbols that thatmatch data bits 215, characters, numbers or symbols of the address 127 stored on the lighting device 110. The first lighting device may detect theinstruction 650 by parsing the received instruction into components, one of which may be an address comprised by theinstruction 650. The address or the identifier of the parsedinstruction 650 may be matched to the address 127 of the first lighting device by thedetector 605. In some embodiments,detector 605 matches the address or the identifier of theinstruction 650 to the address 127 of the lighting device using any type and form of a logic comparator, a policy or a rule. In further embodiments, the lighting device uses a policy engine to match an address or the identifier of theinstruction 650 to the address 127 of the lighting device. In still further embodiments, the lighting device uses a rule engine to match an address or the identifier of theinstruction 650 to the address 127 of the lighting device. In yet further embodiments, the lighting device 110 uses any combination of a comparator, a logic component a parser, a rule engine, a policy engine or any other matching or detecting unit to detect theinstruction 650.Detector 605 may further identify the type of instruction, such as aninstruction 650 to assign a master status, a slave status or any other type of status to the first lighting device 110. In some embodiments, the first lighting device 110 identifies the instruction to assign a master status to the first lighting device. In other embodiments, the first lighting device identifies the instruction to assign a slave status to the first lighting device. In further embodiments, the first lighting device identifies the instruction to assign any other status, such as an intermediary status, to the first lighting device. - At
step 615, a component of the first lighting device assigns a status to the first lighting device. The status may be assigned to the first lighting device 110 in response to the identification of the receivedinstruction 650 by thedetector 605. The status may be assigned to the first lighting device 110 in response to the matching of the address or the identifier of theinstruction 650. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 of the first lighting device assigns the status to the first lighting device 110. In other embodiments, any component of the lighting device 110 assigns the status to the first lighting device 110. In further embodiments, the status assigned to the first lighting device 110 is identified by theinstruction 650 received by the first lighting device 110. The status may be assigned in response to the detection of theinstruction 650. In some embodiments, the status is assigned in response to the matching of the address or the identifier of theinstruction 650 with the address 127 of the first lighting device 110. In still further embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 modifies or edits configuration of the first lighting device 110 in accordance with the status identified by theinstruction 650. Master/slave addressor 130 may edit or modify settings or configuration of the first lighting device 110 to a specific configuration of the status identified by theinstruction 650. In some embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device to the master configuration in response to thedetection 650 of the instruction to set the first lighting device 110 to the status of the master. In further embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device 110 to the slave configuration in response to the detection of theinstruction 650 to set the first lighting device 110 to the status of a slave. In yet further embodiments, master/slave addressor 130 edits or modifies the configuration of the first lighting device to the intermediary configuration in response to the detection of the instruction to set the first lighting device to the intermediary status. Modified configuration in response to the detection of theinstruction 650 to set up or assign a master status to the first lighting device 110 may change operation of the first lighting device 110 to control or manage other lighting devices connected via the line. In some embodiments, modified configuration in response to the detection of theinstruction 650 to assign or set up a slave status to the first lighting device 110 changes or modifies the operation of the first lighting device 110 to be controlled or managed by another lighting device 110 that is connected via the line, or theconnection 105, to the first lighting device 110. - At
step 620, the first lighting device emits light identified by the first duty cycle. The first lighting device 110 may emit the light having theintensity 650 or thepower 655 as defined by the first duty cycle or as defined by the signal within the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that hasintensity 658 that is identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that hasintensity 658 that is identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles, such as the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that hasintensity 658 that is proportional to the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that hasintensity 658 that is proportional to the maximum intensity of light emitted by the first lighting device multiplied by the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 that is proportional to the first duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 that is proportional to the maximum power used by the first lighting device multiplied by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, the first lighting device 110 emits light that has pulse or intensity variation that is defined or identified by the first duty cycle or by a plurality of duty cycles such as the first duty cycle. - At
step 625, the first lighting device receives via the line a second signal comprising a second duty cycle. The second signal may be divided into any number ofperiods 205. In some embodiments, the second signal is of a duration of asingle period 205. In other embodiments, the second signal is of a duration of a plurality ofconsecutive periods 205. The first lighting device may receive via the line a second signal comprising any functionality or any feature of the signal received by the first lighting device instep 605. In some embodiments, the second signal comprises a second duty cycle that is same as the first duty cycle or substantially similar to the first duty cycle. In other embodiments, the second duty cycle is different from the first duty cycle. The second duty cycle may include any embodiments and any functionality of any duty cycle. The second duty cycle may not include anyinstructions 650 but may still define or identify thesame power 655 or thesame intensity 658 as defined by the first duty cycle. In some embodiments, the second duty cycle does not include anyinstructions 650 but still identifies or definespower 655 that is the same or substantially similar as thepower 655 defined or identified by the first duty cycle. In further embodiments, the second duty cycle does not include anyinstructions 650 but still identifies or definespower 655 that is the same or substantially similar as thepower 655 defined or identified by the first duty cycle. - At
step 630, first lighting device detects that the second signal comprises no instructions and emits light identified by the second duty cycle. In some embodiments,detector 605 detects noinstructions 650 within the second signal. The first lighting device may emit light identified by the second duty cycle. The first lighting device 110 may emit the light as identified by the second duty cycle regardless of the presence or absence of theinstruction 650 from the signal within the second duty cycle. The first lighting device 110 may emit the light having theintensity 650 or thepower 655 as defined by the second duty cycle or as defined by the signal within the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that hasintensity 658 that is proportional to the second duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that hasintensity 658 that is proportional to the maximum intensity of light emitted by the first lighting device multiplied by the second duty cycle. In some embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 identified by the second duty cycle. In further embodiments, first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 identified by the plurality of successive duty cycles. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 that is proportional to the second duty cycle. In still further embodiments, the first lighting device emits light that haspower 655 that is proportional to the maximum power used by the first lighting device multiplied by the second duty cycle. In further embodiments, the first lighting device 110 emits light that has pulse or intensity variation that is defined or identified by the second duty cycle or by a plurality of duty cycles such as the second duty cycle. - Systems and methods for using a solar based LED system to run an intensity profiled based on battery health and time period are presented. A solar based LED assembly unit, which may also be referred to as a solar assembly unit or a system is described. In one embodiment, the solar assembly unit or system may be a part number 8120193-2-F and/or 8120193-2C manufactured and/or supplied by I2Systems, Inc. of Morris, Conn.
- The solar based LED system may include a mode of independent operation. In some embodiments, no wires or “pattern” programming required for entering light timing patterns for the system. The system may automatically perform the operations and functions described herein without any user interaction, programming or wiring. The system may be active 24 hours per day and may continuously measure voltage to determine the time of day. In other embodiments, the system may be active for a predetermined amount of time during the day on any basis, such as for a certain percentage on predetermined amount of time of each hour. In some embodiments, the system monitors the voltage produced by the solar cells to determine the amount of light to be outputted from the LEDs. In one embodiment, the system continuously monitors the voltage produced by the solar cells. In other embodiments, the system monitors the voltage produced by the solar cells at a predetermined frequency or time period.
- The solar based LED system may include a long LED run time. In some embodiments, the system or assembly provides efficient switching power regulation to the LED. This may lead to longer LED run time or extension of battery life. The solar based LED system may further include an assembly or system comprising an intelligent controller, which may further comprise software, hardware or any combination of software and hardware. In some embodiments, the intelligent controller maintains a predetermined charge level on the battery to extend its life. In one embodiment, the intelligent controller maintain the charge level at high level to extend battery life even in cold weather.
- The solar based LED system may also include a sleep mode. In some embodiments, the assembly or system is designed and constructed to provide a predetermined power consumption, such as a very Low Power Consumption, when LED is Not Powered On or otherwise when the LED is not operating or emitting light. The solar based LED system, also referred to as the system, may include a large battery. In some embodiments, the assembly or system comprises a battery of a size, capacity or capability to enables running for a predetermined amount of days without sun or a predetermined amount of days that are cloudy, or any combination of no sun or cloudy days. In other embodiments, the battery is of a size, capacity or capability to run the assembly or system for a predetermined amount of days based on a predetermined amount of exposure to sun or a predetermined frequency of exposure to sun.
- In some embodiments, the assembly or system comprises a solar panel designed and constructed to be efficient and in a form factor suitable to the assembly or system. For example, the solar panel may designed and constructed to fit in a small space relative to the assembly or system and to operate efficiently. In one embodiment. single crystal cells are used for highest efficiency providing significant power to charge the battery even on partially cloudy days. The assembly or system may be designed and constructed with any number and type of solar panels. In some embodiments, the system is assembled with four independent solar panels. The solar panels may operate independently or dependently to each other. In one embodiment, the system will function if any one panel is shaded or not operational.
- The assembly or system may comprise any type and form of software or executable instructions that may be configured, upgraded or modified to change or add any operational or performance characteristic of the assembly or system. In some embodiments, software may be reconfigured by a technician allowing in field upgrades. In other embodiments, the assembly or system may comprise any type and form of interface or port for connecting to, communicating with or receiving any software configuration, upgrades, commands or instructions.
- In some embodiments, the assembly or system may have any of the following electrical characteristics under any of the following conditions: TA (Ambient Temperature)=25 deg. C., Load=0.5 W LED Load, Cooling: Convection, Battery: Panasonic LC-R067R2P.
-
PARAMETER NOTES MIN TYP MAX UNITS Absolute Maximum Ratings Input Voltage Continuous 3 6.3 20 Vdc Operating Environment −40 85 deg. C. Temperature (LEDs off) Storage Temperature −40 85 deg. C. Humidity 90 % (non-condensing) Battery Charge Characteristics* Charge Voltage 7.2 8.5 Vdc Charge Peak Current 0.12 0.15 Adc LED Driver Characteristics LED Drive Current 0.015 0.15** Adc
In some embodiments, the above electrical characteristics of the assembly or system have been designed and tested for use with Panasonic Valve Regulated Lead-Acid Battery, Model Number LC-R067R2p (6V, 7.2 Ah/20 HR). In some embodiments, other types of batteries may produce different electrical characteristics or operating results. ***In some embodiments, 3 LEDs are configured in parallel which results in 0.15 A/3=0.050 ADC per LED. - The system may be installed by anyone, including a user or a customer. In some embodiments, the assembly or system includes static sensitive components and should be handled in a static free environment. Assembly or system should be installed such that no components or circuit traces are within contact with any conductive material, or any material capable of dislodging components or severing board traces due to vibration. In some embodiments, components are not to be potted.
- In some embodiments, the operating environment temperature shall not exceed that of the temperature listed above in section. Operation above or below the specified temperature range may result in reduced operating life or failure of the system. In some embodiments, the assembly or system shall be installed such that it is properly heat-sinked to a housing exposed to ambient air flow. In another embodiment, the assembly or system should be installed in a sealed environment. Condensation and exposure to water may result in reduced operating life or catastrophic failure of the product.
- Referring now to
FIG. 7 , an embodiment of a Solar Based Assembly System is presented. The solar based LED assembly may include a printed circuit board, a drive and a control circuitry, a programming and a test header, and a battery hookup with red and black wires feeding the circuit. In some embodiments, the Solar assembly is configured for day time charging via the installed solar panels installed to the top side of the assembly and illumination during evening hours. Throughout the day, the battery may charge at a maximum rate or any predetermined rate. When night time is detected, the LED may be turned on and run a profile as outlined below. Based on measured battery health, this discharge profile may scale over the range of 100/0 down to 25% or lower, operating time being the only constant. - At Startup, the Solar assembly may flash the installed LED light source a predetermined number of times, such has 3 times, at any on/off frequency such 100 ms on, 300 ms off. If system detects the solar cell is dark consistently for a predetermined amount of time, such as 3 minutes, the system turns on or delivers power to the LEDs. If the system detects a predetermined amount light via the solar cell, the system may maintain the LEDs off and may continue to charge. In some embodiments, the LEDs slowly ramp up in intensity and operate per the below profile. The maximum intensity may be determined by the battery condition at the start of the ramp-up or any other predetermined or desired time. If the battery voltage under load is below a certain threshold, such as 5.1V, the system does not operate. The system may need additional charging and/or replacement of the battery in order to continue normal operation.
- Battery Health may be determined at any time and/or point of operation. In one embodiment, the system determines battery health when at or after the LED is turned. The battery health procedure use any type and form of logic, function or operates to measure battery impedance, voltage, and/or system temperature. In some embodiments, health is reflective of the voltage and impedance of the battery, where lower voltage and high impedance equal poor health. The battery health may change with current battery charge state and/or temperature, where low charge and low temperature will result in a high impedance. The system includes software and/or hardware provisions, mechanisms or logic that compare battery impedance to temperature. This is to help validate if the battery impedance is high due to a bad battery or due to temperature. In addition, in some embodiments, voltage under load is scaled to the anticipated voltage level at 25 degrees C. based on a temperature reading. For example, 6.3 Volts may be taken as a nominal voltage and the LED output is reduced from 100% to 12% in 30 linear steps based on the temperature adjusted voltage reading. If the battery is above the nominal voltage such as 6.3V, then the system may regulate as required in order to maintain 0.5 W output or less during LED operation.
- Referring now to
FIG. 8 , a graph showing a solar intensity profile of the Solar Assembly is presented. The intensity profile of the solar assembly or system may be dependent on any one or more factors related to any operation, performance or measurement of the assembly or system In some embodiments and by way of example, the Solar assembly's LED Intensity Profile may be dependant on two factors: Battery Health. Depending on the measured health of the battery, the LED intensity profile may be scaled in any corresponding manner, such as described in 5.3. In some embodiments, the 100% intensity power level being defined at the time of battery measurement (although the power level may be defined at any other time). When the battery is fully charged, 100% intensity may be approximately ½W LED Power. - Time Period from Sunset to Sunrise. As seen in the chart below, the Solar Assembly LED intensity profile may ramp up and then ramp down over the first predetermined number of minutes such as 315 minutes at which the system maintains a predetermined amount of intensity, such s 25% intensity for an undefined or defined period after 315 minutes. At approximately a predetermined umber of minutes, such as 165 minutes before sunrise the Solar assembly initiate a second ramp up/ramp down profile.
- The Solar assembly may include a test mode that may be used prior to shipment of products to an installation site. The test mode may be accessed by installing any type and form test jumper, such as an I2Systems test jumper, to the 6-pin test jumper found on the bottom side of the assembly. The jumper may work in either orientation. To enter test mode the Solar Assembly may be connected to the battery. The 6-pin test jumper should be attached as shown in
FIG. 8 . A momentary switch installed to the jumper should be pressed and released. Upon release, the LED light source may flash once, 1 second on, 0.5 second off. The test routine may then begin. If the solar cell is active, the LEDs may turn off. If the solar cell is dark, then the LEDs may turn on. There may be a 3 second delay when the solar cell goes dark until the LEDs turn on. - To exit test mode, the 6-pin test jumper may be removed. The system may restart according to normal operation in which the Solar assembly is configured for day time charging via the installed solar panels installed to the top side of the assembly and illumination during evening hours. The system may not be shipped to an installation site with the test jumper installed as the system may not be able to operate under such circumstances.
- Solar based systems may require an adequate amount of sunlight to recharge batteries in order to operate each night throughout the year. The amount of sunlight available may define the 100% intensity power level of which the product may operate. In some embodiments, system may not be installed in the shade or in shaded areas. In addition, obstructions that may shade the system during the winter due to the sun being lower on the horizon may be removed.
- The temperature of the batteries during recharging/discharging affects the lifespan of lead acid batteries as well as the components used to control the system and drive the LEDs. To ensure that the system remains within its optimal temperature range, in some embodiments, it may be recommended that the LED board assembly be heat sinked to the housing of which it is installed and that the final product that integrates the Solar assembly be installed away from high temperature environments, including locations such as black rooftops, tarmac, and desert locations unless additional heat sinking or other methods of cooling are provided. In some embodiments, the system may include one or more Nichia LED Models 8120193-2-F and/or Cree LED Models 8120193-2C. In further embodiments, the LED may not light if the battery falls below a predetermined threshold, such as for example 5V. The system may need at least a predetermined number of volts, such as 3V to keep track of time. In some embodiments, the board is protected from reverse polarity, but the battery may be drained if it is connected reverse for more than a few minutes. In some embodiments, there needs to be enough light to get some voltage from the panel, which may not need much. In some embodiments, if it is in darkness then it may run up to 14 hours and shut off and not light again until it sees some sun (for more than a few minutes).
- The board may be fused with a resettable fuse, but the battery may drain completely before the fault is found. The system may include integrated protection for voltage surges up to a predetermined threshold, such 40V. In some embodiments, with the system at room temperature (25 deg C.), for about 2 weeks to a month. The battery life may be shortened by deep discharges, and run time is much shorter at warmer and colder temperatures. The system may include a temperature sensor that takes continuous measurements of temperature or measurements at predetermined frequencies. The system may use the temperature reading to adjust battery voltage readings up or down to compensate for changes in voltage based on temperature fluctuation. If the voltage falls too low or if the current draw of lighting the LED causes the voltage to drop too much, the system may reduce the LED output substantially or by a predetermined amount to protect the battery. If enough sunlight appears on the solar cells to charge the battery back to a higher state of charge, the system may raise the LED output the following night.
- In some embodiments, the system may monitor (continuously or otherwise) “Open circuit” Voltage, and voltage under load. From the measurements, the system may determines the health of the battery and compensates LED light output accordingly. In some embodiments, this system continuously adjusts instead of switching between 3-4 different dimming presets. In some embodiments, the Solar Assembly tracks the number of days it has been running (Hours/Days/Weeks/Years) and stores it in any type and form of memory, such as flash memory. In some embodiments, the Solar Assembly tracks and averages sunrise and sunset in order to determine when to begin the final discharge phase of the profile as listed above. In some embodiments, upon initial power up, sunrise and sunset calibration may take several days of operation in order to determine the correct on/off times, in which during these several days operation may not be ideal.
Claims (26)
1. A method for modulating intensity of light emitted by a light emitting device using a digital pattern of a signal, the method comprising steps of:
receiving, by a controller, a setting for an intensity of light for a remote lighting device;
receiving, by the controller, an instruction to control the remote lighting device;
generating, by the controller for the remote lighting device, a signal having an instruction, a time period and a duty cycle corresponding to the setting for the intensity of light, the time period comprising a first time interval and a second time interval, a first portion of the signal within the first time interval comprising a first digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction, a duty cycle of the first portion of the signal different than a duty cycle of the second portion of the signal, the first digital pattern comprising at least two bits;
determining, by the remote lighting device, the duty cycle of the time period of the signal received from the controller, the duty cycle based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval and the second time interval comprises a high value; and
establishing, by the remote lighting device, intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking an action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern.
2. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
generating, by the controller for the remote lighting device, the signal having the time period comprising a third time interval, the signal comprising a third portion of the signal within the third time interval, a third digital pattern of the third portion of the signal within the third time interval corresponding to at least a second portion of the instruction;
determining, by the remote lighting device, the duty cycle of the time period of the signal, the duty cycle based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval, the second time interval and the third time interval comprises a high value; and
establishing, by the remote lighting device, intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking a second action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern and the second portion of the instruction identified by the third digital pattern.
3. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
receiving, by the controller, a second setting for a second intensity of light for a remote lighting device, the second intensity of light different than the intensity of light;
generating, by the controller for the remote lighting device, a second signal having a second time period and a second duty cycle corresponding to the second setting for the intensity of light, the second time period comprising a new first time interval and a new second time interval,
determining, by the remote lighting device, the second duty cycle of the second time period of the second signal received from the controller, the second duty cycle based on a sum of durations of time for which the second signal within the new first time interval and the new second time interval comprises a high value; and
establishing, by the remote lighting device, the second intensity of the light emitted based on the second duty cycle.
4. The method of claim 1 , further comprising transmitting, by the controller to the remote lighting device, the signal via a wire used for providing electrical power to the remote lighting device.
5. The method of claim 1 , further comprising emitting, by the remote lighting device, light based on the established intensity of light.
6. The method of claim 1 , further comprising determining, by the remote lighting device, the duty cycle of the time period based on a ratio of a sum of durations of time within time period for which the signal comprises a high value to a total duration of the time period.
7. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating, by the controller, the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to set a brightness value of a red light source, green light source or a blue light source of the remote lighting device.
8. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating, by the controller, the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to turn off the light by dimming the light down.
9. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to enter a learning mode to accept an address assigned to the remote lighting device.
10. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to send a message comprising a configuration status of the remote lighting device.
11. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating the signal comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to set a maximum intensity of the light emitted for the remote lighting device.
12. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating the signal comprising a continuous stream of data bits divided into a plurality of time periods, the time period of the plurality of time periods.
13. The method of claim 1 , further comprising generating, by the controller, the signal comprising the first portion of the signal consisting of the first time interval and the second portion of the signal consisting of the second time interval.
14. A system for modulating intensity of light emitted by a light emitting device using a digital pattern of a signal, the system comprising:
a controller receiving a setting for an intensity of light for a remote lighting device and an instruction to control the remote lighting device;
the controller generating, for the remote lighting device, a signal having an instruction, a time period and a duty cycle corresponding to the setting for the intensity of light, the time period comprising a first time interval and a second time interval, a first portion of the signal within the first time interval comprising a first digital pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the instruction, a duty cycle of the first portion of the signal different than a duty cycle of the second portion of the signal, the first digital pattern comprising at least two bits;
the remote lighting device determining the duty cycle of the time period of the signal received from the controller, the duty cycle based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval and the second time interval comprises a high value; and
the remote lighting device establishing intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking an action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern.
15. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller generates for the remote lighting device, the signal having the time period comprising a third time interval, the signal comprising a third portion of the signal within the third time interval, a third digital pattern of the third portion of the signal within the third time interval corresponding to at least a second portion of the instruction; and
wherein the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle of the time period of the signal, the duty cycle based on a sum of durations of time for which the signal within the first time interval, the second time interval and the third time interval comprises a high value and establishes intensity of the light emitted based on the duty cycle while taking a second action based on at least the portion of the instruction identified by the first digital pattern and the second portion of the instruction identified by the third digital pattern.
16. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller receives a second setting for a second intensity of light for a remote lighting device, the second intensity of light different than the intensity of light and generates for the remote lighting device, a second signal having a second time period and a second duty cycle corresponding to the second setting for the intensity of light, the second time period comprising a new first time interval and a new second time interval; and
wherein the remote lighting device determines the second duty cycle of the second time period of the second signal, the second duty cycle based on a sum of durations of time for which the second signal within the new first time interval and the new second time interval comprises a high value and establishes the second intensity of the light emitted based on the second duty cycle.
17. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller transmits to the remote lighting device the signal via a wire used for providing electrical power to the remote lighting device.
18. The system of claim 14 , wherein the remote lighting device emits light based on the established intensity of light.
19. The system of claim 14 , wherein the remote lighting device determines the duty cycle of the time period based on a ratio of a sum of durations of time within time period for which the signal comprises a high value to a total duration of the time period.
20. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller generates the signal further comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to set a brightness value of a red light source, green light source or a blue light source of the remote lighting device.
21. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller generates the signal further comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to turn off the light emitted by dimming the light down.
22. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller generates the signal further comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to enter a learning mode to accept an address assigned to the remote lighting device.
23. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller generates the signal further comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to send a configuration status of the remote lighting device.
24. The system of claim 14 , wherein the controller generates the signal further comprising the instruction instructing the remote lighting device to set a maximum intensity of the light emitted for the remote lighting device.
25. The system of claim 14 , wherein the signal further comprises a continuous stream of data bits divided into a plurality of time periods, the time period of the plurality of time periods.
26. The system of claim 14 , wherein the first portion of the signal consists of the first time interval and wherein the second portion of the signal consists of the second time interval.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12/565,492 US20100084992A1 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-09-23 | Intensity control and color mixing of light emitting devices |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US5379208P | 2008-05-16 | 2008-05-16 | |
US9932508P | 2008-09-23 | 2008-09-23 | |
US12/466,647 US8243278B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-05-15 | Non-contact selection and control of lighting devices |
US12/565,492 US20100084992A1 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-09-23 | Intensity control and color mixing of light emitting devices |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/466,647 Continuation US8243278B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-05-15 | Non-contact selection and control of lighting devices |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20100084992A1 true US20100084992A1 (en) | 2010-04-08 |
Family
ID=41315542
Family Applications (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/209,551 Expired - Fee Related US8255487B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2008-09-12 | Systems and methods for communicating in a lighting network |
US12/363,349 Expired - Fee Related US8264172B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-01-30 | Cooperative communications with multiple master/slaves in a LED lighting network |
US12/466,647 Expired - Fee Related US8243278B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-05-15 | Non-contact selection and control of lighting devices |
US12/565,492 Abandoned US20100084992A1 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-09-23 | Intensity control and color mixing of light emitting devices |
Family Applications Before (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/209,551 Expired - Fee Related US8255487B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2008-09-12 | Systems and methods for communicating in a lighting network |
US12/363,349 Expired - Fee Related US8264172B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-01-30 | Cooperative communications with multiple master/slaves in a LED lighting network |
US12/466,647 Expired - Fee Related US8243278B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2009-05-15 | Non-contact selection and control of lighting devices |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (4) | US8255487B2 (en) |
Cited By (57)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100278537A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2010-11-04 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and Apparatus for Connecting AC Powered Switches, Current Sensors and Control Devices Via Two Way IR, Fiber Optic and Light Guide Cables |
US20110098831A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Home Automation Group Selection by Color |
US20110095608A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Jonsson Karl S | Power node for energy management |
US20120013238A1 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2012-01-19 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Electrically Controlled Glass in a Lamp |
US8335936B2 (en) | 2010-05-10 | 2012-12-18 | Greenwave Reality, Pte Ltd. | Power node with network switch |
US8415900B2 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2013-04-09 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Color and position auto-commissioning |
US8422889B2 (en) | 2010-09-16 | 2013-04-16 | Greenwave Reality, Pte Ltd. | Noise detector in a light bulb |
US20130257312A1 (en) * | 2010-07-23 | 2013-10-03 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | System for generating non-homogenous biologically-adjusted light and associated methods |
US8729835B2 (en) | 2009-08-10 | 2014-05-20 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Group creation in auto-commissioning of lighting systems |
WO2014089181A1 (en) * | 2012-12-05 | 2014-06-12 | Barling Bay, Llc, A Limited Liability Company | Lighting control device and method |
US8754832B2 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2014-06-17 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accenting regions of a layer and associated methods |
US8760370B2 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2014-06-24 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | System for generating non-homogenous light and associated methods |
US8759734B2 (en) | 2012-02-23 | 2014-06-24 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Directional sensors for auto-commissioning lighting systems |
US8764210B2 (en) | 2010-07-19 | 2014-07-01 | Greenwave Reality Pte Ltd. | Emitting light using multiple phosphors |
US20140232294A1 (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2014-08-21 | Current-Usa, Inc. | Lighting control systems |
US8829821B2 (en) * | 2012-12-18 | 2014-09-09 | Cree, Inc. | Auto commissioning lighting fixture |
US8860316B2 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2014-10-14 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Selective light sensor and daylight management |
US8860324B2 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2014-10-14 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Selective light sensor and auto-commissioning |
US8975827B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2015-03-10 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting fixture for distributed control |
US20150084546A1 (en) * | 2013-09-20 | 2015-03-26 | Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corporation | Dimming Control System |
US20150163888A1 (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2015-06-11 | Current-Usa, Inc. | Lighting control systems |
CN104929862A (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2015-09-23 | 通用电气公司 | System and method of controlling an electronic component of a wind turbine using contingency communications |
US9173269B2 (en) | 2011-05-15 | 2015-10-27 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accentuating regions of a layer and associated methods |
USD744669S1 (en) | 2013-04-22 | 2015-12-01 | Cree, Inc. | Module for a lighting fixture |
US20160040842A1 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2016-02-11 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accenting regions of a layer and associated methods |
US9332608B2 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2016-05-03 | Greenwave Systems, Pte. Ltd. | Dual-mode dimming of a light |
US9378086B2 (en) | 2011-10-11 | 2016-06-28 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Methods and apparatus for improved DMX512 communication |
US9378087B2 (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2016-06-28 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Methods for improved DMX512 communication while maintaining backwards compatibility |
US9456482B1 (en) | 2015-04-08 | 2016-09-27 | Cree, Inc. | Daylighting for different groups of lighting fixtures |
US9549448B2 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2017-01-17 | Cree, Inc. | Wall controller controlling CCT |
US9572226B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-02-14 | Cree, Inc. | Master/slave arrangement for lighting fixture modules |
US9596730B1 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2017-03-14 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using multiple handles |
US9622321B2 (en) | 2013-10-11 | 2017-04-11 | Cree, Inc. | Systems, devices and methods for controlling one or more lights |
US9706617B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-07-11 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device that is capable of interacting with a lighting fixture |
US9723680B2 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2017-08-01 | Cree, Inc. | Digitally controlled driver for lighting fixture |
CN106996542A (en) * | 2015-10-23 | 2017-08-01 | 照明科学集团公司 | Illuminator and correlation technique for the emphasis regions of layer |
US9844114B2 (en) | 2015-12-09 | 2017-12-12 | Alb Ip Holding Llc | Color mixing for solid state lighting using direct AC drives |
US20170359878A1 (en) * | 2016-06-08 | 2017-12-14 | Colorbeam Northamerica Inc. | Light emitting diode lighting system and method |
US9854637B2 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2017-12-26 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using a single handle |
US9872367B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2018-01-16 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device for grouping a plurality of lighting fixtures |
US9913348B2 (en) | 2012-12-19 | 2018-03-06 | Cree, Inc. | Light fixtures, systems for controlling light fixtures, and methods of controlling fixtures and methods of controlling lighting control systems |
US9967944B2 (en) | 2016-06-22 | 2018-05-08 | Cree, Inc. | Dimming control for LED-based luminaires |
US9980350B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2018-05-22 | Cree, Inc. | Removable module for a lighting fixture |
US10154569B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2018-12-11 | Cree, Inc. | Power over ethernet lighting fixture |
US10231304B2 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2019-03-12 | Current USA, Inc. | Habitat control system |
US10333586B2 (en) * | 2016-05-11 | 2019-06-25 | Soraa, Inc. | Lamp power line communication |
US10595380B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2020-03-17 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Lighting wall control with virtual assistant |
EP2636286B1 (en) | 2011-01-04 | 2020-05-06 | Signify Holding B.V. | Power failure reporting in a networked light |
US10728979B1 (en) | 2019-09-30 | 2020-07-28 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Lighting fixture configured to provide multiple lighting effects |
US10731831B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2020-08-04 | Gemmy Industries Corp. | Clip lights and related systems |
US10874006B1 (en) | 2019-03-08 | 2020-12-22 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Lighting fixture controller for controlling color temperature and intensity |
US20220022306A1 (en) * | 2020-07-14 | 2022-01-20 | Lutron Technology Company Llc | Lighting control system with light show overrides |
US20220036864A1 (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2022-02-03 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for displaying images unto led panels |
US11310895B2 (en) * | 2019-04-05 | 2022-04-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Lighting system and lighting device |
US11425804B2 (en) * | 2020-05-19 | 2022-08-23 | Asustek Computer Inc. | Color-mixing lighting control method and color-mixing lighting system using the same |
US11495195B2 (en) | 2020-07-31 | 2022-11-08 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for data transfer in display images unto LED panels |
US11583990B2 (en) * | 2015-10-30 | 2023-02-21 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
Families Citing this family (92)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7903600B2 (en) * | 2007-07-05 | 2011-03-08 | Mediatek Inc. | Control of CDMA signal integration |
US8118447B2 (en) | 2007-12-20 | 2012-02-21 | Altair Engineering, Inc. | LED lighting apparatus with swivel connection |
TWI487430B (en) | 2008-01-15 | 2015-06-01 | 皇家飛利浦電子股份有限公司 | A light source |
US8841859B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2014-09-23 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | LED lighting methods, apparatus, and systems including rules-based sensor data logging |
US8373362B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-02-12 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Methods, systems, and apparatus for commissioning an LED lighting fixture with remote reporting |
US8610377B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-12-17 | Digital Lumens, Incorporated | Methods, apparatus, and systems for prediction of lighting module performance |
US8368321B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-02-05 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with rules-based power consumption management |
US8339069B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2012-12-25 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with power metering |
US8823277B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2014-09-02 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Methods, systems, and apparatus for mapping a network of lighting fixtures with light module identification |
US8754589B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2014-06-17 | Digtial Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with temperature protection |
US8531134B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-09-10 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | LED-based lighting methods, apparatus, and systems employing LED light bars, occupancy sensing, local state machine, and time-based tracking of operational modes |
US8610376B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-12-17 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | LED lighting methods, apparatus, and systems including historic sensor data logging |
US10539311B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2020-01-21 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Sensor-based lighting methods, apparatus, and systems |
US8543249B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-09-24 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with modular sensor bus |
US20120235579A1 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2012-09-20 | Digital Lumens, Incorporated | Methods, apparatus and systems for providing occupancy-based variable lighting |
US8552664B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-10-08 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with ballast interface |
US8866408B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2014-10-21 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Methods, apparatus, and systems for automatic power adjustment based on energy demand information |
US8805550B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2014-08-12 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with power source arbitration |
US8360599B2 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2013-01-29 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Electric shock resistant L.E.D. based light |
US8773030B2 (en) * | 2008-10-02 | 2014-07-08 | Hunter Industries, Inc. | Low voltage outdoor lighting power source and control system |
CN102171733B (en) * | 2008-10-09 | 2015-04-29 | 报知机株式会社 | Smoke detector |
US7938562B2 (en) | 2008-10-24 | 2011-05-10 | Altair Engineering, Inc. | Lighting including integral communication apparatus |
US8901823B2 (en) | 2008-10-24 | 2014-12-02 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Light and light sensor |
US8324817B2 (en) | 2008-10-24 | 2012-12-04 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Light and light sensor |
US8653984B2 (en) | 2008-10-24 | 2014-02-18 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Integration of LED lighting control with emergency notification systems |
US8214084B2 (en) | 2008-10-24 | 2012-07-03 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Integration of LED lighting with building controls |
KR20100072762A (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2010-07-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus for providing information of object, apparatus for detecting object, and system for detecting object |
US8954170B2 (en) | 2009-04-14 | 2015-02-10 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Power management unit with multi-input arbitration |
US8536802B2 (en) | 2009-04-14 | 2013-09-17 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | LED-based lighting methods, apparatus, and systems employing LED light bars, occupancy sensing, and local state machine |
US8593135B2 (en) | 2009-04-14 | 2013-11-26 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Low-cost power measurement circuit |
WO2011014963A1 (en) * | 2009-08-07 | 2011-02-10 | Led Roadway Lighting Ltd. | Single-ended primary inductance converter (sepic) based power supply for driving multiple strings of light emitting diodes (leds) in roadway lighting fixtures |
KR101107886B1 (en) * | 2009-10-30 | 2012-01-25 | 삼성엘이디 주식회사 | Port light control unit |
EP2553320A4 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2014-06-18 | Ilumisys Inc | Led light with thermoelectric generator |
US8540401B2 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2013-09-24 | Ilumisys, Inc. | LED bulb with internal heat dissipating structures |
KR101139420B1 (en) * | 2010-07-06 | 2012-04-27 | 삼성엘이디 주식회사 | Apparatus for light |
KR20120040958A (en) * | 2010-10-20 | 2012-04-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for communicating in a portable terminal |
US8523394B2 (en) | 2010-10-29 | 2013-09-03 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Mechanisms for reducing risk of shock during installation of light tube |
CA2816978C (en) | 2010-11-04 | 2020-07-28 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Method, apparatus, and system for occupancy sensing |
US8912905B2 (en) | 2011-02-28 | 2014-12-16 | Chon Meng Wong | LED lighting system |
AU2015255250B2 (en) * | 2011-03-21 | 2017-02-02 | Osram Sylvania Inc. | Methods, apparatus and systems for providing occupancy-based variable lighting |
US9967940B2 (en) * | 2011-05-05 | 2018-05-08 | Integrated Illumination Systems, Inc. | Systems and methods for active thermal management |
US9072171B2 (en) | 2011-08-24 | 2015-06-30 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Circuit board mount for LED light |
CA3045805A1 (en) | 2011-11-03 | 2013-05-10 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Methods, systems, and apparatus for intelligent lighting |
US9184518B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2015-11-10 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Electrical connector header for an LED-based light |
EP2829160B1 (en) | 2012-03-19 | 2021-04-21 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Methods, systems, and apparatus for providing variable illumination |
US8368310B1 (en) * | 2012-03-23 | 2013-02-05 | Inncom International, Inc. | System and method for distributed lighting device control |
US20140015438A1 (en) * | 2012-05-06 | 2014-01-16 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Tunable light system and associated methods |
US10721808B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2020-07-21 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Light fixture control |
US10219338B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2019-02-26 | Cree, Inc. | Modular lighting control |
US9163794B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2015-10-20 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Power supply assembly for LED-based light tube |
US9271367B2 (en) | 2012-07-09 | 2016-02-23 | Ilumisys, Inc. | System and method for controlling operation of an LED-based light |
EP2688372A1 (en) * | 2012-07-20 | 2014-01-22 | Thomson Licensing | Apparatus and method for detecting fluorescent lighting |
US8974077B2 (en) | 2012-07-30 | 2015-03-10 | Ultravision Technologies, Llc | Heat sink for LED light source |
WO2014099973A1 (en) * | 2012-12-18 | 2014-06-26 | Cree, Inc. | Master/slave arrangement for lighting fixture modules |
WO2014118663A1 (en) * | 2013-01-31 | 2014-08-07 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Requesting information from lighting devices |
US9167669B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2015-10-20 | Lutron Electronic Co., Inc. | State change devices for switched electrical receptacles |
US9285084B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2016-03-15 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Diffusers for LED-based lights |
US9116043B2 (en) * | 2013-03-18 | 2015-08-25 | Apple Inc. | Ambient light sensors with photodiode leakage current compensation |
EP2992395B1 (en) | 2013-04-30 | 2018-03-07 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Operating light emitting diodes at low temperature |
US10025279B2 (en) * | 2013-06-18 | 2018-07-17 | NuLEDs, Inc. | Controlling loads and collecting building information via IP networks |
JP6466929B2 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2019-02-06 | フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ | Method and apparatus for controlling lighting based on a combination of inputs |
US9267650B2 (en) | 2013-10-09 | 2016-02-23 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Lens for an LED-based light |
CA2926260C (en) | 2013-10-10 | 2023-01-24 | Digital Lumens Incorporated | Methods, systems, and apparatus for intelligent lighting |
US10047912B2 (en) | 2013-10-15 | 2018-08-14 | LIFI Labs, Inc. | Lighting assembly |
US11455884B2 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2022-09-27 | LIFI Labs, Inc. | Lighting system |
US9210779B2 (en) | 2013-11-14 | 2015-12-08 | LIFI Labs, Inc. | Resettable lighting system and method |
US10806010B2 (en) | 2013-12-26 | 2020-10-13 | Lutron Technology Company Llc | Control device for use with a three-way lamp socket |
US10317923B2 (en) * | 2013-12-26 | 2019-06-11 | Lutron Technology Company Llc | Load-sensing remote control device for use in a load control system |
US9848479B2 (en) | 2013-12-26 | 2017-12-19 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Faceplate remote control device for use in a load control system |
WO2015112437A1 (en) | 2014-01-22 | 2015-07-30 | Ilumisys, Inc. | Led-based light with addressed leds |
US9510400B2 (en) | 2014-05-13 | 2016-11-29 | Ilumisys, Inc. | User input systems for an LED-based light |
WO2015179786A1 (en) | 2014-05-22 | 2015-11-26 | LIFI Labs, Inc. | Directional lighting system and method |
CN106461762B (en) * | 2014-05-23 | 2022-03-18 | 昕诺飞控股有限公司 | Object detection system and method |
US10623096B2 (en) * | 2014-06-20 | 2020-04-14 | Legasus Networks, Inc. | Deployment of a wireless communication network by retrofitting spatially distributed electric lamps with integrated light/communicator modules |
US9660725B2 (en) | 2014-07-30 | 2017-05-23 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Identifier announcement and detection scheme for PoE fixtures |
US9596739B2 (en) | 2014-07-31 | 2017-03-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Distributed control of lights subject to compliance constraints |
US10129958B2 (en) | 2014-07-31 | 2018-11-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Light fixture emergency power system |
EP3180961B1 (en) * | 2014-08-14 | 2019-09-11 | Signify Holding B.V. | A lighting system for a stadium |
US10264645B2 (en) * | 2014-09-15 | 2019-04-16 | Marc Breit | Light and method for operating a light |
US9520008B2 (en) * | 2014-09-26 | 2016-12-13 | Tyco Safety Products Canada Ltd. | Auto enrollment for configuring access control systems |
US11300773B2 (en) * | 2014-09-29 | 2022-04-12 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Mid-infrared scanning system |
US10161568B2 (en) | 2015-06-01 | 2018-12-25 | Ilumisys, Inc. | LED-based light with canted outer walls |
EP3171674B1 (en) * | 2015-11-18 | 2018-10-31 | Helvar Oy Ab | A learning luminaire, and a learning control device for a luminaire, using fuzzy logic |
FR3046493B1 (en) * | 2015-12-31 | 2018-07-27 | Aledia | OPTOELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH ELECTROLUMINESCENT DIODES |
CN105898916B (en) * | 2016-04-08 | 2018-09-04 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of method of light-emitting device and its coordinate plant growth |
CN105934019B (en) * | 2016-04-25 | 2017-09-29 | 成都益英光电科技有限公司 | The illuminator and its detection method that can be communicated with one another |
US10348974B2 (en) * | 2016-08-02 | 2019-07-09 | Cree, Inc. | Solid state lighting fixtures and image capture systems |
US10440794B2 (en) | 2016-11-02 | 2019-10-08 | LIFI Labs, Inc. | Lighting system and method |
US10278254B2 (en) * | 2016-12-02 | 2019-04-30 | Sterno Home Inc. | Illumination system with color-changing lights |
US10419953B2 (en) * | 2017-12-05 | 2019-09-17 | Echelon Corporation | Self-healing lighting network |
JP7113246B2 (en) * | 2018-03-28 | 2022-08-05 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Communication device |
CN114007318B (en) * | 2021-11-01 | 2023-09-22 | 成都世纪光合作用科技有限公司 | Intelligent lamp resetting system, method and device and electronic equipment |
Citations (87)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4139770A (en) * | 1976-11-22 | 1979-02-13 | Hartwig Beyersdorf | Smoke alarm |
US5264997A (en) * | 1992-03-04 | 1993-11-23 | Dominion Automotive Industries Corp. | Sealed, inductively powered lamp assembly |
US5465199A (en) * | 1994-08-19 | 1995-11-07 | Sea Gull Lighting | System for attaching trim to lamp housing |
US5561346A (en) * | 1994-08-10 | 1996-10-01 | Byrne; David J. | LED lamp construction |
US5783909A (en) * | 1997-01-10 | 1998-07-21 | Relume Corporation | Maintaining LED luminous intensity |
US5803579A (en) * | 1996-06-13 | 1998-09-08 | Gentex Corporation | Illuminator assembly incorporating light emitting diodes |
US5909429A (en) * | 1996-09-03 | 1999-06-01 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Method for installing a wireless network which transmits node addresses directly from a wireless installation device to the nodes without using the wireless network |
US6236331B1 (en) * | 1998-02-20 | 2001-05-22 | Newled Technologies Inc. | LED traffic light intensity controller |
US6238065B1 (en) * | 1996-06-10 | 2001-05-29 | Tenebraex Corporation | Non-glaring aesthetically pleasing lighting fixtures |
US6253530B1 (en) * | 1995-09-27 | 2001-07-03 | Tracy Price | Structural honeycomb panel building system |
US6299329B1 (en) * | 1999-02-23 | 2001-10-09 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Illumination source for a scanner having a plurality of solid state lamps and a related method |
US6305818B1 (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2001-10-23 | Ppt Vision, Inc. | Method and apparatus for L.E.D. illumination |
US6443592B1 (en) * | 1999-02-06 | 2002-09-03 | Wila Leuchten Ag | Luminaire having annular inner housing with detachable annular louver support element |
US6498441B1 (en) * | 2001-08-10 | 2002-12-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for coloring mixing of hid lamps operated at VHF frequencies using duty cycle modulation |
US20030067276A1 (en) * | 2001-10-08 | 2003-04-10 | Blanchard Randall D. | Dimmable ballast for electrodeless fluorescent lamps |
US20030222587A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2003-12-04 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Universal lighting network methods and systems |
US20040090191A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2004-05-13 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored led lighting method and apparatus |
US20060232228A1 (en) * | 2005-04-18 | 2006-10-19 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for driving backlight |
US20070029946A1 (en) * | 2005-08-03 | 2007-02-08 | Yu Chung-Che | APPARATUS OF LIGHT SOURCE AND ADJUSTABLE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR LEDs |
US20070057639A1 (en) * | 2003-06-10 | 2007-03-15 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light output modulation for data transmission |
US20070115658A1 (en) * | 1999-11-18 | 2007-05-24 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for generating and modulating white light illumination conditions |
US20070145915A1 (en) * | 2003-05-05 | 2007-06-28 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Lighting methods and systems |
US20070258240A1 (en) * | 1999-11-18 | 2007-11-08 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for generating white light |
US20080042599A1 (en) * | 2006-08-21 | 2008-02-21 | Tir Technology Lp | Ripple compensation method and apparatus |
US20080043464A1 (en) * | 2006-08-17 | 2008-02-21 | Ian Ashdown | Bi-Chromatic Illumination Apparatus |
US20080048582A1 (en) * | 2006-08-28 | 2008-02-28 | Robinson Shane P | Pwm method and apparatus, and light source driven thereby |
US20080062413A1 (en) * | 2006-07-07 | 2008-03-13 | Ian Ashdown | Apparatus and Method for Characterizing a Light Source |
US7352138B2 (en) * | 2001-03-13 | 2008-04-01 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for providing power to lighting devices |
US20080089060A1 (en) * | 2006-10-17 | 2008-04-17 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Methods and apparatus for improving versatility and impact resistance of lighting fixtures |
US20080094005A1 (en) * | 2006-10-19 | 2008-04-24 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Networkable led-based lighting fixtures and methods for powering and controlling same |
US20080136796A1 (en) * | 2006-11-20 | 2008-06-12 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Methods and apparatus for displaying images on a moving display unit |
US20080136331A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-06-12 | Tir Technology Lp | Light-Emitting Element Light Source and Temperature Management System Therefor |
US20080167734A1 (en) * | 2006-12-11 | 2008-07-10 | Robinson Shane P | Method and apparatus for digital control of a lighting device |
US20080164826A1 (en) * | 2007-01-05 | 2008-07-10 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for simulating resistive loads |
US20080183081A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2008-07-31 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Precision illumination methods and systems |
US20080239675A1 (en) * | 2005-01-05 | 2008-10-02 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Thermally and Electrically Conductive Apparatus |
US20080278941A1 (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2008-11-13 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Led-based lighting fixtures for surface illumination with improved heat dissipation and manufacturability |
US20090021182A1 (en) * | 2006-01-31 | 2009-01-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led driver circuit |
US20090021175A1 (en) * | 2006-03-06 | 2009-01-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Supply circuit and device comprising a supply circuit |
US20090072761A1 (en) * | 2002-02-14 | 2009-03-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Switching device for driving led array by pulse-shaped current modulation |
US20090079358A1 (en) * | 2007-09-21 | 2009-03-26 | Exclara Inc. | Regulation of Wavelength Shift and Perceived Color of Solid State Lighting with Temperature Variation |
US20090128059A1 (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2009-05-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Control device for controlling the color of light emitted from a light source |
US20090160364A1 (en) * | 2006-04-12 | 2009-06-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Operating solid-state lighting elements |
US20090179587A1 (en) * | 2006-04-11 | 2009-07-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for dimming a light generatng system for generating light with a variable color |
US20090179596A1 (en) * | 2006-05-11 | 2009-07-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Integrated lighting control module and power switch |
US20090189448A1 (en) * | 2006-07-07 | 2009-07-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device and method for addressing power to a load selected from a plurality of loads |
US20090224695A1 (en) * | 2006-06-26 | 2009-09-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Drive circuit for driving a load with constant current |
US20090230884A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2009-09-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device and method for controlling a lighting system by proximity sensing of a spot-light control device and spotlight control device |
US7598686B2 (en) * | 1997-12-17 | 2009-10-06 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Organic light emitting diode methods and apparatus |
US20090278473A1 (en) * | 2006-06-23 | 2009-11-12 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and device for driving an array of light sources |
US20090284174A1 (en) * | 2006-05-02 | 2009-11-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Light emitting diode circuit and arrangement and device |
US20090321666A1 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2009-12-31 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Solid-state light source with color feedback and combined communication means |
US20100007600A1 (en) * | 2006-12-13 | 2010-01-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for light emitting diode control and corresponding light sensor array, backlight and liquid crystal display |
US20100026191A1 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2010-02-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Power supply device for light elements and method for supplying power to light elements |
US20100045478A1 (en) * | 2006-11-30 | 2010-02-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Intrinsic flux sensing |
US20100072902A1 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2010-03-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light element array with controllable current sources and method of operation |
US20100072901A1 (en) * | 2006-11-10 | 2010-03-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and driver for determining drive values for driving a lighting device |
US20100079091A1 (en) * | 2006-12-08 | 2010-04-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | light source |
US20100084995A1 (en) * | 2006-12-08 | 2010-04-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device for generating light with a variable color |
US20100091488A1 (en) * | 2006-10-16 | 2010-04-15 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Luminaire arrangement with cover layer |
US20100094439A1 (en) * | 2006-09-12 | 2010-04-15 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | System for selecting and controlling light settings |
US20100127633A1 (en) * | 2004-07-02 | 2010-05-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for driving a lamp in a lighting system based on a goal energizing level of the lamp and a control apparatus therefor |
US20100148689A1 (en) * | 1999-09-29 | 2010-06-17 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Systems and methods for calibrating light output by light-emitting diodes |
US20100164399A1 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2010-07-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Switched light element array and method of operation |
US20100165618A1 (en) * | 2007-06-14 | 2010-07-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led-based luminaire with adjustable beam shape |
US20100171771A1 (en) * | 2007-06-06 | 2010-07-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for driving light emitting elements for projection of images |
US20100181936A1 (en) * | 2007-07-02 | 2010-07-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Driver Device for a Load and Method of Driving a Load With Such A Driver Device |
US20100188007A1 (en) * | 2007-06-27 | 2010-07-29 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Supplying a signal to a light source |
US20100194293A1 (en) * | 2007-07-23 | 2010-08-05 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emitting unit arrangement and control system and method thereof |
US20100231363A1 (en) * | 2006-06-29 | 2010-09-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Autonomous limited network realization and commissioning |
US20100231133A1 (en) * | 2006-11-10 | 2010-09-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Apparatus for controlling series-connected light emitting diodes |
US20100244734A1 (en) * | 2007-11-30 | 2010-09-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light output device |
US20100244707A1 (en) * | 2007-12-07 | 2010-09-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led lamp power management system and method |
US20100259182A1 (en) * | 2006-02-10 | 2010-10-14 | Tir Technology Lp | Light source intensity control system and method |
US20100264834A1 (en) * | 2007-12-07 | 2010-10-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led lamp color control system and method |
US20100271843A1 (en) * | 2007-12-18 | 2010-10-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination system, luminaire and backlighting unit |
US20100289532A1 (en) * | 2006-09-08 | 2010-11-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Adaptation circuit for controlling a conversion circuit |
US20100301780A1 (en) * | 2007-05-16 | 2010-12-02 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Button based color navigation method and device in a lighting or visualization system |
US20100308745A1 (en) * | 2006-12-12 | 2010-12-09 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination system with four primaries |
US20110025205A1 (en) * | 2004-09-29 | 2011-02-03 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device |
US20110035404A1 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2011-02-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Methods and apparatus for facilitating design, selection and/or customization of lighting effects or lighting shows |
US20110042554A1 (en) * | 2006-01-09 | 2011-02-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electonics N.V. | Light Sensor with Integrated Temperature Sensor Functionality |
US20110095694A1 (en) * | 2004-11-18 | 2011-04-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light source with improved dimming behavior |
US8022632B2 (en) * | 2006-01-19 | 2011-09-20 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Color-controlled illumination device |
US20110285292A1 (en) * | 2007-12-22 | 2011-11-24 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Led-based luminaires for large-scale architectural illumination |
US20110291812A1 (en) * | 2005-01-12 | 2011-12-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | System for creating a certain atmosphere in a room |
US20120019670A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2012-01-26 | Nelson Liang An Chang | Multi-projector system and method |
Family Cites Families (204)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS556687A (en) | 1978-06-29 | 1980-01-18 | Handotai Kenkyu Shinkokai | Traffic use display |
JP3183078B2 (en) | 1994-02-28 | 2001-07-03 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Control signal generation circuit, automatic gain control circuit using the same, receiver using the same, and communication system using the same |
ATE229155T1 (en) | 1996-10-16 | 2002-12-15 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | SIGNAL LAMP WITH LEDS |
TW330233B (en) | 1997-01-23 | 1998-04-21 | Philips Eloctronics N V | Luminary |
JP4260226B2 (en) | 1997-08-01 | 2009-04-30 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Circuit device and signal lamp equipped with the circuit device |
CN1192682C (en) | 1997-08-01 | 2005-03-09 | 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 | Circuit arrangement, and signaling light provided with circuit arrangement |
CA2267407A1 (en) | 1997-08-01 | 1999-02-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Multiresonant dc-dc converter with full-wave rectifying means |
US7113541B1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2006-09-26 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Method for software driven generation of multiple simultaneous high speed pulse width modulated signals |
US6292901B1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2001-09-18 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Power/data protocol |
US6965205B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2005-11-15 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Light emitting diode based products |
US6720745B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-04-13 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Data delivery track |
US7231060B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2007-06-12 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods of generating control signals |
US20020113555A1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2002-08-22 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Lighting entertainment system |
US7161313B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2007-01-09 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Light emitting diode based products |
US20020074559A1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2002-06-20 | Dowling Kevin J. | Ultraviolet light emitting diode systems and methods |
US20070086912A1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2007-04-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Ultraviolet light emitting diode systems and methods |
US6608453B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2003-08-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for controlling devices in a networked lighting system |
US7352339B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2008-04-01 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Diffuse illumination systems and methods |
US6777891B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-08-17 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for controlling devices in a networked lighting system |
US20040052076A1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2004-03-18 | Mueller George G. | Controlled lighting methods and apparatus |
US7186003B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2007-03-06 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Light-emitting diode based products |
US7064498B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2006-06-20 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Light-emitting diode based products |
US7038398B1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2006-05-02 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Kinetic illumination system and methods |
US7353071B2 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2008-04-01 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Method and apparatus for authoring and playing back lighting sequences |
US7242152B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2007-07-10 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods of controlling light systems |
US7139617B1 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2006-11-21 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for authoring lighting sequences |
US6975079B2 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2005-12-13 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling illumination sources |
US6211626B1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2001-04-03 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Illumination components |
US6528954B1 (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2003-03-04 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Smart light bulb |
US6016038A (en) | 1997-08-26 | 2000-01-18 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Multicolored LED lighting method and apparatus |
WO1999028346A1 (en) * | 1997-12-03 | 1999-06-10 | Roche Diagnostics Gmbh | Erythropoietin with high specific activity |
US7132804B2 (en) | 1997-12-17 | 2006-11-07 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Data delivery track |
US7228190B2 (en) | 2000-06-21 | 2007-06-05 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Method and apparatus for controlling a lighting system in response to an audio input |
DE69912391T2 (en) | 1998-07-01 | 2004-08-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT AND SIGNAL LIGHT THEREFORE |
AU5639699A (en) | 1998-09-04 | 2000-03-27 | Wynne Willson Gottelier Limited | Apparatus and method for providing a linear effect |
KR100702273B1 (en) | 1998-09-28 | 2007-03-30 | 코닌클리즈케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | Lighting system |
TW417842U (en) | 1998-09-28 | 2001-01-01 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Lighting system |
AUPP729298A0 (en) | 1998-11-24 | 1998-12-17 | Showers International Pty Ltd | Housing and mounting system for a strip lighting device |
US6127783A (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2000-10-03 | Philips Electronics North America Corp. | LED luminaire with electronically adjusted color balance |
US6445139B1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2002-09-03 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led luminaire with electrically adjusted color balance |
US6495964B1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2002-12-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED luminaire with electrically adjusted color balance using photodetector |
CA2343062A1 (en) | 1999-07-07 | 2001-01-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Flyback converter as led driver |
US6296612B1 (en) | 1999-07-09 | 2001-10-02 | General Electric Company | Method and apparatus for adaptive wall filtering in spectral Doppler ultrasound imaging |
US7233831B2 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2007-06-19 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for controlling programmable lighting systems |
US20080140231A1 (en) | 1999-07-14 | 2008-06-12 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for authoring and playing back lighting sequences |
US6340864B1 (en) | 1999-08-10 | 2002-01-22 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Lighting control system including a wireless remote sensor |
US6157093A (en) | 1999-09-27 | 2000-12-05 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Modular master-slave power supply controller |
US6194839B1 (en) | 1999-11-01 | 2001-02-27 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Lattice structure based LED array for illumination |
US6201353B1 (en) | 1999-11-01 | 2001-03-13 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | LED array employing a lattice relationship |
US6249088B1 (en) | 1999-11-01 | 2001-06-19 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Three-dimensional lattice structure based led array for illumination |
US6513949B1 (en) | 1999-12-02 | 2003-02-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED/phosphor-LED hybrid lighting systems |
US6796680B1 (en) | 2000-01-28 | 2004-09-28 | Lumileds Lighting U.S., Llc | Strip lighting |
WO2001058218A1 (en) | 2000-02-03 | 2001-08-09 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Supply assembly for a led lighting module |
US6288497B1 (en) | 2000-03-24 | 2001-09-11 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Matrix structure based LED array for illumination |
PT1422975E (en) | 2000-04-24 | 2010-07-09 | Philips Solid State Lighting | Light-emitting diode based product |
US7550935B2 (en) | 2000-04-24 | 2009-06-23 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc | Methods and apparatus for downloading lighting programs |
US7202613B2 (en) | 2001-05-30 | 2007-04-10 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Controlled lighting methods and apparatus |
US20050275626A1 (en) | 2000-06-21 | 2005-12-15 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Entertainment lighting system |
AU2001277185A1 (en) | 2000-07-27 | 2002-02-13 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Lighting control using speech recognition |
WO2002013490A2 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2002-02-14 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Automatic configuration systems and methods for lighting and other applications |
US7161556B2 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2007-01-09 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Systems and methods for programming illumination devices |
US6636003B2 (en) | 2000-09-06 | 2003-10-21 | Spectrum Kinetics | Apparatus and method for adjusting the color temperature of white semiconduct or light emitters |
US6507158B1 (en) | 2000-11-15 | 2003-01-14 | Koninkljke Philips Electronics N.V. | Protocol enhancement for lighting control networks and communications interface for same |
US6441558B1 (en) | 2000-12-07 | 2002-08-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | White LED luminary light control system |
US6411046B1 (en) | 2000-12-27 | 2002-06-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N. V. | Effective modeling of CIE xy coordinates for a plurality of LEDs for white LED light control |
US7071762B2 (en) | 2001-01-31 | 2006-07-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Supply assembly for a led lighting module |
US6831569B2 (en) | 2001-03-08 | 2004-12-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for assigning and binding a network address of a ballast |
US6801003B2 (en) | 2001-03-13 | 2004-10-05 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Systems and methods for synchronizing lighting effects |
US6510995B2 (en) | 2001-03-16 | 2003-01-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | RGB LED based light driver using microprocessor controlled AC distributed power system |
US6384545B1 (en) | 2001-03-19 | 2002-05-07 | Ee Theow Lau | Lighting controller |
US6507159B2 (en) | 2001-03-29 | 2003-01-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Controlling method and system for RGB based LED luminary |
US6576881B2 (en) | 2001-04-06 | 2003-06-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and system for controlling a light source |
US6992803B2 (en) | 2001-05-08 | 2006-01-31 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | RGB primary color point identification system and method |
US6577512B2 (en) | 2001-05-25 | 2003-06-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Power supply for LEDs |
US7598681B2 (en) | 2001-05-30 | 2009-10-06 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for controlling devices in a networked lighting system |
US6741351B2 (en) | 2001-06-07 | 2004-05-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED luminaire with light sensor configurations for optical feedback |
US6639368B2 (en) | 2001-07-02 | 2003-10-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Programmable PWM module for controlling a ballast |
JP4139326B2 (en) | 2001-07-19 | 2008-08-27 | フィリップス ルミレッズ ライティング カンパニー リミテッド ライアビリティ カンパニー | LED switching device |
WO2003009654A1 (en) | 2001-07-19 | 2003-01-30 | Lumileds Lighting U.S., Llc | Led switching arrangement |
US6617795B2 (en) | 2001-07-26 | 2003-09-09 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Multichip LED package with in-package quantitative and spectral sensing capability and digital signal output |
US6489731B1 (en) | 2001-07-27 | 2002-12-03 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Power supply and/or ballast system controlled by desired load power spectrum |
US6621235B2 (en) | 2001-08-03 | 2003-09-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Integrated LED driving device with current sharing for multiple LED strings |
US20030036807A1 (en) | 2001-08-14 | 2003-02-20 | Fosler Ross M. | Multiple master digital addressable lighting interface (DALI) system, method and apparatus |
US6734639B2 (en) | 2001-08-15 | 2004-05-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Sample and hold method to achieve square-wave PWM current source for light emitting diode arrays |
EP1430281A1 (en) | 2001-09-11 | 2004-06-23 | LumiLeds Lighting U.S., LLC | Color photosensor |
US7358929B2 (en) | 2001-09-17 | 2008-04-15 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Tile lighting methods and systems |
US6596977B2 (en) | 2001-10-05 | 2003-07-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Average light sensing for PWM control of RGB LED based white light luminaries |
US6630801B2 (en) | 2001-10-22 | 2003-10-07 | Lümileds USA | Method and apparatus for sensing the color point of an RGB LED white luminary using photodiodes |
US6586890B2 (en) | 2001-12-05 | 2003-07-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | LED driver circuit with PWM output |
US6552495B1 (en) | 2001-12-19 | 2003-04-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Adaptive control system and method with spatial uniform color metric for RGB LED based white light illumination |
US6932477B2 (en) | 2001-12-21 | 2005-08-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Apparatus for providing multi-spectral light for an image projection system |
US6724159B2 (en) | 2001-12-27 | 2004-04-20 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for controlling lighting based on user behavior |
US6853150B2 (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2005-02-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emitting diode driver |
US6859644B2 (en) | 2002-03-13 | 2005-02-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Initialization of wireless-controlled lighting systems |
US7358679B2 (en) | 2002-05-09 | 2008-04-15 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Dimmable LED-based MR16 lighting apparatus and methods |
US6998594B2 (en) | 2002-06-25 | 2006-02-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for maintaining light characteristics from a multi-chip LED package |
DE10330135A1 (en) | 2002-07-10 | 2004-01-22 | LumiLeds Lighting, U.S., LLC, San Jose | circuitry |
US7204622B2 (en) | 2002-08-28 | 2007-04-17 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and systems for illuminating environments |
US7300192B2 (en) | 2002-10-03 | 2007-11-27 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for illuminating environments |
US6796686B2 (en) | 2002-10-04 | 2004-09-28 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Color-corrected hollow prismatic light guide luminaire |
TWI358688B (en) | 2002-10-14 | 2012-02-21 | Philips Lumileds Lighting Co | Circuit for operating a led array |
US7507001B2 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2009-03-24 | Denovo Lighting, Llc | Retrofit LED lamp for fluorescent fixtures without ballast |
US7490957B2 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2009-02-17 | Denovo Lighting, L.L.C. | Power controls with photosensor for tube mounted LEDs with ballast |
US7067992B2 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2006-06-27 | Denovo Lighting, Llc | Power controls for tube mounted LEDs with ballast |
US6762562B2 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2004-07-13 | Denovo Lighting, Llc | Tubular housing with light emitting diodes |
US6853151B2 (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2005-02-08 | Denovo Lighting, Llc | LED retrofit lamp |
WO2004049765A1 (en) | 2002-11-27 | 2004-06-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Luminaire providing an output beam with a controllable photometric distribution. |
DE10356608B4 (en) | 2002-12-03 | 2017-09-28 | Philips Lighting North America Corporation | Lighting arrangement and liquid crystal display |
ES2933481T3 (en) | 2002-12-19 | 2023-02-09 | Signify Holding Bv | led driver |
AU2003286348A1 (en) | 2002-12-20 | 2004-07-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Sensing light emitted from multiple light sources |
DE60320307T2 (en) | 2002-12-26 | 2009-05-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | COLOR TEMPERATURE CORRECTION FOR LED WITH WAVE LENGTH CONVERSION ON PHOSPHORUS BASE |
KR101025176B1 (en) | 2002-12-26 | 2011-03-31 | 코닌클리즈케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | Pwm led regulator with sample and hold |
ATE356528T1 (en) | 2003-05-07 | 2007-03-15 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | USER INTERFACE FOR CONTROLLING LIGHT-LIGHT DIODES |
WO2004100612A1 (en) | 2003-05-07 | 2004-11-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Single driver for multiple light emitting diodes |
WO2004100614A1 (en) | 2003-05-07 | 2004-11-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Current control method and circuit for light emitting diodes |
EP1649210A1 (en) | 2003-07-22 | 2006-04-26 | Tir Systems Ltd. | System and method for the diffusion of illumination produced by discrete light sources |
EP1649730B1 (en) | 2003-07-23 | 2013-03-13 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Control system for an illumination device incorporating discrete light sources |
TWI329724B (en) | 2003-09-09 | 2010-09-01 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Integrated lamp with feedback and wireless control |
CN1602132A (en) | 2003-09-24 | 2005-03-30 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | System and method of controlling luminous device |
EP1680947A1 (en) | 2003-10-24 | 2006-07-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Ballast |
WO2005048658A1 (en) | 2003-11-13 | 2005-05-26 | Philips Intellectual Property & Standards Gmbh | Resonant power led control circuit with brightness and colour control |
EP1687692B1 (en) | 2003-11-20 | 2010-04-28 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Light system manager |
US7202641B2 (en) | 2003-12-12 | 2007-04-10 | Philips Lumileds Lighting Company, Llc | DC-to-DC converter |
EP1711739A4 (en) | 2004-01-28 | 2008-07-23 | Tir Technology Lp | Directly viewable luminaire |
CA2730210C (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2015-05-05 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Power control methods and apparatus |
US7354172B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2008-04-08 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for controlled lighting based on a reference gamut |
US7515128B2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2009-04-07 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for providing luminance compensation |
WO2005089293A2 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2005-09-29 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and systems for providing lighting systems |
US20060221606A1 (en) | 2004-03-15 | 2006-10-05 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Led-based lighting retrofit subassembly apparatus |
TW200602585A (en) | 2004-03-16 | 2006-01-16 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | High brightness illumination device with incoherent solid state light source |
EP1586811A1 (en) | 2004-04-16 | 2005-10-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lamps and reflector arrangement for color mixing |
US7505395B2 (en) | 2004-04-19 | 2009-03-17 | Tir Technology Lp | Parallel pulse code modulation system and method |
CN1951157B (en) | 2004-05-05 | 2011-02-02 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Lighting device with user interface for light control |
TW200540490A (en) | 2004-05-05 | 2005-12-16 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Lighting device with user interface for light control |
US7202608B2 (en) | 2004-06-30 | 2007-04-10 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Switched constant current driving and control circuit |
KR20070044027A (en) | 2004-07-21 | 2007-04-26 | 코닌클리즈케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | A control unit for a lamp driver providing smooth transition between operation modes |
WO2006012737A1 (en) | 2004-08-06 | 2006-02-09 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Lighting system including photonic emission and detection using light-emitting elements |
ATE528960T1 (en) | 2004-08-12 | 2011-10-15 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCALING THE AVERAGE POWER SUPPLY FOR LIGHT EMITTING ELEMENTS |
EP1800054A2 (en) | 2004-09-10 | 2007-06-27 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Lighting zone control methods and apparatus |
WO2006031810A2 (en) | 2004-09-10 | 2006-03-23 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Power control methods and apparatus for variable loads |
US7394210B2 (en) | 2004-09-29 | 2008-07-01 | Tir Technology Lp | System and method for controlling luminaires |
EP1800204B1 (en) | 2004-10-04 | 2013-04-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device with user interface for light control |
WO2006039790A2 (en) | 2004-10-12 | 2006-04-20 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Control apparatus and method with increased resolution for use with modulated light sources |
CN101128979B (en) | 2004-10-12 | 2011-10-19 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | High precision control apparatus and method for use with modulated light sources |
JP5048506B2 (en) | 2004-10-27 | 2012-10-17 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Start-up flicker suppression in dimmable LED power supply |
EP1825717B1 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2014-01-08 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Apparatus and method for controlling colour and colour temperature of light generated by a digitally controlled luminaire |
US20070273290A1 (en) | 2004-11-29 | 2007-11-29 | Ian Ashdown | Integrated Modular Light Unit |
KR101329258B1 (en) | 2004-11-29 | 2013-11-14 | 코닌클리케 필립스 엔.브이. | Method and system for adjusting the light setting for a multi-color light source |
US7710369B2 (en) | 2004-12-20 | 2010-05-04 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Color management methods and apparatus for lighting devices |
WO2006077539A2 (en) | 2005-01-19 | 2006-07-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Dim control circuit dimming method and system |
US7689130B2 (en) | 2005-01-25 | 2010-03-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for illumination and communication |
EP1880585A1 (en) | 2005-03-03 | 2008-01-23 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Method and apparatus for controlling thermal stress in lighting devices |
WO2006105649A1 (en) | 2005-04-06 | 2006-10-12 | Tir Systems Ltd. | White light luminaire with adjustable correlated colour temperature |
US20060274526A1 (en) | 2005-04-26 | 2006-12-07 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Integrated sign illumination system |
EP1878319B1 (en) | 2005-04-28 | 2011-11-02 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Improved lighting system |
EP1886104A4 (en) | 2005-05-20 | 2011-11-16 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Multicolour chromaticity sensor |
US8061865B2 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2011-11-22 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for providing lighting via a grid system of a suspended ceiling |
US7766518B2 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2010-08-03 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | LED-based light-generating modules for socket engagement, and methods of assembling, installing and removing same |
US7703951B2 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2010-04-27 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Modular LED-based lighting fixtures having socket engagement features |
EP1889112B1 (en) | 2005-05-25 | 2009-07-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device for projecting a pixelated lighting pattern |
JP2008546017A (en) | 2005-06-01 | 2008-12-18 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Sunny-cloudy scale for setting the color temperature of white light |
US7777427B2 (en) | 2005-06-06 | 2010-08-17 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for implementing power cycle control of lighting devices based on network protocols |
EP1889116A4 (en) | 2005-06-08 | 2008-08-20 | Tir Technology Lp | Backlighting apparatus and method |
WO2007006147A1 (en) | 2005-07-14 | 2007-01-18 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Power board and plug-in lighting module |
WO2007019663A1 (en) | 2005-08-17 | 2007-02-22 | Tir Technology Lp | Digitally controlled luminaire system |
US7349454B2 (en) | 2005-09-09 | 2008-03-25 | Avago Technologies Fiber Ip Pte Ltd | Method of monitoring and controlling a laser diode |
TWI391600B (en) | 2005-09-27 | 2013-04-01 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Led lighting fixtures |
US7714265B2 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2010-05-11 | Apple Inc. | Integrated proximity sensor and light sensor |
CN101278469B (en) | 2005-10-05 | 2012-11-14 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Driver circuit arrangement |
US7914173B2 (en) | 2005-11-17 | 2011-03-29 | Koninlijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lamp assembly |
EP1955577A1 (en) | 2005-11-22 | 2008-08-13 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led lighting system and control method |
WO2007060594A2 (en) | 2005-11-22 | 2007-05-31 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination system with multiple sets of light sources |
TWI384182B (en) | 2005-12-12 | 2013-02-01 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Lamp assembly |
ATE515925T1 (en) | 2005-12-15 | 2011-07-15 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING AN ARTIFICIAL ATMOSPHERE |
CN101331798A (en) | 2005-12-16 | 2008-12-24 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Illumination device and method for controlling an illumination device |
US20080298330A1 (en) | 2005-12-19 | 2008-12-04 | Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation | Using Presence Detection To Control A Wireless Network |
EP1967049A4 (en) | 2005-12-20 | 2016-03-02 | Koninkl Philips Nv | Method and apparatus for controlling current supplied to electronic devices |
EP1967051A2 (en) | 2005-12-23 | 2008-09-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | User interface for lighting systems |
ES2368761T3 (en) | 2005-12-23 | 2011-11-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | USER INTERFACE WITH POSITION KNOWLEDGE. |
US7619370B2 (en) | 2006-01-03 | 2009-11-17 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Power allocation methods for lighting devices having multiple source spectrums, and apparatus employing same |
CA2642028C (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2013-12-10 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for high power factor controlled power delivery using a single switching stage per load |
US7658506B2 (en) | 2006-05-12 | 2010-02-09 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Recessed cove lighting apparatus for architectural surfaces |
CN101491160A (en) | 2006-07-13 | 2009-07-22 | Tir科技公司 | Light source and method for optimising illumination characteristics thereof |
EP2044403A1 (en) | 2006-07-18 | 2009-04-08 | TIR Technology LP | Method and apparatus for determining intensities and peak wavelengths of light |
KR20090048611A (en) | 2006-07-28 | 2009-05-14 | 티아이알 테크놀로지 엘피 | Light source comprising edge emitting elements |
EP2052181B1 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2010-03-31 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | An illumination device comprising a light source and a light-guide |
BRPI0715776A2 (en) | 2006-08-17 | 2013-07-16 | Technology Lp | apparatus and method for controlling thermal voltage in one or more light emitting elements |
US7712926B2 (en) | 2006-08-17 | 2010-05-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Luminaire comprising adjustable light modules |
US7569807B2 (en) | 2006-08-22 | 2009-08-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light source with photosensor light guide |
US7688002B2 (en) | 2006-09-20 | 2010-03-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emitting element control system and lighting system comprising same |
EP2087772B1 (en) | 2006-10-31 | 2017-09-06 | Philips Lighting Holding B.V. | Light source comprising light-emitting clusters |
WO2008060469A2 (en) | 2006-11-10 | 2008-05-22 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for controlling series-connected leds |
DE602007012927D1 (en) | 2006-11-27 | 2011-04-14 | Philips Solid State Lighting | ITAL PROJECTION LIGHTING |
RU2470496C2 (en) | 2006-12-11 | 2012-12-20 | Конинклейке Филипс Электроникс Н.В. | System and method of control over illuminators |
CN101647318B (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2012-05-23 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Supply circuit |
RU2462841C2 (en) | 2007-04-02 | 2012-09-27 | Конинклейке Филипс Электроникс Н.В. | Light-emitting diode control |
WO2008122941A1 (en) | 2007-04-05 | 2008-10-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light-beam shaper. |
KR101618582B1 (en) | 2007-04-20 | 2016-05-09 | 코닌클리케 필립스 엔.브이. | Lighting device with a led used for sensing |
CN101669404B (en) | 2007-04-24 | 2012-03-28 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Led string driver with shift register and level shifter |
ES2688940T3 (en) | 2007-04-27 | 2018-11-07 | Philips Lighting Holding B.V. | LED fault detection circuit |
PL2147576T3 (en) | 2007-05-03 | 2014-09-30 | Philips Lighting Holding Bv | System for controlling light sources |
JP2010527223A (en) | 2007-05-07 | 2010-08-05 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | High power factor LED based lighting apparatus and method |
WO2008139365A1 (en) | 2007-05-11 | 2008-11-20 | Philips Intellectual Property & Standards Gmbh | Driver device for leds |
US8040070B2 (en) | 2008-01-23 | 2011-10-18 | Cree, Inc. | Frequency converted dimming signal generation |
-
2008
- 2008-09-12 US US12/209,551 patent/US8255487B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2009
- 2009-01-30 US US12/363,349 patent/US8264172B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2009-05-15 US US12/466,647 patent/US8243278B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2009-09-23 US US12/565,492 patent/US20100084992A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (92)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4139770A (en) * | 1976-11-22 | 1979-02-13 | Hartwig Beyersdorf | Smoke alarm |
US5264997A (en) * | 1992-03-04 | 1993-11-23 | Dominion Automotive Industries Corp. | Sealed, inductively powered lamp assembly |
US5561346A (en) * | 1994-08-10 | 1996-10-01 | Byrne; David J. | LED lamp construction |
US5465199A (en) * | 1994-08-19 | 1995-11-07 | Sea Gull Lighting | System for attaching trim to lamp housing |
US6253530B1 (en) * | 1995-09-27 | 2001-07-03 | Tracy Price | Structural honeycomb panel building system |
US6238065B1 (en) * | 1996-06-10 | 2001-05-29 | Tenebraex Corporation | Non-glaring aesthetically pleasing lighting fixtures |
US5803579A (en) * | 1996-06-13 | 1998-09-08 | Gentex Corporation | Illuminator assembly incorporating light emitting diodes |
US5909429A (en) * | 1996-09-03 | 1999-06-01 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Method for installing a wireless network which transmits node addresses directly from a wireless installation device to the nodes without using the wireless network |
US5783909A (en) * | 1997-01-10 | 1998-07-21 | Relume Corporation | Maintaining LED luminous intensity |
US20080183081A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2008-07-31 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Precision illumination methods and systems |
US20030222587A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2003-12-04 | Color Kinetics, Inc. | Universal lighting network methods and systems |
US7309965B2 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2007-12-18 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Universal lighting network methods and systems |
US20040178751A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2004-09-16 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored lighting method and apparatus |
US20040090191A1 (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 2004-05-13 | Color Kinetics, Incorporated | Multicolored led lighting method and apparatus |
US7598686B2 (en) * | 1997-12-17 | 2009-10-06 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Organic light emitting diode methods and apparatus |
US6236331B1 (en) * | 1998-02-20 | 2001-05-22 | Newled Technologies Inc. | LED traffic light intensity controller |
US6305818B1 (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2001-10-23 | Ppt Vision, Inc. | Method and apparatus for L.E.D. illumination |
US6443592B1 (en) * | 1999-02-06 | 2002-09-03 | Wila Leuchten Ag | Luminaire having annular inner housing with detachable annular louver support element |
US6299329B1 (en) * | 1999-02-23 | 2001-10-09 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Illumination source for a scanner having a plurality of solid state lamps and a related method |
US20100148689A1 (en) * | 1999-09-29 | 2010-06-17 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Systems and methods for calibrating light output by light-emitting diodes |
US20070115658A1 (en) * | 1999-11-18 | 2007-05-24 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for generating and modulating white light illumination conditions |
US20070258240A1 (en) * | 1999-11-18 | 2007-11-08 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for generating white light |
US7352138B2 (en) * | 2001-03-13 | 2008-04-01 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for providing power to lighting devices |
US6498441B1 (en) * | 2001-08-10 | 2002-12-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for coloring mixing of hid lamps operated at VHF frequencies using duty cycle modulation |
US20030067276A1 (en) * | 2001-10-08 | 2003-04-10 | Blanchard Randall D. | Dimmable ballast for electrodeless fluorescent lamps |
US20090072761A1 (en) * | 2002-02-14 | 2009-03-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Switching device for driving led array by pulse-shaped current modulation |
US20070145915A1 (en) * | 2003-05-05 | 2007-06-28 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Lighting methods and systems |
US20070057639A1 (en) * | 2003-06-10 | 2007-03-15 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light output modulation for data transmission |
US20100127633A1 (en) * | 2004-07-02 | 2010-05-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for driving a lamp in a lighting system based on a goal energizing level of the lamp and a control apparatus therefor |
US20110025205A1 (en) * | 2004-09-29 | 2011-02-03 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device |
US20110095694A1 (en) * | 2004-11-18 | 2011-04-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light source with improved dimming behavior |
US20080239675A1 (en) * | 2005-01-05 | 2008-10-02 | Tir Systems Ltd. | Thermally and Electrically Conductive Apparatus |
US20110291812A1 (en) * | 2005-01-12 | 2011-12-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | System for creating a certain atmosphere in a room |
US20060232228A1 (en) * | 2005-04-18 | 2006-10-19 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for driving backlight |
US20070029946A1 (en) * | 2005-08-03 | 2007-02-08 | Yu Chung-Che | APPARATUS OF LIGHT SOURCE AND ADJUSTABLE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR LEDs |
US20110042554A1 (en) * | 2006-01-09 | 2011-02-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electonics N.V. | Light Sensor with Integrated Temperature Sensor Functionality |
US8022632B2 (en) * | 2006-01-19 | 2011-09-20 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Color-controlled illumination device |
US20090021182A1 (en) * | 2006-01-31 | 2009-01-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led driver circuit |
US20100259182A1 (en) * | 2006-02-10 | 2010-10-14 | Tir Technology Lp | Light source intensity control system and method |
US20090021175A1 (en) * | 2006-03-06 | 2009-01-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Supply circuit and device comprising a supply circuit |
US20090128059A1 (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2009-05-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Control device for controlling the color of light emitted from a light source |
US20090179587A1 (en) * | 2006-04-11 | 2009-07-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for dimming a light generatng system for generating light with a variable color |
US20090160364A1 (en) * | 2006-04-12 | 2009-06-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Operating solid-state lighting elements |
US20090284174A1 (en) * | 2006-05-02 | 2009-11-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Light emitting diode circuit and arrangement and device |
US20090179596A1 (en) * | 2006-05-11 | 2009-07-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Integrated lighting control module and power switch |
US20090278473A1 (en) * | 2006-06-23 | 2009-11-12 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and device for driving an array of light sources |
US20090224695A1 (en) * | 2006-06-26 | 2009-09-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Drive circuit for driving a load with constant current |
US20100231363A1 (en) * | 2006-06-29 | 2010-09-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Autonomous limited network realization and commissioning |
US20090230884A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2009-09-17 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device and method for controlling a lighting system by proximity sensing of a spot-light control device and spotlight control device |
US20090189448A1 (en) * | 2006-07-07 | 2009-07-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device and method for addressing power to a load selected from a plurality of loads |
US20080062413A1 (en) * | 2006-07-07 | 2008-03-13 | Ian Ashdown | Apparatus and Method for Characterizing a Light Source |
US20080043464A1 (en) * | 2006-08-17 | 2008-02-21 | Ian Ashdown | Bi-Chromatic Illumination Apparatus |
US20080042599A1 (en) * | 2006-08-21 | 2008-02-21 | Tir Technology Lp | Ripple compensation method and apparatus |
US20080048582A1 (en) * | 2006-08-28 | 2008-02-28 | Robinson Shane P | Pwm method and apparatus, and light source driven thereby |
US20100289532A1 (en) * | 2006-09-08 | 2010-11-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Adaptation circuit for controlling a conversion circuit |
US20100094439A1 (en) * | 2006-09-12 | 2010-04-15 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | System for selecting and controlling light settings |
US20090321666A1 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2009-12-31 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V | Solid-state light source with color feedback and combined communication means |
US20100026191A1 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2010-02-04 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Power supply device for light elements and method for supplying power to light elements |
US20100072902A1 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2010-03-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light element array with controllable current sources and method of operation |
US20100164399A1 (en) * | 2006-10-06 | 2010-07-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Switched light element array and method of operation |
US20100091488A1 (en) * | 2006-10-16 | 2010-04-15 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Luminaire arrangement with cover layer |
US20080089060A1 (en) * | 2006-10-17 | 2008-04-17 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Methods and apparatus for improving versatility and impact resistance of lighting fixtures |
US20080094005A1 (en) * | 2006-10-19 | 2008-04-24 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Networkable led-based lighting fixtures and methods for powering and controlling same |
US20080136331A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-06-12 | Tir Technology Lp | Light-Emitting Element Light Source and Temperature Management System Therefor |
US20100072901A1 (en) * | 2006-11-10 | 2010-03-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and driver for determining drive values for driving a lighting device |
US20100231133A1 (en) * | 2006-11-10 | 2010-09-16 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Apparatus for controlling series-connected light emitting diodes |
US20080136796A1 (en) * | 2006-11-20 | 2008-06-12 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions | Methods and apparatus for displaying images on a moving display unit |
US20100045478A1 (en) * | 2006-11-30 | 2010-02-25 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Intrinsic flux sensing |
US20100084995A1 (en) * | 2006-12-08 | 2010-04-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Device for generating light with a variable color |
US20100079091A1 (en) * | 2006-12-08 | 2010-04-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | light source |
US20080167734A1 (en) * | 2006-12-11 | 2008-07-10 | Robinson Shane P | Method and apparatus for digital control of a lighting device |
US20100308745A1 (en) * | 2006-12-12 | 2010-12-09 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination system with four primaries |
US20100007600A1 (en) * | 2006-12-13 | 2010-01-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method for light emitting diode control and corresponding light sensor array, backlight and liquid crystal display |
US8026673B2 (en) * | 2007-01-05 | 2011-09-27 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for simulating resistive loads |
US20080164854A1 (en) * | 2007-01-05 | 2008-07-10 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for simulating resistive loads |
US20080164826A1 (en) * | 2007-01-05 | 2008-07-10 | Color Kinetics Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for simulating resistive loads |
US20080278941A1 (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2008-11-13 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Led-based lighting fixtures for surface illumination with improved heat dissipation and manufacturability |
US20110090684A1 (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2011-04-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led-based lighting fixtures for surface illumination with improved heat dissipation and manufacturability |
US20100301780A1 (en) * | 2007-05-16 | 2010-12-02 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Button based color navigation method and device in a lighting or visualization system |
US20100171771A1 (en) * | 2007-06-06 | 2010-07-08 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Method and apparatus for driving light emitting elements for projection of images |
US20100165618A1 (en) * | 2007-06-14 | 2010-07-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led-based luminaire with adjustable beam shape |
US20100188007A1 (en) * | 2007-06-27 | 2010-07-29 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Supplying a signal to a light source |
US20100181936A1 (en) * | 2007-07-02 | 2010-07-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Driver Device for a Load and Method of Driving a Load With Such A Driver Device |
US20100194293A1 (en) * | 2007-07-23 | 2010-08-05 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emitting unit arrangement and control system and method thereof |
US20090079358A1 (en) * | 2007-09-21 | 2009-03-26 | Exclara Inc. | Regulation of Wavelength Shift and Perceived Color of Solid State Lighting with Temperature Variation |
US20100244734A1 (en) * | 2007-11-30 | 2010-09-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light output device |
US20100264834A1 (en) * | 2007-12-07 | 2010-10-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led lamp color control system and method |
US20100244707A1 (en) * | 2007-12-07 | 2010-09-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Led lamp power management system and method |
US20100271843A1 (en) * | 2007-12-18 | 2010-10-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination system, luminaire and backlighting unit |
US20110285292A1 (en) * | 2007-12-22 | 2011-11-24 | Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. | Led-based luminaires for large-scale architectural illumination |
US20110035404A1 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2011-02-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Methods and apparatus for facilitating design, selection and/or customization of lighting effects or lighting shows |
US20120019670A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2012-01-26 | Nelson Liang An Chang | Multi-projector system and method |
Cited By (112)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8175463B2 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2012-05-08 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and apparatus for connecting AC powered switches, current sensors and control devices via two way IR, fiber optic and light guide cables |
US20100278537A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2010-11-04 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and Apparatus for Connecting AC Powered Switches, Current Sensors and Control Devices Via Two Way IR, Fiber Optic and Light Guide Cables |
US8331794B2 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2012-12-11 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and apparatus for connecting AC powered switches, current sensors and control devices via two way IR, fiber optic and light guide cables |
US8331795B2 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2012-12-11 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and apparatus for connecting AC powered switches, current sensors and control devices via two way IR, fiber optic and light guide cables |
US20120207481A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2012-08-16 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and apparatus for connecting ac powered switches, current sensors and control devices via two way ir, fiber optic and light guide cables |
US20120183298A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2012-07-19 | Elbex Video Ltd. | Method and apparatus for connecting ac powered switches, current sensors and control devices via two way ir, fiber optic and light guide cables |
US8729835B2 (en) | 2009-08-10 | 2014-05-20 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Group creation in auto-commissioning of lighting systems |
US20110095687A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Modular Networked Light Bulb |
US20110095608A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Jonsson Karl S | Power node for energy management |
US8531137B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2013-09-10 | Greenwave Reality, Pte, Ltd. | Modular networked light bulb |
US8013545B2 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-09-06 | Greenwave Reality, Pte, Ltd. | Modular networked light bulb |
US20110095709A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Networked Light Bulb with Color Wheel for Configuration |
US8306639B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2012-11-06 | Greenwave Reality, Pte, Ltd. | Home automation group selection by color |
US20110098953A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Networked Device with Power Usage Estimation |
US8138626B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2012-03-20 | Greenwave Reality, Pte Ltd. | Power node for energy management |
US8452554B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2013-05-28 | Greenwave Reality PTE, Ltd. | Networked device with power usage estimation |
US20110098831A1 (en) * | 2009-10-25 | 2011-04-28 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Home Automation Group Selection by Color |
US8421376B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2013-04-16 | Greenwave Reality Pte Ltd. | Modular networked light bulb |
US8781769B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2014-07-15 | Greenwave Reality Pte Ltd | Networked device with power usage estimation |
US8430402B2 (en) | 2009-10-25 | 2013-04-30 | Greenwave Reality Pte Ltd. | Networked light bulb with color wheel for configuration |
US8335936B2 (en) | 2010-05-10 | 2012-12-18 | Greenwave Reality, Pte Ltd. | Power node with network switch |
US9332608B2 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2016-05-03 | Greenwave Systems, Pte. Ltd. | Dual-mode dimming of a light |
US9900965B2 (en) | 2010-06-07 | 2018-02-20 | Greenware Systems, PTE, LTD. | Dual-mode dimming of a light |
US8820981B2 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2014-09-02 | Greenwave Reality Pte Ltd | Electrically controlled glass in a lamp |
US20120013238A1 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2012-01-19 | Greenwave Reality, Inc. | Electrically Controlled Glass in a Lamp |
US9234637B2 (en) | 2010-07-19 | 2016-01-12 | Greenwave PTE. LTD. | Emitting light using multiple phosphors |
US20140362580A1 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2014-12-11 | Greenwave Systems PTE Ltd. | Electrically Controlled Glass in a Lamp |
US9442340B2 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2016-09-13 | Greenwave Systems, PTE LTD | Electrically controlled glass in a lamp |
US8764210B2 (en) | 2010-07-19 | 2014-07-01 | Greenwave Reality Pte Ltd. | Emitting light using multiple phosphors |
US20140236266A1 (en) * | 2010-07-23 | 2014-08-21 | Biological Illumination, Llc | System for generating non-homogenous biologically-adjusted light and associated methods |
US20130257312A1 (en) * | 2010-07-23 | 2013-10-03 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | System for generating non-homogenous biologically-adjusted light and associated methods |
US9265968B2 (en) * | 2010-07-23 | 2016-02-23 | Biological Illumination, Llc | System for generating non-homogenous biologically-adjusted light and associated methods |
US8743023B2 (en) * | 2010-07-23 | 2014-06-03 | Biological Illumination, Llc | System for generating non-homogenous biologically-adjusted light and associated methods |
US8422889B2 (en) | 2010-09-16 | 2013-04-16 | Greenwave Reality, Pte Ltd. | Noise detector in a light bulb |
US9087514B2 (en) | 2010-09-16 | 2015-07-21 | Greenwave Systems Pte. Ltd. | Speech recognition in a lighting apparatus |
US8415900B2 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2013-04-09 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Color and position auto-commissioning |
EP2636286B1 (en) | 2011-01-04 | 2020-05-06 | Signify Holding B.V. | Power failure reporting in a networked light |
US9595118B2 (en) | 2011-05-15 | 2017-03-14 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | System for generating non-homogenous light and associated methods |
US8754832B2 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2014-06-17 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accenting regions of a layer and associated methods |
US8760370B2 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2014-06-24 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | System for generating non-homogenous light and associated methods |
US20160040842A1 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2016-02-11 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accenting regions of a layer and associated methods |
US9539852B2 (en) * | 2011-05-15 | 2017-01-10 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accenting regions of a layer and associated methods |
US9173269B2 (en) | 2011-05-15 | 2015-10-27 | Lighting Science Group Corporation | Lighting system for accentuating regions of a layer and associated methods |
US9378087B2 (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2016-06-28 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Methods for improved DMX512 communication while maintaining backwards compatibility |
US9378086B2 (en) | 2011-10-11 | 2016-06-28 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Methods and apparatus for improved DMX512 communication |
US8860316B2 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2014-10-14 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Selective light sensor and daylight management |
US8860324B2 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2014-10-14 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Selective light sensor and auto-commissioning |
US8759734B2 (en) | 2012-02-23 | 2014-06-24 | Redwood Systems, Inc. | Directional sensors for auto-commissioning lighting systems |
US10342105B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2019-07-02 | Cree, Inc. | Relay device with automatic grouping function |
US9872367B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2018-01-16 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device for grouping a plurality of lighting fixtures |
US10206270B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2019-02-12 | Cree, Inc. | Switch module for controlling lighting fixtures in a lighting network |
US10172218B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2019-01-01 | Cree, Inc. | Master/slave arrangement for lighting fixture modules |
US9980350B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2018-05-22 | Cree, Inc. | Removable module for a lighting fixture |
US10624182B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2020-04-14 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Master/slave arrangement for lighting fixture modules |
US8975827B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2015-03-10 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting fixture for distributed control |
US9706617B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-07-11 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device that is capable of interacting with a lighting fixture |
US9572226B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-02-14 | Cree, Inc. | Master/slave arrangement for lighting fixture modules |
US9795016B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-10-17 | Cree, Inc. | Master/slave arrangement for lighting fixture modules |
US11849512B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2023-12-19 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Lighting fixture that transmits switch module information to form lighting networks |
US9723696B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-08-01 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device for controlling settings of a lighting fixture |
US9723673B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-08-01 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device for merging groups of lighting fixtures |
US9717125B2 (en) | 2012-07-01 | 2017-07-25 | Cree, Inc. | Enhanced lighting fixture |
WO2014089181A1 (en) * | 2012-12-05 | 2014-06-12 | Barling Bay, Llc, A Limited Liability Company | Lighting control device and method |
US8829821B2 (en) * | 2012-12-18 | 2014-09-09 | Cree, Inc. | Auto commissioning lighting fixture |
US8912735B2 (en) | 2012-12-18 | 2014-12-16 | Cree, Inc. | Commissioning for a lighting network |
US9433061B2 (en) | 2012-12-18 | 2016-08-30 | Cree, Inc. | Handheld device for communicating with lighting fixtures |
US9155165B2 (en) | 2012-12-18 | 2015-10-06 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting fixture for automated grouping |
US9155166B2 (en) | 2012-12-18 | 2015-10-06 | Cree, Inc. | Efficient routing tables for lighting networks |
US9913348B2 (en) | 2012-12-19 | 2018-03-06 | Cree, Inc. | Light fixtures, systems for controlling light fixtures, and methods of controlling fixtures and methods of controlling lighting control systems |
US10716178B2 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2020-07-14 | Current USA, Inc. | Habitat control system |
US20150163888A1 (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2015-06-11 | Current-Usa, Inc. | Lighting control systems |
US20140232294A1 (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2014-08-21 | Current-Usa, Inc. | Lighting control systems |
US9247622B2 (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2016-01-26 | Current-Usa, Inc. | Lighting control systems |
US10455667B2 (en) * | 2013-02-20 | 2019-10-22 | Current-Usa, Inc. | Lighting control systems |
US10231304B2 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2019-03-12 | Current USA, Inc. | Habitat control system |
USD744669S1 (en) | 2013-04-22 | 2015-12-01 | Cree, Inc. | Module for a lighting fixture |
US20150084546A1 (en) * | 2013-09-20 | 2015-03-26 | Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corporation | Dimming Control System |
US9622321B2 (en) | 2013-10-11 | 2017-04-11 | Cree, Inc. | Systems, devices and methods for controlling one or more lights |
US10154569B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2018-12-11 | Cree, Inc. | Power over ethernet lighting fixture |
CN104929862A (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2015-09-23 | 通用电气公司 | System and method of controlling an electronic component of a wind turbine using contingency communications |
US20150267684A1 (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2015-09-24 | General Electric Company | System and method of controlling an electronic component of a wind turbine using contingency communications |
US9157415B1 (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2015-10-13 | General Electric Company | System and method of controlling an electronic component of a wind turbine using contingency communications |
US10278250B2 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2019-04-30 | Cree, Inc. | Lighting fixture providing variable CCT |
US9549448B2 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2017-01-17 | Cree, Inc. | Wall controller controlling CCT |
US9723680B2 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2017-08-01 | Cree, Inc. | Digitally controlled driver for lighting fixture |
US9456482B1 (en) | 2015-04-08 | 2016-09-27 | Cree, Inc. | Daylighting for different groups of lighting fixtures |
CN106996542A (en) * | 2015-10-23 | 2017-08-01 | 照明科学集团公司 | Illuminator and correlation technique for the emphasis regions of layer |
US11583990B2 (en) * | 2015-10-30 | 2023-02-21 | Milwaukee Electric Tool Corporation | Remote light control, configuration, and monitoring |
US9844114B2 (en) | 2015-12-09 | 2017-12-12 | Alb Ip Holding Llc | Color mixing for solid state lighting using direct AC drives |
US10333586B2 (en) * | 2016-05-11 | 2019-06-25 | Soraa, Inc. | Lamp power line communication |
US9854637B2 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2017-12-26 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using a single handle |
US9596730B1 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2017-03-14 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using multiple handles |
US10091856B2 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2018-10-02 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using a single handle |
US9913343B1 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2018-03-06 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using a single handle |
US10187952B2 (en) | 2016-05-18 | 2019-01-22 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Method for controlling a tunable white fixture using a single handle |
US10362655B2 (en) * | 2016-06-08 | 2019-07-23 | Colorbeam Northamerica Inc. | Light emitting diode lighting system and method |
US20170359878A1 (en) * | 2016-06-08 | 2017-12-14 | Colorbeam Northamerica Inc. | Light emitting diode lighting system and method |
US9967944B2 (en) | 2016-06-22 | 2018-05-08 | Cree, Inc. | Dimming control for LED-based luminaires |
US10595380B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2020-03-17 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Lighting wall control with virtual assistant |
US10731831B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2020-08-04 | Gemmy Industries Corp. | Clip lights and related systems |
US11470698B2 (en) | 2019-03-08 | 2022-10-11 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Lighting fixture controller for controlling color temperature and intensity |
US10874006B1 (en) | 2019-03-08 | 2020-12-22 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Lighting fixture controller for controlling color temperature and intensity |
US11310895B2 (en) * | 2019-04-05 | 2022-04-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Lighting system and lighting device |
US10728979B1 (en) | 2019-09-30 | 2020-07-28 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Lighting fixture configured to provide multiple lighting effects |
US11425804B2 (en) * | 2020-05-19 | 2022-08-23 | Asustek Computer Inc. | Color-mixing lighting control method and color-mixing lighting system using the same |
US20220022306A1 (en) * | 2020-07-14 | 2022-01-20 | Lutron Technology Company Llc | Lighting control system with light show overrides |
US11871495B2 (en) * | 2020-07-14 | 2024-01-09 | Lutron Technology Company Llc | Lighting control system with light show overrides |
US20220036864A1 (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2022-02-03 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for displaying images unto led panels |
US11495195B2 (en) | 2020-07-31 | 2022-11-08 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for data transfer in display images unto LED panels |
US11620968B2 (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2023-04-04 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for displaying images unto LED panels |
US11823649B2 (en) | 2020-07-31 | 2023-11-21 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for data transfer in display images unto LED panels |
US11893967B2 (en) | 2020-07-31 | 2024-02-06 | Alphascale Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for displaying images unto LED panels |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20090284169A1 (en) | 2009-11-19 |
US20090284184A1 (en) | 2009-11-19 |
US8264172B2 (en) | 2012-09-11 |
US8255487B2 (en) | 2012-08-28 |
US8243278B2 (en) | 2012-08-14 |
US20090284747A1 (en) | 2009-11-19 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20100084992A1 (en) | Intensity control and color mixing of light emitting devices | |
US9554450B2 (en) | Systems and method for low level dimming | |
US9967940B2 (en) | Systems and methods for active thermal management | |
US10111308B2 (en) | System for and method of commissioning lighting devices within a wireless network | |
AU2017201414B2 (en) | Methods, systems, and apparatus for providing variable illumination | |
US10051707B2 (en) | Methods and apparatus for controlling lighting based on combination of inputs | |
US7190126B1 (en) | Daylight control system device and method | |
US9049756B2 (en) | Intelligent lighting control system and network comprising multiple-channel photo sensor | |
US20150061503A1 (en) | Intelligent light emitting diode (led) controller and driver | |
US20070237284A1 (en) | Methods and apparatus for controlling devices in a networked lighting system | |
EP1393599A2 (en) | Methods and apparatus for controlling devices in a networked lighting system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: INTEGRATED ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS, INC., CONNECTICUT Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:VALOIS, CHARLES BERNARD;ZAMPINI, THOMAS LAWRENCE, II;REEL/FRAME:029228/0870 Effective date: 20120820 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |